advertisement
Operation Manual
Model T300/T300M Carbon Monoxide Analyzer
Also supports operation of:
Models T320 and T320U Analyzers
(when used in conjunction with T320/320U Addendum, PN07406)
Copyright 2010-2018 Teledyne API
© Teledyne API (TAPI) 9970 Carroll Canyon Road San Diego, CA 92131-1106 USA
Toll-free Phone: 800-324-5190 Phone: +1 858-657-9800 Fax: +1 858-657-9816 Email: Website:
[email protected]
http://www.teledyne-api.com/
06864D DCN7562 15 August 2018
N
OTICE OF
C
OPYRIGHT
© 2010-2018 Teledyne Advanced Pollution Instrumentation, Inc. All rights reserved.
T
RADEMARKS
All trademarks, registered trademarks, brand names or product names appearing in this document are the property of their respective owners and are used herein for identification purposes only. 06864D DCN7562 i
Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer This page intentionally left blank. ii 06864D DCN7562
IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION
Important safety messages are provided throughout this manual. Please read these messages carefully. A safety message alerts you to potential hazards that could hurt you or others. Each safety message is associated with a safety alert symbol. These symbols are found in the manual and inside the instrument. The definition of these symbols is described below: WARNING: Electrical Shock Hazard HAZARD: Strong oxidizer GENERAL WARNING/CAUTION: Read the accompanying message for specific information.
CAUTION: Hot Surface Warning Technician Symbol: All operations marked with this symbol are to be performed by qualified maintenance personnel only. DO NOT TOUCH: Touching some parts of the instrument without protection or proper tools could result in damage to the part(s) and/or the instrument. Electrical Ground: This symbol inside the instrument marks the central safety grounding point for the instrument.
CAUTION - General Safety Hazard
This instrument should only be used for the purpose and in the manner described in this manual. If you use this instrument in a manner other than that for which it was intended, unpredictable behavior could ensue with possible hazardous consequences. NEVER use any gas analyzer to sample combustible gas(es).
Note Technical Assistance regarding the use and maintenance of the T300/T300M or any other Teledyne API product can be obtained by contacting Teledyne API’s Technical Support Department: Phone: 800-324-5190 Email: [email protected] or by accessing various service options on our website at 7http://www.teledyne-api.com/.
06864D DCN7562 iii
Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer
CONSIGNES DE SÉCURITÉ
Des consignes de sécurité importantes sont fournies tout au long du présent manuel dans le but d’éviter des blessures corporelles ou d’endommager les instruments. Veuillez lire attentivement ces consignes. Chaque consigne de sécurité est représentée par un pictogramme d’alerte de sécurité; ces pictogrammes se retrouvent dans ce manuel et à l’intérieur des instruments. Les symboles correspondent aux consignes suivantes :
AVERTISSEMENT
: Risque de choc électrique
DANGER
: Oxydant puissant
AVERTISSEMENT GÉNÉRAL / MISE EN GARDE
: Lire la consigne complémentaire pour des renseignements spécifiques
MISE EN GARDE
: Surface chaude
Ne pas toucher
l’instrument. : Toucher à certaines parties de l’instrument sans protection ou sans les outils appropriés pourrait entraîner des dommages aux pièces ou à
Pictogramme « technicien »
: Toutes les opérations portant ce symbole doivent être effectuées uniquement par du personnel de maintenance qualifié.
Mise à la terre
: Ce symbole à l’intérieur de l’instrument détermine le point central de la mise à la terre sécuritaire de l’instrument.
MISE EN GARDE
Cet instrument doit être utilisé aux fins décrites et de la manière décrite dans ce manuel. Si vous utilisez cet instrument d’une autre manière que celle pour laquelle il a été prévu, l’instrument pourrait se comporter de façon imprévisible et entraîner des conséquences dangereuses. NE JAMAIS utiliser un analyseur de gaz pour échantillonner des gaz combustibles!
iv 06864D DCN7562
WARRANTY
WARRANTY POLICY (02024J)
Teledyne API (TAPI), a business unit of Teledyne Instruments, Inc., provides that: Prior to shipment, TAPI equipment is thoroughly inspected and tested. Should equipment failure occur, TAPI assures its customers that prompt service and support will be available.
(For the instrument-specific warranty period, please refer to the “Limited Warranty” section in the Terms and Conditions of Sale on our website at the following link: http://www.teledyne-api.com/terms_and_conditions.asp).
COVERAGE
After the warranty period and throughout the equipment lifetime, TAPI stands ready to provide on-site or in-plant service at reasonable rates similar to those of other manufacturers in the industry. All maintenance and the first level of field troubleshooting are to be performed by the customer.
NON-TAPI MANUFACTURED EQUIPMENT
Equipment provided but not manufactured by TAPI is warranted and will be repaired to the extent and according to the current terms and conditions of the respective equipment manufacturer’s warranty.
PRODUCT RETURN
All units or components returned to Teledyne API should be properly packed for handling and returned freight prepaid to the nearest designated Service Center. After the repair, the equipment will be returned, freight prepaid. The complete Terms and Conditions of Sale can be reviewed at http://www.teledyne api.com/terms_and_conditions.asp
CAUTION – Avoid Warranty Invalidation
Failure to comply with proper anti-Electro-Static Discharge (ESD) handling and packing instructions and Return Merchandise Authorization (RMA) procedures when returning parts for repair or calibration may void your warranty. For anti-ESD handling and packing instructions please refer to the manual, Fundamentals of ESD, PN 04786, in its “Packing Components for Return to Teledyne API’s Customer Service” section. The manual can be downloaded from our website at http://www.teledyne-api.com
. RMA procedures are can also be found on our website.
06864D DCN7562 v
ABOUT THIS MANUAL
Presented here is information regarding the documents that are included with this manual (Structure), its history of release and revisions (Revision History), how the content is organized (Organization), a description of other information related to this manual (Related Information), and the conventions used to present the information in this manual (Conventions Used).
S
TRUCTURE
This T300 manual, PN 06864, is comprised of multiple documents, assembled in PDF format, as listed below.
Part No.
068640000 049060000 069120000
Rev Name/Description
D Operation Manual, T300/T300M Carbon Monoxide Analyzer J B Appendix A, Menu Trees and related software documentation Interconnect Diagram (in Appendix B of this manual)
Note We recommend that this manual be read in its entirety before any attempt is made to operate the instrument.
ATTENTION
C
ONVENTIONS
U
SED
In addition to the safety symbols as presented in the
Important Safety Information
page, this manual provides
special notices
related to the safety and effective use of the analyzer and other pertinent information.
Special Notices
appear as follows:
COULD DAMAGE INSTRUMENT AND VOID WARRANTY
This special notice provides information to avoid damage to your instrument and possibly invalidate the warranty.
I MPORTANT
Note I
MPACT ON
R
EADINGS OR
D
ATA
Could either affect accuracy of instrument readings or cause loss of data. Pertinent information associated with the proper care, operation or maintenance of the analyzer or its parts.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
06864D DCN7562 vii
Table of Contents Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer
viii 06864D DCN7562
Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Table of Contents
06864D DCN7562 ix
Table of Contents Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer
x 06864D DCN7562
Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Table of Contents
06864D DCN7562 xi
Table of Contents Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer
xii 06864D DCN7562
Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Table of Contents
LIST OF APPENDICES
APPENDIX A - VERSION SPECIFIC SOFTWARE DOCUMENTATION APPENDIX B - WIRING DIAGRAM
LIST OF FIGURES
Pneumatic Connections – Option 50B: Ambient Zero/Pressurized Span Calibration Valves .....60
Pneumatic Connections – Zero Scrubber/Pressurized Span Calibration Valves (Opt 50E) .......62
Setup for Checking / Calibration Current Output Signal Levels Using an Ammeter..................120
Alternative Setup Using 250Ω Resistor for Checking Current Output Signal Levels ................122
06864D DCN7562 xiii
Table of Contents Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer
Pneumatic Connections – Option 50A: Ambient Zero/Ambient Span Calibration Valves .........197
Pneumatic Connections – Option 50B: Ambient Zero/Pressurized Span Calibration Valves ...198
Internal Pneumatic Flow OPT 50A – Zero/Span Valves (OPT 50A & 50B) ..............................250
Internal Pneumatic Flow OPT 50H – Zero/Span Valves with Internal Zero Air Scrubber .........251
Internal Pneumatic Flow OPT 50E – Zero/Span/Shutoff w/ Internal Zero Air Scrubber ............252
xiv 06864D DCN7562
Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Table of Contents
LIST OF TABLES
06864D DCN7562 xv
Table of Contents Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer
xvi 06864D DCN7562
1. INTRODUCTION, FEATURES AND OPTIONS
This section provides an overview of Teledyne API’s Model T300 or T300M Analyzer, its features and its options.
1.1.
T300 FAMILY OVERVIEW
The family includes the T300 and the T300M Gas Filter Correlation Carbon Monoxide Analyzer. The T300 family of analyzers is a microprocessor-controlled analyzer that determines the concentration of carbon monoxide (CO) in a sample gas drawn through the instrument. It uses a method based on the Beer-Lambert law, an empirical relationship that relates the absorption of light to the properties of the material through which the light is traveling over a defined distance. In this case the light is infrared radiation (IR) traveling through a sample chamber filled with gas bearing a varying concentration of CO. The T300/T300M uses Gas Filter Correlation (GFC) to overcome the interfering effects of various other gases (such as water vapor) that also absorb IR. The analyzer passes the IR beam through a spinning wheel made up of two separate chambers: one containing a high concentration of CO known as the
reference
, and the other containing a neutral gas known as the
measure
. The concentration of CO in the sample chamber is computed by taking the ratio of the instantaneous measure and reference values and then compensating the ratio for sample temperature and pressure. The T300/T300M Analyzer’s multi-tasking software gives the ability to track and report a large number of operational parameters in real time. These readings are compared to diagnostic limits kept in the analyzers memory and should any fall outside of those limits the analyzer issues automatic warnings. Built-in data acquisition capability, using the analyzer's internal memory, allows the logging of multiple parameters including averaged or instantaneous concentration values, calibration data, and operating parameters such as pressure and flow rate. Stored data are easily retrieved through the serial port or Ethernet port via our APICOM software or from the front panel, allowing operators to perform predictive diagnostics and enhanced data analysis by tracking parameter trends. Multiple averaging periods of one minute to 365 days are available for over a period of one year. 06864D DCN7562 17
Introduction, Features and Options Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer
1.2.
FEATURES
• • • • • • • • Some of the common features of your T300 family of analyzers include: • • • • • LCD color graphics with touch screen interface Microprocessor controlled for versatility Multi-tasking software allows viewing of test variables during operation Continuous self checking with alarms Bi-directional USB, RS-232, and 10/100Base-T Ethernet ports for remote operation (optional RS-485) Front panel USB ports for peripheral devices and software downloads Digital status outputs indicate instrument operating condition Adaptive signal filtering optimizes response time Gas Filter Correlation (GFC) Wheel for CO specific measurement GFC Wheel guaranteed against leaks for 5 years Temperature and pressure compensation Comprehensive internal data logging with programmable averaging periods Remote operation when used with Teledyne API’s APICOM software
T300 FEATURES:
• • Ranges, 0-1 ppm to 0-1000 ppm, user selectable 14 meter path length for sensitivity
T300M FEATURES:
• • Ranges, 0-1 ppm; Max: 0-5000 ppm, user selectable 2.5 meter path length for dynamic range
1.3.
T300/T300M DOCUMENTATION
In addition to this operation manual (part number 06807), other manuals are available for download from Teledyne API’s website at http://www.teledyne-api.com/manuals/, to support the operation of this instrument: • • • APICOM software manual, part number 07463 Hessen Protocol Manual, part number 04585 Fundamentals of ESD Manual, part number 04786 18 06864D DCN7562
Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Introduction, Features and Options
1.4.
OPTIONS
The options available for your analyzer are presented in Table 1-1 with name, option
number, a description and/or comments, and if applicable, cross-references to technical details in this manual, such as setup and calibration. To order these options or to learn more about them, please contact the Sales department of Teledyne - Advanced Pollution Instruments at: TOLL-FREE: TEL: FAX: E-MAIL: WEB SITE: 800-324-5190 +1 858-657-9800 +1 858-657-9816 [email protected] http://www.teledyne-api.com/
Table 1-1: Analyzer Options Option Pumps
10A 10B 10C 10D 10E 11 13
Rack Mount Kits
20A 20B 21 23
Carrying Strap/Handle Option Number Description/Notes Reference Pumps meet all typical AC power supply standards while exhibiting same pneumatic performance.
External Pump 100V - 120V @ 60 Hz N/A External Pump 220V - 240V @ 50 Hz External Pump 220V - 240V @ 60 Hz External Pump 100V – 12V @ 50 Hz External Pump 100V @ 60 Hz Pumpless, internal or external Pump Pack High Voltage Internal Pump 240V @ 50Hz N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 29
Options for mounting the analyzer in standard 19” racks
Rack mount brackets with 26 in. chassis slides Rack mount brackets with 24 in. chassis slides Rack mount brackets only (compatible with carrying strap, Option 29) Rack mount for external pump pack (no slides)
Side-mounted strap for hand-carrying analyzer
Extends from “flat” position to accommodate hand for carrying. Recesses to 9mm (3/8”) dimension for storage. Can be used with rack mount brackets, Option 21. Cannot be used with rack mount slides. N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Analog Inputs
64
CAUTION - GENERAL SAFETY HAZARD
A fully loaded T300 with valve options weighs about 18 kg or 40 lbs. (T300M weighs 22.7 kg or 50 lbs). To avoid personal injury we recommend that two persons lift and carry the analyzer. Disconnect all cables and tubing from the analyzer before moving it.
Used for connecting external voltage signals from other instrumentation (such as meteorological instruments).
Also can be used for logging these signals in the analyzer’s internal Data Acquisition System (DAS)
06864D DCN7562 19
Introduction, Features and Options Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer
Option Option Number Current Loop Analog Outputs Parts Kits
41 42A 45
Calibration Valves
50A 50B 50E
Description/Notes Reference Adds isolated, voltage-to-current conversion circuitry to the analyzer’s analog outputs.
Can be configured for any output range between 0 and 20 mA. May be ordered separately for any of the analog outputs. Can be installed at the factory or retrofitted in the field.
Spare parts and expendables Expendables Kit
includes a recommended set of expendables for one year of operation of this instrument including replacement sample particulate filters. Appendix B
Spare Parts Kit
includes spares parts for one unit. Appendix B
Used to control the flow of calibration gases generated from external sources, rather than manually switching the rear panel pneumatic connections.
Ambient Zero and Ambient Span. Ambient Zero and Pressurized Span Zero Scrubber and Pressurized Span
50H
Communication Cables
60A 60B 60C Zero Scrubber and Ambient Span
For remote serial, network and Internet communication with the analyzer.
Type RS-232 RS-232 Description Shielded, straight-through DB-9F to DB-25M cable, about 1.8 m long. Used to interface with older computers or code activated switches with DB-25 serial connectors. Shielded, straight-through DB-9F to DB-9F cable of about 1.8 m length.
Ethernet Patch cable, 2 meters long, used for Internet and LAN communications.
60D USB Cable for direct connection between instrument (rear panel USB port) and personal computer.
Concentration Alarm Relay Issues warning when gas concentration exceeds limits set by user.
61
RS-232 Multidrop
62
Second Gas Sensors
65A 67A Four (4) “dry contact” relays on the rear panel of the instrument. This relay option is different from and in addition to the “Contact Closures” that come standard on all TAPI instruments.
Enables communications between host computer and up to eight analyzers.
Multidrop card seated on the analyzer’s CPU card. Each instrument in the multidrop network requires this card and a communications cable (Option 60B).
Choice of one additional gas sensor.
Oxygen (O 2 ) Sensor Carbon Dioxide (CO 2 ) Sensor
20 06864D DCN7562
Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Introduction, Features and Options
Option Special Features Option Number
N/A N/A N/A
Description/Notes Reference Built in features, software activated Maintenance Mode Switch
, located inside the instrument, places the analyzer in maintenance mode where it can continue sampling, yet ignore calibration, diagnostic, and reset instrument commands. This feature is of particular use for instruments connected to Multidrop or Hessen protocol networks. Call Technical Support for activation. N/A
Second Language Switch
activates an alternate set of display messages in a language other than the instrument’s default language. Call Technical Support for a specially programmed Disk on Module containing the second language. N/A
Dilution Ratio Option
allows the user to compensate for diluted sample gas, such as in continuous emission monitoring (CEM) where the quality of gas in a smoke stack is being tested and the sampling method used to remove the gas from the stack dilutes the gas. Call Technical Support for activation.
06864D DCN7562 21
Introduction, Features and Options Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer This page intentionally left blank.
22 06864D DCN7562
2. SPECIFICATIONS AND APPROVALS
This section presents specifications for the T300/T300M analyzer and for its second gas sensor options, EPA equivalency designation, and compliance statements.
2.1.
SPECIFICATIONS
Table 2-1: T300/T300M Basic Unit Specifications
Ranges
Parameter
Measurement Units Zero Noise 1 Span Noise 1 Lower Detectable Limit 1 Zero Drift (24 hours) 2 Span Drift (24 hours) 2 Lag Time 1 Rise/Fall Time 1 Linearity Precision Sample Flow Rate AC Power Analog Output Ranges Analog Output Resolution Recorder Offset Standard I/O
Specification T300 T300M
Min: 0-1 ppm Full scale Max: 0-1,000 ppm Full scale < 0.02 ppm RMS <0.5% of rdg RMS over 5ppm 3 < 0.04 ppm < 0.1 ppm < 0.5% of reading < 10 seconds <60 seconds to 95% 1% of full scale 5 Min: 0-5 ppm Full scale Max: 0-5,000 ppm Full scale (selectable, dual ranges and auto ranging supported) ppb, ppm, µg/m 3 , mg/m 3 (user selectable) ppm, mg/m 3 (user selectable) < 0.1 ppm RMS >0.5% of rdg RMS over 20ppm < 0.2 ppm <0.5 ppm < 0.5% of reading < 10 seconds <60 seconds to 95% 0 - 3000 ppm: 1% full scale 3000 - 5000 ppm: 2% full scale The greater of 0.5% of reading or 0.2ppm 800 cm 3 /min. ±10% The greater of 1.0% of reading or 1ppm 800 cm 3 /min. ±10% (O 2 Sensor option adds 120 cm³/min to total flow when installed) Rating Typical Power Consumption 110-120 V~, 60 Hz 3.0 A 220-240 V~, 50/60 Hz 3.0 A 155 W 160 W All Outputs: 10V, 5V, 1V, 0.1V (selectable) Three outputs convertible to 4-20 mA isolated current loop. All Ranges with 5% under/over-range 1 part in 4096 of selected full-scale voltage ±10% 1 Ethernet: 10/100Base-T 2 RS-232 (300 – 115,200 baud) 2 USB device ports 8 opto-isolated digital status outputs 6 opto-isolated digital control inputs (2 defined, 4 spare) 4 user configurable analog outputs 06864D DCN7562 23
Specifications and Approvals Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer
Parameter
Optional I/O Temperature Range Humidity Range Temp Coefficient Voltage Coefficient Dimensions (HxWxD) Weight Environmental Conditions 1 As defined by the USEPA
Specification
1 USB com port 1 RS485 8 analog inputs (0-10V, 12-bit) 4 digital alarm outputs (2 opto-isolated and 2 dry contact) Multidrop RS232 3 4-20mA current outputs 5 - 40 ° C operating, 10 - 40 ° C EPA Reference (T300 only) 0-95% RH, Non-Condensing < 0.05 % per ° C (minimum 50 ppb/ ° C) < 0.05 % per V 7" x 17" x 23.5" (178 mm x 432 mm x 597 mm)
T300:
40 lbs (18.1 kg);
T300M:
38.4 lbs (17.2 kg) Installation Category (Over voltage Category) II Pollution Degree 2 For outdoor use only, to ≤ 2000 m altitude 2 At constant temperature and pressure
Table 2-2: O 2 Sensor Option Specifications Parameter
Ranges Zero Noise 1 Lower Detectable Limit 2 Zero Drift (24 hours) 3 Span Noise 1 Accuracy Linearity Temp Coefficient Rise and Fall Time
Description
0-1% to 0-100% user selectable. Dual ranges and auto-ranging supported. <0.02% O 2 <0.04% O 2 <± 0.02% O 2 < ± 0.05% O 2 (intrinsic error) <± 0.1% O 2 <± 0.1 % O 2 <± 0.05% O 2 /°C, <60 seconds to 95% 1 As defined by the USEPA 2 Defined as twice the zero noise level by the USEPA 3 Note: zero drift is typically <± 0.1% O 2 during the first 24 hrs of operation 24 06864D DCN7562
Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Specifications and Approvals
Table 2-3: CO 2 Sensor Option Specifications Parameter
Ranges Zero Noise 1 Lower Detectable Limit 2 Zero Drift (24 hours) Zero Drift (7 days) Span Noise 1 Span Drift (7 days) Accuracy Linearity Temperature Coefficient Rise and Fall Time 1 As defined by the USEPA 2 Defined as twice the zero noise level by the USEPA
Description
0-1% to 0-20% user selectable. Dual ranges and auto ranging supported. <0.02% CO 2 <0.04% CO 2 <± 0.02% CO 2 <± 0.05% CO 2 <± 0.1% CO 2 <± 0.1% CO 2 <± (1.5% of range + 2% of reading) <± 0.1% CO 2 <± 0.01% CO 2 /°C <60 seconds to 95%
2.2.
EPA DESIGNATION
Note T300M: EPA designation does not apply to this model.
Teledyne API’s Model T300, Gas Filter Correlation Carbon Monoxide Analyzer, is designated as a US EPA Reference Method, Designation Number RFCA-1093-093 for CO measurement. The official “List of Designated Reference and Equivalent Methods” is published in the U.S. Federal Register: http://www3.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/criteria.html
.
2.3.
APPROVALS AND CERTIFICATIONS
The Teledyne API Model T300/T300M analyzer was tested and certified for Safety and Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC). This section presents the compliance statements for those requirements and directives. 2.3.1.
SAFETY
IEC/EN 61010-1:2010 (3 rd Edition), Safety requirements for electrical equipment for measurement, control, and laboratory use.
CE:
2006/95/EC, Low-Voltage Directive 2.3.2.
EMC
EN 61326-1 (IEC 61326-1), Class A Emissions/Industrial Immunity EN 55011 (CISPR 11), Group 1, Class A Emissions FCC 47 CFR Part 15B, Class A Emissions
CE:
2004/108/EC, Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive 06864D DCN7562 25
Specifications and Approvals Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer 2.3.3.
OTHER TYPE CERTIFICATIONS
MCERTS:
EN 15267 – Ambient Air Measurement for CO EN 14626 – Air Quality – Ambient Air Automated Measuring Systems Sira MC 050069/04 For additional certifications, please contactTechnical Support. 26 06864D DCN7562
3. GETTING STARTED
This section first introduces you to the instrument, then presents the procedures for getting started, i.e., unpacking and inspection, making electrical and pneumatic connections, and conducting an initial calibration check.
3.1.
UNPACKING THE T300/T300M ANALYZER
CAUTION G ENERAL S AFETY H AZARD To avoid personal injury, always use two persons to lift and carry the T300/T300M. ATTENTION COULD DAMAGE INSTRUMENT AND VOID WARRANTY
Printed Circuit Assemblies (PCAs) are sensitive to electro-static discharges too small to be felt by the human nervous system. Failure to use ESD protection when working with electronic assemblies will void the instrument warranty. See A Primer on Electro-Static Discharge in this manual for more information on preventing ESD damage. CAUTION!
Do not operate this instrument until you’ve removed dust plugs from SAMPLE and EXHAUST ports on the rear panel!
Note Teledyne API recommends that you store shipping containers/materials for future use if/when the instrument should be returned to the factory for repair and/or calibration service. See Warranty section in this manual and shipping procedures on our Website at
http://www.teledyne-api.com
under Customer Support > Return Authorization.
Verify that there is no apparent external shipping damage. If damage has occurred, please advise the shipper first, then Teledyne API. 06864D DCN7562 27
Getting Started Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Included with your analyzer is a printed record (Final Test and Validation Data Sheet: PN
04307; PN 04311)
of the final performance characterization performed on your instrument at the factory. This record is an important quality assurance and calibration record for this instrument. It should be placed in the quality records file for this instrument. With no power to the unit, craefully remove the top cover of the analyzer and check for internal shipping damage by carrying out the following steps: 1. Carefully remove the top cover of the analyzer and check for internal shipping damage by: • Removing the setscrew located in the top, center of the Front panel; • Removing the two flat head, Phillips screws on the sides of the instrument (one per side towards the rear); • • Sliding the cover backwards until it clears the analyzer’s front bezel, and; Lifting the cover straight up. 2. Inspect the interior of the instrument to make sure all circuit boards and other components are in good shape and properly seated. 3. Check the connectors of the various internal wiring harnesses and pneumatic hoses to make sure they are firmly and properly seated. 4. Verify that all of the optional hardware ordered with the unit has been installed. These are listed on the paperwork accompanying the analyzer.
W ARNING E LECTRICAL S HOCK H AZARD
Never disconnect PCAs, wiring harnesses or electronic subassemblies while instrument is under power.
3.1.1.
VENTILATION CLEARANCE
Whether the analyzer is set up on a bench or installed into an instrument rack, be sure to leave sufficient ventilation clearance.
Table 3-1: Ventilation Clearance AREA
Back of the instrument Sides of the instrument Above and below the instrument
MINIMUM REQUIRED CLEARANCE
4 in. 1 in. 1 in.
Various rack mount kits are available for this analyzer. See Table 1-1 of this manual for
more information. 28 06864D DCN7562
Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Getting Started
3.2.
INSTRUMENT LAYOUT
Instrument layout includes front panel and display, rear panel connectors, and internal chassis layout. 3.2.1.
FRONT PANEL
Figure 3-1 shows the analyzer’s front panel layout, followed by a close-up of the display
screen in Figure 3-2, which is described in Table 3-2. The two USB ports on the front
panel are provided for the connection of peripheral devices: • plug-in mouse (not included) to be used as an alternative to the thouchscreen interface • thumb drive (not included) to download updates to instruction software (contact TAPI Technical Support for information). 06864D DCN7562
Figure 3-1: Front Panel Layout
29
Getting Started Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer
ATTENTION Figure 3-2: Display Screen and Touch Control
The front panel liquid crystal display screen includes touch control. Upon analyzer start up, the screen shows a splash screen and other initialization indicators before the main
display appears, similar to Figure 3-2 above (may or may not display a Fault alarm). The
LEDs on the display screen indicate the Sample, Calibration and Fault states; also on the screen is the gas concentration field (Conc), which displays real-time readouts for the primary gas and for the secondary gas if installed. The display screen also shows what mode the analyzer is currently in, as well as messages and data (Param). Along the bottom of the screen is a row of touch control buttons; only those that are currently
applicable will have a label. Table 3-2 provides detailed information for each component
of the screen.
COULD DAMAGE INSTRUMENT AND VOID WARRANTY
Do not use hard-surfaced instruments such as pens to touch the control buttons.
30 06864D DCN7562
Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Getting Started
Table 3-2: Field
Status Conc Mode Param Control Buttons
Display Screen and Touch Control Description Description/Function
LEDs indicating the states of Sample, Calibration and Fault, as follows: Name Color State Definition SAMPLE Green Off On Blinking Unit is not operating in Sample Mode, DAS is disabled. Sample Mode active; Front Panel Display being updated; DAS data being stored. Unit is operating in Sample Mode, front panel display being updated, DAS hold-off mode is ON, DAS disabled CAL FAULT Yellow Red Off On Blinking Off Blinking Auto Cal disabled Auto Cal enabled Unit is in calibration mode No warnings exist Warnings exist Displays the actual concentration of the sample gas currently being measured by the analyzer in the currently selected units of measure Displays the name of the analyzer’s current operating mode Displays a variety of informational messages such as warning messages, operational data, test function values and response messages during interactive tasks.
Displays dynamic, context sensitive labels on each button, which is blank when inactive until applicable.
Figure 3-3 shows how the front panel display is mapped to the menu charts that are
illustrated throughout this manual. The Mode, Param (parameters), and Conc (gas concentration) fields in the display screen are represented across the top row of each menu chart. The eight touch control buttons along the bottom of the display screen are represented in the bottom row of each menu chart. 06864D DCN7562 31
Getting Started Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer
Note
Figure 3-3: Display/Touch Control Screen Mapped to Menu Charts
The menu charts in this manual contain condensed representations of the analyzer’s display during the various operations being described. These menu charts are not intended to be exact visual representations of the actual display.
32 06864D DCN7562
Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer 3.2.2.
REAR PANEL
Getting Started
Figure 3-4: Rear Panel Layout
Table 3-3 provides a description of each component on the rear panel.
06864D DCN7562 33
Getting Started Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer
Table 3-3: Rear Panel Description Component Function cooling fan
Pulls ambient air into chassis through side vents and exhausts through rear.
AC power connector Model/specs label
Connector for three-prong cord to apply AC power to the analyzer.
CAUTION! The cord’s power specifications (specs) MUST comply with the power specs on the analyzer’s rear panel Model number label
Identifies the analyzer model number and provides voltage and frequency specs
SAMPLE
Connect a gas line from the source of sample gas here. Calibration gases are also inlet here on units without zero/span/shutoff valve options installed.
EXHAUST
Connect an exhaust gas line of not more than 10 meters long here that leads outside the shelter or immediate area surrounding the instrument.
SPAN 1 SPAN2/VENT
On units with zero/span/shutoff valve options installed, connect a gas line to the source of calibrated span gas here. Used as a second cal gas input line when instrument is configured with zero/span valves and a dual gas option, or as a cal gas vent line when instrument is configured with a pressurized span option
(Call factory for details).
ZERO AIR RX TX COM 2
Internal Zero Air: On units with zero/span/shutoff valve options installed but no internal zero air scrubber attach a gas line to the source of zero air here. LEDs indicate receive (RX) and transmit (TX) activity on the when blinking.
Serial communications port for RS-232 or RS-485. (Sections 3.3.1.8, 5.7.3, 6).
RS-232
Serial communications port for RS-232 only. (Sections 3.3.1.8, 5.7, 6.3, 6.7.2.1)
DCE DTE STATUS ANALOG OUT CONTROL IN
Switch to select either data terminal equipment or data communication equipment
during RS-232 communication. (Section 6.1).
For ouputs to devices such as Programmable Logic Controllers (PLCs). (Section
For voltage or current loop outputs to a strip chart recorder and/or a data logger.
(Sections 3.3.1.3 and 3.3.1.4).
For remotely activating the zero and span calibration modes. (Section 3.3.1.6).
ALARM
Option for concentration alarms and system warnings. (Section 3.3.1.7).
ETHERNET
Connector for network or Internet remote communication, using Ethernet cable
ANALOG IN
Option for external voltage signals from other instrumentation and for logging these
USB
Connector for direct connection to laptop computer, using USB cable. (Section 3.3.1.8).
34 06864D DCN7562
Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer 3.2.3.
T300/T300M ANALYZER LAYOUT
Figure 3-5 shows the T300 internal layout.
Getting Started 06864D DCN7562
Figure 3-5: Internal Layout – T300
35
Getting Started Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer
Figure 3-6 shows the T300M internal layout.
36
Figure 3-6: Internal Layout – T300M
06864D DCN7562
Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Getting Started
Figure 3-7: Optical Bench Layout (shorter bench, T300M, shown)
06864D DCN7562 37
Getting Started Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer
3.3.
CONNECTIONS AND SETUP
This section presents the electrical (Section 3.3.1) and pneumatic (Section 3.3.2)
connections for setup and preparing for instrument operation 3.3.1.
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
Note To maintain compliance with EMC standards, it is required that the cable length be no greater than 3 meters for all I/O connections, which include Analog In, Analog Out, Status Out, Control In, Ethernet/LAN, USB, RS-232, and RS-485.
3.3.1.1.
CONNECTING POWER
Attach the power cord to the analyzer and plug it into a power outlet capable of carrying at least 10 A current at your AC voltage and that it is equipped with a functioning earth ground.
WARNING E LECTRICAL S HOCK H AZARD High Voltages are present inside the analyzer’s case. Power connection must have functioning ground connection. Do not defeat the ground wire on power plug. Turn off analyzer power before disconnecting or connecting electrical subassemblies. Do not operate with cover off. CAUTION G ENERAL S AFETY H AZARD To avoid damage to your analyzer, make sure that the AC power voltage matches
the voltage indicated on the analyzer’s model/specs label (See Figure 3-4) before
plugging the T300/T300M into line power.
38 06864D DCN7562
Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Getting Started
CAUTION AVOID DAMAGE TO THE INSTRUMENT Do not use Power over Ethernet connection. This can damage the protection chip on the Ethernet card.
3.3.1.2.
CONNECTING ANALOG INPUTS (OPTION)
The Analog In connector is used for connecting external voltage signals from other instrumentation (such as meteorological instruments) and for logging these signals in the analyzer’s internal DAS. The input voltage range for each analog input is 0-10 VDC.
Figure 3-8: Analog In Connector
Pin assignments for the Analog In connector are presented in Table 3-4.
Table 3-4: Analog Input Pin Assignments PIN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
DESCRIPTION
Analog input # 1 Analog input # 2 Analog input # 3 Analog input # 4 Analog input # 5 Analog input # 6 Analog input # 7
DAS PARAMETER 1
AIN 1 AIN 2 AIN 3 AIN 4 AIN 5 AIN 6 AIN 7 8 Analog input # 8 AIN 8 GND Analog input Ground N/A 1
See Section 7 for details on setting up the DAS.
3.3.1.3.
CONNECTING ANALOG OUTPUTS
The T300 is equipped with several analog output channels accessible through a connector on the back panel of the instrument. The standard configuration for these outputs is mVDC. An optional current loop output is available for each. When the instrument is in its default configuration, channels
A1
and
A2
output a signal that is proportional to the CO concentration of the sample gas. Either can be used for connecting the analog output signal to a chart recorder or for interfacing with a datalogger. 06864D DCN7562 39
Getting Started Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Output
A3
is only used on the T300/T300M if the optional CO 2 or O 2 sensor is installed. Channel
A4
is special. It can be set by the user (see Section 5.9.8.1) to output any one
of the parameters accessible through the
buttons of the units sample display. To access these signals attach a strip chart recorder and/or data-logger to the appropriate analog output connections on the rear panel of the analyzer.
ANALOG OUT A1 A2 A3 A4 + - + - + - + Table 3-5: PIN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Figure 3-9: Analog Output Connector Analog Output Pin-Outs ANALOG OUTPUT
A1 A2 A3 (Only used if CO 2 or O 2 Sensor is installed)
VOLTAGE SIGNAL
V Out Ground V Out Ground V Out Ground A4 V Out Ground
CURRENT SIGNAL
I Out + I Out - I Out + I Out - I Out + I Out - I Out + I Out - 3.3.1.4.
CURRENT LOOP ANALOG OUTPUTS (OPTION 41) SETUP
If your analyzer had this option installed at the factory, there are no further connections to be made. Otherwise, it can be installed as a retrofit for each of the analog outputs of the analyzer. This option converts the DC voltage analog output to a current signal with 0-20 mA output current. The outputs can be scaled to any set of limits within that 0-20 mA range. However, most current loop applications call for either 2-20 mA or 4-20 mA range.
instructions for converting current loop analog outputs to standard 0-to-5 VDC outputs.
Information on calibrating or adjusting these outputs can be found in Section 5.9.3.7.
40 06864D DCN7562
Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Getting Started
CAUTION – AVOID INVALIDATING WARRANTY
Servicing or handling of circuit components requires electrostatic discharge protection, i.e. ESD grounding straps, mats and containers. Failure to use ESD protection when working with electronic assemblies will void the instrument warranty. Refer to the manual, Fundamentals of ESD, PN 04786, which can be downloaded from our website at
http://www.teledyne-api.com
under Help Center > Product Manuals in the Special Manuals section.
06864D DCN7562
Figure 3-10: Current Loop Option Installed on Motherboard
C
ONVERTING
C
URRENT
L
OOP
A
NALOG
O
UTPUTS TO
S
TANDARD
V
OLTAGE
O
UTPUTS
To convert an output configured for current loop operation to the standard 0 to 5 VDC output operation: 1. Turn off power to the analyzer. 2. If a recording device was connected to the output being modified, disconnect it. 3. Remove the top cover. • Remove the screw located in the top, center of the front panel. 41
42 Getting Started Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer • • Remove the screws fastening the top cover to the unit (both sides). Slide the cover back and lift straight up. 4. Remove the screw holding the current loop option to the motherboard. 5. Disconnect the current loop option PCA from the appropriate connector on the
motherboard (see Figure 3-10).
6. Each connector, J19 and J23, requires two shunts. Place one shunt on the two left-
most pins and the second shunt on the two pins next to it (see Figure 3-10).
7. Reattach the top case to the analyzer. • T he analyzer is now ready to have a voltage-sensing, recording device attached to that output.
8. Calibrate the analog output as described in Section 5.9.3.2.
3.3.1.5.
CONNECTING THE STATUS OUTPUTS
The status outputs report analyzer conditions via optically isolated NPN transistors, which sink up to 50 mA of DC current. These outputs can be used interface with devices that accept logic-level digital inputs, such as Programmable Logic Controllers (PLCs). Each status bit is an open collector output that can withstand up to 40 VDC. All of the emitters of these transistors are tied together and available at D.
ATTENTION COULD DAMAGE INSTRUMENT AND VOID WARRANTY
Most PLC’s have internal provisions for limiting the current that the input will draw from an external device. When connecting to a unit that does not have this feature, an external dropping resistor must be used to limit the current through the transistor output to less than 50 mA. At 50 mA, the transistor will drop approximately 1.2V from its collector to emitter.
The status outputs are accessed via a 12-pin connector on the analyzer’s rear panel
labeled STATUS (see Figure 3-4). Pin-outs for this connector are:
STATUS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 D + Figure 3-11:
+5V to external device
Status Output Connector
06864D DCN7562
Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Getting Started
Table 3-6: Status Output Signals
1
REAR PANEL LABEL
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 D +
STATUS DEFINITION
SYSTEM OK CONC VALID HIGH RANGE ZERO CAL SPAN CAL DIAG MODE CO 2 CAL O 2 CAL EMITTER BUS SPARE DC POWER
CONDITION
ON if no faults are present. OFF any time the
HOLD OFF
feature is active, such as during calibration or when other faults exist possibly invalidating the current concentration measurement (example: sample flow rate is outside of acceptable limits). ON if concentration measurement is valid. ON if unit is in high range of either the
DUAL
or
AUTO
range modes. ON whenever the instrument’s
ZERO
point is being calibrated. ON whenever the instrument’s
SPAN
point is being calibrated. ON whenever the instrument is in
DIAGNOSTIC
mode. If this analyzer is equipped with an optional CO 2 sensor, this Output is ON when that sensor is in calibration mode. Otherwise this output is unused. If this analyzer is equipped with an optional O 2 sensor, this Output is ON when that sensor is in calibration mode. Otherwise this output is unused. The emitters of the transistors on pins 1-8 are bussed together. + 5 VDC, 300 mA source maximum. Digital Ground The ground level from the analyzer’s internal DC power supplies. 3.3.1.6.
CONNECTING THE CONTROL INPUTS
To remotely activate the zero and span calibration modes, several digital control inputs are provided through a 10-pin connector labeled
CONTROL IN
on the analyzer’s rear panel. There are two methods for energizing the control inputs. The internal +5V available from the pin labeled “+” is the most convenient method. However, if full isolation is required, an external 5 VDC power supply should be used. 06864D DCN7562 43
Getting Started
CONTROL IN
Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer
CONTROL IN A B C D E F U + A B C D E F U + Local Power Connections Figure 3-12: - 5 VDC Power Supply + External Power Connections Control Input Connector Table 3-7: Control Input Signals INPUT #
A B C
STATUS DEFINITION REMOTE ZERO CAL REMOTE SPAN CAL REMOTE CAL HIGH RANGE ON CONDITION
The analyzer is placed in Zero Calibration mode. The mode field of the display will read
ZERO CAL R
. The analyzer is placed in span calibration mode as part of performing a low span (midpoint) calibration. The mode field of the display will read
LO CAL R
. The analyzer is forced into high range for zero or span calibrations. This only applies when the range mode is either DUAL or AUTO. The mode field of the display will read
HI CAL R
. D, E & F SPARE U + Digital Ground External Power input 5 VDC output The ground level from the analyzer’s internal DC power supplies (same as chassis ground). Input pin for +5 VDC required to activate pins A – F. Internally generated 5V DC power. To activate inputs A – F, place a jumper between this pin and the “U” pin. The maximum amperage through this port is 300 mA (combined with the analog output supply, if used). 44 06864D DCN7562
Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Getting Started 3.3.1.7.
CONNECTING THE CONCENTRATION ALARM RELAY (OPTION 61)
The concentration alarm option is comprised of four (4) “dry contact” relays on the rear panel of the instrument. This relay option is different from and in addition to the “Contact Closures” that come standard on all Teledyne API instruments. Each relay has 3 pins: Normally Open (NO), Common (C), and Normally Closed (NC). 06864D DCN7562
Figure 3-13: Concentration Alarm Relay Alarm 1 Alarm 2 Alarm 3 Alarm 4 “System OK 2” “Conc 1” “Conc 2” “Range Bit”
“A
LARM
1” R
ELAY
Alarm 1 which is “System OK 2” (system OK 1, is the status bit) is in the energized state when the instrument is “OK” & there are no warnings. If there is a warning active or if the instrument is put into the “DIAG” mode, Alarm 1 will change states. This alarm has “reverse logic” meaning that if you put a meter across the Common & Normally Closed pins on the connector you will find that it is OPEN when the instrument is OK. This is so that if the instrument should turn off or lose power, it will change states and you can record this with a data logger or other recording device.
“A
LARM
2” R
ELAY
& “A
LARM
3” R
ELAY
Alarm 2 relay is associated with the “Concentration Alarm 1” set point in the software; Alarm 3 Relay is associated with the “Concentration Alarm 2” set point in the software.
Alarm 2 Relay Alarm 3 Relay CO Alarm 1 = xxx PPM CO 2 Alarm 2 = xxx PPM Alarm 2 Relay Alarm 3 Relay CO Alarm 1 = xxx PPM CO 2 Alarm 2 = xxx PPM
The Alarm 2 Relay will be turned on any time the concentration set-point is exceeded & will return to its normal state when the concentration value goes back below the concentration set-point. Even though the relay on the rear panel is a NON-Latching alarm & resets when the concentration goes back below the alarm set point, the warning on the front panel of the 45
Getting Started Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer instrument will remain latched until it is cleared. You can clear the warning on the front panel by either pushing the CLR button on the front panel or through the serial port. In instruments that sample more than one gas type, there could be more than one gas type triggering the Concentration 1 Alarm (“Alarm 2” Relay). For example, the T300M instrument can monitor both CO & CO 2 gas. The software is flexible enough to allow you to configure the alarms so that you can have 2 alarm levels for each gas.
CO Alarm 1 = 20 PPM CO Alarm 2 = 100 PPM CO 2 Alarm 1 = 20 PPM CO 2 Alarm 2 = 100 PPM
In this example, CO Alarm 1 & CO 2 Alarm 1 will both be associated with the “Alarm 2” relay on the rear panel. This allows you do have multiple alarm levels for individual gasses. A more likely configuration for this would be to put one gas on the “Alarm 1” relay & the other gas on the “Alarm 2” relay.
CO Alarm 1 = 20 PPM CO Alarm 2 = Disabled CO 2 Alarm 1 = Disabled CO 2 Alarm 2 = 100 PPM
“A
LARM
4” R
ELAY
This relay is connected to the “range bit”. If the instrument is configured for “Auto Range” and the instrument goes up into the high range, it will turn this relay on. 3.3.1.8.
CONNECTING THE COMMUNICATION INTERFACES
The T-Series analyzers are equipped with connectors for remote communications interfaces:
Ethernet
,
USB
,
RS-232
, optional
RS-232 Multidrop
, and optional
RS-485
. In addition to using the appropriate cables, each type of communication method must be
configured using the SETUP>COMM menu, Section 6. Although Ethernet is DHCP-
enabled by default, it can also be configured manually (Section 6.5.1) to set up a static
IP address, which is the recommended setting when operating the instrument via Ethernet.
E
THERNET
C
ONNECTION
For network or Internet communication with the analyzer, connect an Ethernet cable from the analyzer’s rear panel Ethernet interface connector to an Ethernet access port.
Please see Section 6.5 for description and setup instructions.
For manual configuration, see Section 6.5.1.
For automatic configuration (default), see Section 6.5.2.
46 06864D DCN7562
Note
I
Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer
MPORTANT
Getting Started
USB C
ONNECTION
For direct communication between the analyzer and a PC, connect a USB cable between the analyzer and desktop or laptop USB ports. The baud rate for the analyzer and the computer must match; you may elect to change one or the other: to view and/or change
the analyzer’s baud rate, see Section 6.2.2.
If this option is installed, the COM2 port cannot be used for anything other than Multidrop communication.
RS-232 C
ONNECTION
For
RS-232
communications with data terminal equipment (
DTE
) or with data communication equipment (
DCE
) connect either a DB9-female-to-DB9-female cable (Teledyne API part number WR000077) or a DB9-female-to-DB25-male cable (Option
60A, Section 1.4), as applicable, from the analyzer’s rear panel RS-232 port to the
device. Adjust the DCE-DTE switch (Figure 3-4) to select DTE or DCE as appropriate.
Configuration
I
MPACT ON
R
EADINGS OR
D
ATA
Cables that appear to be compatible because of matching connectors may incorporate internal wiring that makes the link inoperable. Check cables acquired from sources other than Teledyne API for pin
assignments (Figure 3-14) before using.
06864D DCN7562 47
Getting Started Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer
RS-232 COM P
ORT
C
ONNECTOR
P
IN
-
OUTS
Electronically, the difference between the DCE and DTE is the pin assignment of the Data Receive and Data Transmit functions. • • DTE devices receive data on pin 2 and transmit data on pin 3. DCE devices receive data on pin 3 and transmit data on pin 2. 48
Figure 3-14: Rear Panel Connector Pin-Outs for RS-232 Mode
The signals from these two connectors are routed from the motherboard via a wiring harness to two 10-pin connectors on the CPU card, J11 (COM1) and J12 (COM2)
06864D DCN7562
Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Getting Started
Figure 3-15: Default Pin Assignments for CPU COM Port connector (RS-232)
RS-232 C
OM
P
ORT
D
EFAULT
S
ETTINGS
Received from the factory, the analyzer is set up to emulate a DCE or modem, with Pin 3 of the DB-9 connector designated for receiving data and Pin 2 designated for sending data. •
RS-232 (COM1)
: RS-232 (fixed) DB-9 male connector. •
Baud rate
: 115200 bits per second (baud) • •
Data Bits Parity
: 8 data bits with 1 stop bit : None •
COM2
: RS-232 (configurable to RS-485), DB-9 female connector. •
Baud rate
: 19200 bits per second (baud) • •
Data Bits Parity
: 8 data bits with 1 stop bit : None
RS-232 M
ULTIDROP
O
PTION
C
ONNECTION
When the RS-232 Multidrop option is installed, connection adjustments and configuration through the menu system are required. This section provides instructions for the internal connection adjustments, then for external connections, and ends with instructions for menu-driven configuration. 06864D DCN7562 49
Getting Started Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer
Note
ATTENTION
Because the RS-232 Multidrop option uses both the RS232 and COM2 DB9 connectors on the analyzer’s rear panel to connect the chain of instruments, COM2 port is no longer available for separate RS-232 or RS-485 operation.
COULD DAMAGE INSTRUMENT AND VOID WARRANTY
Printed Circuit Assemblies (PCAs) are sensitive to electro-static discharges too small to be felt by the human nervous system. Failure to use ESD protection when working with electronic assemblies will void the instrument warranty. Refer to the manual, Fundamentals of ESD, PN 04786, which can be downloaded from our website at
http://www.teledyne-api.com
under Help Center > Product Manuals in the Special Manuals section.
In each instrument with the Multidrop option there is a shunt jumpering two pins on the
serial Multidrop and LVDS printed circuit assembly (PCA), as shown in Figure 3-16.
This shunt must be removed from all instruments except that designated as last in the multidrop chain, which must remain terminated. This requires powering off and opening each instrument and making the following adjustments: 1. With
NO power
to the instrument, remove its top cover and lay the rear panel open for access to the Multidrop/LVDS PCA, which is seated on the CPU. 2. On the Multidrop/LVDS PCA’s JP2 connector, remove the shunt that jumpers Pins 21 ↔ 22 as indicated in. (Do this for all but the last instrument in the chain where the shunt should remain at Pins 21 ↔ 22). 3. Check that the following cable connections are made in
all
instruments (again refer
• J3 on the Multidrop/LVDS PCA to the CPU’s COM1 connector (Note that the CPU’s COM2 connector is not used in Multidrop) • • J4 on the Multidrop/LVDS PCA to J12 on the motherboard J1 on the Multidrop/LVDS PCS to the front panel LCD 50 06864D DCN7562
Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Getting Started 06864D DCN7562
Figure 3-16: Jumper and Cables for Multidrop Mode
Note: If you are adding an instrument to the end of a previously configured chain, remove the shunt between Pins 21 ↔ 22 of JP2 on the Multidrop/LVDS PCA in the instrument that was previously the last instrument in the chain. 4. Close the instrument.
5. Referring to Figure 3-17 use straight-through DB9 male
à DB9 female cables to interconnect the host RS232 port to the first analyzer’s RS232 port; then from the first analyzer’s COM2 port to the second analyzer’s RS232 port; from the second analyzer’s COM2 port to the third analyzer’s RS232 port, etc., connecting in this fashion up to eight analyzers, subject to the distance limitations of the RS-232 standard. 6. On the rear panel of each analyzer, adjust the DCE DTE switch so that the green and the red LEDs (RX and TX) of the COM1 connector (labeled RS232) are both lit. (Ensure you are using the correct RS-232 cables internally wired specifically for RS-
232 communication; see Table 1-1: Analyzer Options, “Communication Cables” and
Section 3.3.1.8: Connecting the Communications Inerfaces, “RS-232 Connection”).
51
Getting Started
Host
RS-232 port Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Female DB9 Male DB9
Analyzer
COM2 RS-232
Analyzer
COM2 RS-232
Analyzer
COM2 RS-232
Last Analyzer
COM2 RS-232
Note Note
Figure 3-17: Ensure jumper is installed between JP2 pins 21
↔
22 in last instrument of multidrop chain. RS-232-Multidrop PCA Host / Analyzer Interconnect Diagram
7. BEFORE communicating from the host, power on the instruments and check that
the Machine ID code is unique for each (Section 5.7.1).
a. In the SETUP Mode menu go to SETUP>MORE>COMM>ID. The default ID is typically the model number or “0”. b. to change the identification number, press the button below the digit to be changed. c. Press/select ENTER to accept the new ID for that instrument. 8. Next, in the SETUP>MORE>COMM>COM1 menu (do not use the COM2 menu for multidrop), edit the COM1 MODE parameter as follows: press/select EDIT and set only QUIET MODE, COMPUTER MODE, and MULTIDROP MODE to ON. Do not change any other settings. 9. Press/select ENTER to accept the changed settings, and ensure that COM1 MODE now shows 35. 10. Press/select SET> to go to the COM1 BAUD RATE menu and ensure it reads the same for all instruments (edit as needed so that all instruments are set at the same baud rate). •
The Instrument ID’s should not be duplicated.
•
The (communication) Host instrument can only address one instrument at a time.
Teledyne API recommends setting up the first link, between the Host and the first analyzer, and testing it before setting up the rest of the chain.
52 06864D DCN7562
Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Getting Started
RS-485 C
ONNECTION
As delivered from the factory,
COM2
is configured for RS-232 communications. This port can be reconfigured for operation as a non-isolated, half-duplex RS-485 port. Using COM2 for RS-485 communication disables the USB port. To configure the instrument for RS-485 communication, please contact the factory. 3.3.2.
PNEUMATIC CONNECTIONS
This section provides not only pneumatic connection information, but also important information about the gases required for accurate calibration; it also illustrates the pneumatic layouts for the analyzer in its basic configuration and with options. Before making the pneumatic connections, carefully note the following cautionary and special messages:
CAUTION G ENERAL S AFETY H AZARD
CARBON MONOXIDE (CO) IS A TOXIC GAS. Do not vent calibration gas and sample gas into enclosed areas. Obtain a Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for this material. Read and rigorously follow the safety guidelines described there.
CAUTION G
ENERAL
S
AFETY
H
AZARD
Sample and calibration gases should only come into contact with PTFE (Teflon), FEP, glass, stainless steel or brass. The exhaust from the analyzer’s internal pump MUST be vented outside the immediate area or shelter surrounding the instrument. It is important to conform to all safety requirements regarding exposure to CO.
06864D DCN7562 53
Getting Started
ATTENTION
Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer
COULD DAMAGE INSTRUMENT AND VOID WARRANTY
Maximum Pressure: Ideally the maximum pressure of any gas at the sample inlet should equal ambient atmospheric pressure and should NEVER exceed 1.5 in-hg above ambient pressure. Venting Pressurized Gas: In applications where any gas (span gas, zero air supply, sample gas is) received from a pressurized manifold, a vent must be provided to equalize the gas with ambient atmospheric pressure before it enters the analyzer to ensure that the gases input do not exceed the maximum inlet pressure of the analyzer, as well as to prevent back diffusion and pressure effects. These vents should be: • at least 0.2m long • no more than 2m long • vented outside the shelter or immediate area surrounding the instrument. Dust Plugs: Remove dust plugs from rear panel exhaust and supply line fittings before powering on/operating instrument. These plugs should be kept for reuse in the event of future storage or shipping to prevent debris from entering the pneumatics.
I MPORTANT Leak Check
Run a leak check once the appropriate pneumatic connections have been made; check all pneumatic fittings for leaks using the procedures
defined in Section 10.3.3.
See Figure 3-4 and Table 3-3 for the location and descriptions of the various pneumatic
inlets/outlets referenced in this section. 54 06864D DCN7562
Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer 3.3.2.1.
PNEUMATIC CONNECTIONS FOR BASIC CONFIGURATION
Calibrated CO Gas
at span gas concentration Source of
SAMPLE GAS
Removed during calibration
MODEL 701 Zero Gas Generator VENT SAMPLE EXHAUST
Getting Started
VENT here if input is pressurized
Instrument Chassis
Figure 3-18: Pneumatic Connections–Basic Configuration–Using Bottled Span Gas Calibrated CO Gas
at span gas concentration
MODEL 701 Zero Gas Generator Model 700 Gas Dilution Calibrator
Source of
SAMPLE GAS
Removed during calibration
SAMPLE EXHAUST VENT here if input is pressurized
Instrument Chassis
Figure 3-19: Pneumatic Connections–Basic Configuration–Using Gas Dilution Calibrator
06864D DCN7562 55
Getting Started
Note
Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer
S
AMPLE
G
AS
S
OURCE
Attach a sample inlet line to the
SAMPLE
inlet port. The sample input line should not be more than 2 meters long. • Maximum pressure of any gas at the sample inlet should not exceed 1.5 in-hg above ambient pressure and ideally should equal ambient atmospheric pressure. • In applications where the sample gas is received from a pressurized manifold, a vent must be placed on the sample gas before it enters the analyzer.
C
ALIBRATION
G
AS
S
OURCES
The source of calibration gas is also attached to the
SAMPLE
inlet, but only when a calibration operation is actually being performed.
Zero air and span gas inlets should supply their respective gases in excess of the 800 cc3/min demand of the analyzer. I
NPUT
G
AS
V
ENTING
The span gas, zero air supply and sample gas line MUST be vented in order to ensure that the gases input do not exceed the maximum inlet pressure of the analyzer as well as to prevent back diffusion and pressure effects. These vents should be: • • • At least 0.2m long; No more than 2m long and; Vented outside the shelter or immediate area surrounding the instrument.
E
XHAUST
O
UTLET
Attach an exhaust line to the analyzer’s EXHAUST outlet fitting. The exhaust line should be: • • • PTEF tubing; minimum O.D ¼”; A maximum of 10 meters long; Vented outside the T300/T300M Analyzer’s enclosure. 56 06864D DCN7562
Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Getting Started 3.3.2.2.
PNEUMATIC LAYOUT FOR BASIC CONFIGURATION
SAMPLE GAS INLET EXHAUST GAS OUTLET Particulate Filter INSTRUMENT CHASSIS GFC Motor Heat Sync GFC Wheel Housing SAMPLE CHAMBER PUMP Flow / Pressure Sensor PCA FLOW SENSOR SAMPLE PRESSURE SENSOR Sample Gas Flow Control
Figure 3-20: T300/T300M Internal Gas Flow (Basic Configuration)
3.3.2.3.
PNEUMATIC CONNECTIONS FOR AMBIENT ZERO/AMBIENT SPAN VALVE OPTION
This valve option is intended for applications where: • Zero air is supplied by a zero air generator like the Teledyne API’s T701 and; • Span gas is supplied by Gas Dilution Calibrator like the Teledyne API’s T700. Internal zero/span and sample/cal valves control the flow of gas through the instrument, but because the generator and calibrator limit the flow of zero air and span gas, no shutoff valves are required.
See Figure 3-4 for the location of gas inlets.
06864D DCN7562 57
Getting Started Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer 58 Source of
SAMPLE GAS
Removed during calibration
VENT here if input is pressurized Calibrated CO Gas
at span gas concentration (Adjust to 30 psig)
Model 700E gas Dilution Calibrator VENT SAMPLE EXHAUST VENT SPAN PRESSURE SPAN ZERO AIR
Instrument Chassis
MODEL 701 Zero Gas Generator
Figure 3-21:
VENT
Pneumatic Connections – Option 50A: Zero/Span Calibration Valves
S
AMPLE
G
AS
S
OURCE
Attach a sample inlet line to the sample inlet port. The SAMPLE input line should not be more than 2 meters long. • Maximum pressure of any gas at the sample inlet should not exceed 1.5 in-hg above ambient pressure and ideally should equal ambient atmospheric pressure. • In applications where the sample gas is received from a pressurized manifold, a vent must be placed on the sample gas before it enters the analyzer.
C
ALIBRATION
G
AS
S
OURCES
A vent may or may not be required when a T700-series is used with this option, depending on how the T700-series model output manifold is configured.
S
PAN
G
AS
:
• Attach a gas line from the source of calibration gas (e.g. a Teledyne API’s T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator) to the
SPAN
inlet at 30 psig.
Z
ERO
A
IR
:
• • Zero air is supplied via a zero air generator such as a Teledyne API’s T701. An adjustable valve is installed in the zero air supply line to regulate the gas flow.
I
NPUT
G
AS
V
ENTING
The zero air supply and sample gas line MUST be vented in order to ensure that the gases input do not exceed the maximum inlet pressure of the analyzer as well as to prevent back diffusion and pressure effects. These vents should be: • At least 0.2m long; • No more than 2m long and; Vented outside the shelter or immediate area surrounding the instrument. 06864D DCN7562
Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Getting Started
E
XHAUST
O
UTLET
Attach an exhaust line to the analyzer’s EXHAUST outlet fitting. The exhaust line should be: • • • PTEF tubing; minimum O.D ¼”; A maximum of 10 meters long; Vented outside the analyzer’s enclosure. 3.3.2.4.
PNEUMATIC LAYOUT FOR AMBIENT ZERO/AMBIENT SPAN VALVE OPTION
Sample Gas In SAMPLE GAS INLET
INSTRUMENT CHASSIS Sample / Cal Valve
Span Gas In PRESSURE SPAN INLET Particulate Filter VENT SPAN OUTLET
Zero / Span Valve GFC Motor Heat Sync GFC Wheel Housing
Zero Gas In ZERO AIR INLET SAMPLE CHAMBER EXHAUST GAS OUTLET PUMP Flow / Pressure Sensor PCA
FLOW SENSOR SAMPLE PRESSURE SENSOR Sample Gas Flow Control
Figure 3-22: Internal Pneumatic Flow OPT 50A – Zero/Span Valves Table 3-8: Zero/Span Valve Operating States for Option 50A MODE SAMPLE (Normal State) VALVE
Sample/Cal Zero/Span
CONDITION
Open to SAMPLE inlet Open to IZS inlet
ZERO CAL SPAN CAL
Sample/Cal Zero/Span Sample/Cal Zero/Span Open to ZERO/SPAN valve Open to IZS inlet Open to ZERO/SPAN valve Open to PRESSURE SPAN inlet 3.3.2.5.
PNEUMATIC CONNECTIONS FOR AMBIENT ZERO/PRESSURIZED SPAN
This option requires that both zero air and span gas be supplied from external sources. 06864D DCN7562 59
Getting Started Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer • • Span gas will be supplied from a pressurized bottle of calibrated CO gas. • A critical flow control orifice, internal to the instrument ensures that the proper flow rate is maintained. • An internal vent line ensures that the gas pressure of the span gas is reduced to ambient atmospheric pressure. • A SHUTOFF valve preserves the span gas source when it is not in use. Zero gas is supplied by either an external scrubber or a zero air generator such as the Teledyne API’s T701. Source of
SAMPLE GAS
Removed during calibration
VENT here if input is pressurized Calibrated CO Gas
at span gas concentration (Adjust to 30 psig)
VENT SAMPLE EXHAUST VENT SPAN
Instrument Chassis
MODEL 701 Zero Gas Generator Figure 3-23: PRESSURE SPAN ZERO AIR Pneumatic Connections – Option 50B: Ambient Zero/Pressurized Span Calibration Valves
S
AMPLE
G
AS
S
OURCE
Attach a sample inlet line to the sample inlet port. The SAMPLE input line should not be more than 2 meters long. • Maximum pressure of any gas at the sample inlet should not exceed 1.5 in-hg above ambient pressure and ideally should equal ambient atmospheric pressure. • In applications where the sample gas is received from a pressurized manifold, a vent must be placed on the sample gas before it enters the analyzer.
C
ALIBRATION
G
AS
S
OURCES
SPAN GAS
• Attach a gas line from the pressurized source of calibration gas (e.g. a bottle of nist srm gas) to the SPAN inlet at 30 psig.
Z
ERO
AIR
• • Zero air is supplied via a zero air generator such as a Teledyne API’s T701. An adjustable valve is installed in the zero air supply line to regulate the gas flow.
I
NPUT
G
AS
V
ENTING
The zero air supply and sample gas line MUST be vented in order to ensure that the gases input do not exceed the maximum inlet pressure of the analyzer as well as to prevent back diffusion and pressure effects. These vents should be: 60 06864D DCN7562
Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Getting Started • • At least 0.2m long; No more than 2m long and; • Vented outside the shelter or immediate area surrounding the instrument. A similar vent line should be connected to the VENT SPAN outlet on the back of the analyzer.
E
XHAUST
O
UTLET
Attach an exhaust line to the analyzer’s EXHAUST outlet fitting. The exhaust line should be: • • • PTEF tubing; minimum O.D ¼”; A maximum of 10 meters long; Vented outside the analyzer’s enclosure. 3.3.2.6.
PNEUMATIC LAYOUT FOR AMBIENT ZERO/PRESSURIZED SPAN OPTION
Sample Gas In SAMPLE GAS INLET
INSTRUMENT CHASSIS Shutoff Valve Sample / Cal Valve
Span Gas In PRESSURE SPAN INLET Particulate Filter VENT SPAN OUTLET
Zero / Span Valve GFC Motor Heat Sync GFC Wheel Housing
Zero Gas In ZERO AIR INLET SAMPLE CHAMBER EXHAUST GAS OUTLET PUMP Flow / Pressure Sensor PCA
FLOW SENSOR SAMPLE PRESSURE SENSOR Sample Gas Flow Control
Figure 3-24: Internal Pneumatic Flow OPT 50B – Zero/Span/Shutoff Valves Table 3-9: Zero/Span Valve Operating States for Option 50B MODE SAMPLE (Normal State) ZERO CAL SPAN CAL VALVE
Sample/Cal Zero/Span Shutoff Valve Sample/Cal Zero/Span Shutoff Valve Sample/Cal Zero/Span Shutoff Valve
CONDITION
Open to SAMPLE inlet Open to IZS inlet Closed Open to ZERO/SPAN valve Open to IZS inlet Closed Open to ZERO/SPAN valve Open to SHUTOFF valve Open to PRESSURE SPAN Inlet 06864D DCN7562 61
Getting Started Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer 3.3.2.7.
PNEUMATIC CONNECTIONS FOR ZERO SCRUBBER/PRESSURIZED SPAN OPTION
Source of
SAMPLE GAS
Removed during calibration
Calibrated CO Gas
at span gas concentration (Adjust to 30 psig)
VENT VENT here if input is pressurized SAMPLE EXHAUST VENT SPAN PRESSURE SPAN ZERO AIR
Instrument Chassis
Figure 3-25: Pneumatic Connections – Zero Scrubber/Pressurized Span Calibration Valves (Opt 50E)
S
AMPLE
G
AS
S
OURCE
Attach a sample inlet line to the sample inlet port. The SAMPLE input line should not be more than 2 meters long. • Maximum pressure of any gas at the sample inlet should not exceed 1.5 in-hg above ambient pressure and ideally should equal ambient atmospheric pressure. • In applications where the sample gas is received from a pressurized manifold, a vent must be placed on the sample gas before it enters the analyzer.
C
ALIBRATION
G
AS
S
OURCES
S
PAN
G
AS
:
• Attach a gas line from the pressurized source of calibration gas (e.g. a bottle of NIST-SRM gas) to the span inlet. • Span gas can by generated by a T700 Dynamic Dilution Calibrator.
Z
ERO
A
IR
:
• Zero air is supplied internally via a zero air scrubber that draws ambient air through the ZERO AIR inlet.
I
NPUT
G
AS
V
ENTING
The zero air supply and sample gas line MUST be vented in order to ensure that the gases input do not exceed the maximum inlet pressure of the analyzer as well as to prevent back diffusion and pressure effects. These vents should be: • • At least 0.2m long; No more than 2m long and; • Vented outside the shelter or immediate area surrounding the instrument. A similar vent line should be connected to the VENT SPAN outlet on the back of the analyzer. 62 06864D DCN7562
Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Getting Started
E
XHAUST
O
UTLET
Attach an exhaust line to the analyzer’s EXHAUST outlet fitting. The exhaust line should be: • • • PTEF tubing; minimum O.D ¼”; A maximum of 10 meters long; Vented outside the analyzer’s enclosure. 3.3.2.8.
PNEUMATIC LAYOUT FOR ZERO SCRUBBER/PRESSURIZED SPAN OPTION
Sample Gas In SAMPLE GAS INLET
INSTRUMENT CHASSIS Shutoff Valve Sample / Cal Valve
Span Gas In PRESSURE SPAN INLET Particulate Filter VENT SPAN OUTLET
Zero / Span Valve GFC Motor Heat Sync GFC Wheel Housing
Ambient ZERO AIR INLET ZERO Air Scrubber SAMPLE CHAMBER EXHAUST GAS OUTLET PUMP Flow / Pressure Sensor PCA
FLOW SENSOR SAMPLE PRESSURE SENSOR Sample Gas Flow Control
Figure 3-26: Internal Pneumatic Flow OPT 50E – Zero Scrubber/Pressurized Span Table 3-10: Zero/Span Valve Operating States for Option 51E
Mode
SAMPLE (Normal State) ZERO CAL SPAN CAL
Valve Sample/Cal Zero/Span Shutoff Valve Sample/Cal Zero/Span Shutoff Valve Sample/Cal Zero/Span Shutoff Valve Condition Open to SAMPLE inlet Open to internal ZERO AIR scrubber Closed Open to zero/span valve Open to internal ZERO AIR scrubber Closed Open to ZERO/SPAN valve Open to SHUTOFF valve Open to PRESSURE SPAN inlet 06864D DCN7562 63
Getting Started Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer 3.3.2.9.
PNEUMATIC CONNECTIONS FOR ZERO SCRUBBER/AMBIENT SPAN OPTION
Option 50H is operationally and pneumatically similar to Option 50A described earlier, except that the zero air is generated by an internal zero air scrubber. This means that the IZS inlet can simply be left open to ambient air. Internal zero/span and sample/cal valves control the flow of gas through the instrument, but because the generator and calibrator limit the flow of zero air and span gas no shutoff valves are required.
See Figure 3-4 for the location of gas inlets and outlets and span gas no shutoff valves
are required. Source of
SAMPLE GAS
Removed during calibration
VENT here if input is pressurized Calibrated CO Gas
at span gas concentration
Model 700 gas Dilution Calibrator VENT SAMPLE EXHAUST VENT SPAN PRESSURE SPAN ZERO AIR
Instrument Chassis
Figure 3-27: Pneumatic Connections – Option 50H: Zero/Span Calibration Valves
S
AMPLE
G
AS
S
OURCE
Attach a sample inlet line to the sample inlet port. The SAMPLE input line should not be more than 2 meters long. • Maximum pressure of any gas at the sample inlet should not exceed 1.5 in-Hg above ambient pressure and ideally should equal ambient atmospheric pressure. • In applications where the sample gas is received from a pressurized manifold, a vent must be placed on the sample gas before it enters the analyzer. 64 06864D DCN7562
Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Getting Started
C
ALIBRATION
G
AS
S
OURCES
SPAN GAS
• Attach a gas line from the source of calibration gas (e.g. a Teledyne API’s T700E Dynamic Dilution Calibrator) to the
SPAN
inlet.
Z
ERO
AIR
• Zero air is supplied internally via a zero air scrubber that draws ambient air through the IZS inlet.
I
NPUT
G
AS
V
ENTING
The zero air supply and sample gas line MUST be vented in order to ensure that the gases input do not exceed the maximum inlet pressure of the analyzer as well as to prevent back diffusion and pressure effects. These vents should be: • • • At least 0.2m long; No more than 2m long and; Vented outside the shelter or immediate area surrounding the instrument.
E
XHAUST
O
UTLET
Attach an exhaust line to the analyzer’s EXHAUST outlet fitting. The exhaust line should be: • • • PTEF tubing; minimum O.D ¼”; A maximum of 10 meters long; Vented outside the analyzer’s enclosure. 06864D DCN7562 65
Getting Started Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer 3.3.2.10.
PNEUMATIC LAYOUT FOR ZERO SCRUBBER/ AMBIENT SPAN OPTION
Sample Gas In SAMPLE GAS INLET
INSTRUMENT CHASSIS
Span Gas In SPAN1 INLET
Sample / Cal Valve
Particulate Filter VENT SPAN OUTLET
Zero / Span Valve GFC Motor Heat Sync GFC Wheel Housing
Zero Gas In ZERO AIR INLET ZERO Air Scrubber SAMPLE CHAMBER EXHAUST GAS OUTLET PUMP Flow / Pressure Sensor PCA
FLOW SENSOR SAMPLE PRESSURE SENSOR Sample Gas Flow Control
Figure 3-28: Internal Pneumatic Flow OPT 50H – Zero Scrubber/Ambient Span Table 3-11: Zero/Span Valve Operating States for Option 50H MODE SAMPLE (Normal State) VALVE
Sample/Cal Zero/Span
CONDITION
Open to SAMPLE inlet Open to ZERO AIR scrubber
ZERO CAL SPAN CAL
Sample/Cal Zero/Span Sample/Cal Zero/Span Open to ZERO/SPAN valve Open to ZERO AIR scrubber Open to ZERO/SPAN valve Open to PRESSURE SPAN inlet 3.3.2.11.
CALIBRATION GASES
Zero air and span gas are required for accurate calibration.
Z
ERO
A
IR
Zero air is a gas that is similar in chemical composition to the earth’s atmosphere but scrubbed of all components that might affect the analyzer’s readings, in this case CO and water vapor. If your analyzer is equipped with an Internal Zero Span (IZS) or an external zero air scrubber option, it is capable of creating zero air. If the analyzer is NOT equipped with the optional CO 2 sensor, zero air should be scrubbed of CO 2 as well, as this gas can also have an interfering effect on CO measurements. 66 06864D DCN7562
Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Getting Started For analyzers without an IZS or external zero air scrubber option, a zero air generator such as the Teledyne API Model T701 can be used.
S
PAN
G
AS
Span gas is a gas specifically mixed to match the chemical composition of the type of gas being measured at near full scale of the desired measurement range. In the case of CO measurements made with the T300 or T300M Analyzer, it is recommended that you use a span gas with a CO concentration equal to 80-90% of the measurement range for your application. EXAMPLE: If the application is to measure between 0 ppm and 500 ppb, an appropriate span gas concentration would be 400-450 ppb CO in N2. Cylinders of calibrated CO gas traceable to NIST-Standard Reference Material specifications (also referred to as SRMs or EPA protocol calibration gases) are
commercially available. Table 3-12 lists specific NIST-SRM reference numbers for
various concentrations of CO.
Table 3-12: NIST-SRM's Available for Traceability of CO Calibration Gases NIST-SRM TYPE
1680b 1681b 2613a 2614a 2659a 1 2626a 2745* 1 Used to calibrate optional O 2 sensor. 2 Used to calibrate optional CO 2 sensor. CO in N 2 CO in N 2 CO in Zero Air CO in Zero Air O CO CO 2 in N 2 2 2 in N in N 2 2
NOMINAL CONCENTRATION
500 ppm 1000 ppm 20 ppm 45 ppm 21% by weight 4% by weight 16% by weight
S
PAN
G
AS FOR
M
ULTIPOINT
C
ALIBRATION
Some applications, such as EPA monitoring, require a multipoint calibration procedure where span gases of different concentrations are needed. We recommend using a bottle of calibrated CO gas of higher concentration in conjunction with a gas dilution calibrator such as a Teledyne API’s T700. This type of calibrator precisely mixes a high concentration gas with zero air (both supplied externally) to accurately produce span gas of the correct concentration. Linearity profiles can be automated with this model and run unattended over night.
3.4.
STARTUP, FUNCTIONAL CHECKS, AND INITIAL CALIBRATION
I MPORTANT
I
MPACT ON
R
EADINGS OR
D
ATA
The analyzer’s cover must be installed to ensure that the temperatures of the GFC Wheel and absorption cell assemblies are properly controlled.
06864D DCN7562 67
Getting Started Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer If you are unfamiliar with the T300/T300M theory of operation, we recommend that you
read Section 12. For information on navigating the analyzer’s software menus, see the
menu trees described in Appendix A. 3.4.1.
STARTUP
After the electrical and pneumatic connections are made, an initial functional check is in order. Turn on the instrument. The pump and exhaust fan should start immediately. The display will briefly show a momentary splash screen of the Teledyne API logo and other information during the initialization process while the CPU loads the operating system, the firmware and the configuration data at the start of initialization. The analyzer should automatically switch to Sample Mode after completing the boot-up sequence and start monitoring CO gas. However, there is an approximately one hour warm-up period before reliable gas measurements can be taken. During the warm-up period, the front panel display may show messages in the Parameters field. 3.4.2.
WARNING MESSAGES
Because internal temperatures and other conditions may be outside the specified limits during the analyzer’s warm-up period, the software will suppress most warning conditions for 30 minutes after power up. If warning messages persist after the 60 minutes warm-up period is over, investigate their cause using the troubleshooting
To view and clear warning messages, press: Suppresses the warning messages.
SAMPLE SYSTEM RESET CO=XX.XX
TEST CAL MSG CLR SETUP NOTE: If a warning message persists after several attempts to clear it, the message may indicate a real problem and not an artifact of the warm-up period.
Once the last warning has been cleared, the RANGE function will be displayed.
SAMPLE RANGE=XXX.X PPM CO=XX.XX
SAMPLE SYSTEM RESET CO=XX.XX
TEST CAL MSG CLR SETUP STANDBY RANGE=50.0 PPB CO=XX.XX
TEST CAL SETUP Press CLR to clear the current message.
If more than one warning is active, the next message will take its place until all are cleared.
Table 3-13 lists brief descriptions of the warning messages that may occur during start
up. 68 06864D DCN7562
Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Getting Started
Table 3-13: Possible Warning Messages at Start-Up Message ANALOG CAL WARNING MEANING
The instrument's A/D circuitry or one of its analog outputs is not calibrated.
BENCH TEMP WARNING
Optical bench temperature is outside the specified limits.
BOX TEMP WARNING CANNOT DYN SPAN CANNOT DYN ZERO 2 3 CONFIG INITIALIZED DATA INITIALIZED PHOTO TEMP WARNING REAR BOARD NOT DET RELAY BOARD WARN
The temperature inside the T300/T300M chassis is outside the specified limits. Remote span calibration failed while the dynamic span feature was set to turned on. Remote zero calibration failed while the dynamic zero feature was set to turned on. Configuration was reset to factory defaults or was erased. DAS data storage was erased. Photometer temperature outside of warning limits. Motherboard was not detected during power up. CPU is unable to communicate with the relay PCA.
SAMPLE FLOW WARN SAMPLE PRESS WARN
The flow rate of the sample gas is outside the specified limits. Sample pressure outside of operational parameters.
SAMPLE TEMP WARN SOURCE WARNING SYSTEM RESET 1
The temperature of the sample gas is outside the specified limits. The IR source may be faulty. The computer was rebooted.
WHEEL TEMP WARNING
The Gas Filter Correlation Wheel temperature is outside the specified limits.
1 Typically clears 45 minutes after power up. 2 Clears the next time successful zero calibration is performed. 3 Clears the next time successful span calibration is performed.
Table 3-14 lists brief descriptions of the warning messages that may occur during start
up for T300 analyzers with optional second gas options or alarms installed.
06864D DCN7562 69
Getting Started Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer
Table 3-14: Possible Startup Warning Messages – T300 Analyzers with Options Message O2 CELL TEMP WARN 1 Meaning
O 2 sensor cell temperature outside of warning limits.
IZS TEMP WARNING 2 O2 ALARM 1 WARN 1, 4
On units with IZS options installed: The permeation tube temperature is outside of specified limits. O 2 Alarm limit #1 has been triggered.
4
O2 ALARM 2 WARN 1, 4 CO2 ALARM 1 WARN 3, 4
O 2 Alarm limit #2 has been triggered.
4 CO 2 Alarm limit #1 has been triggered.
4
CO2 ALARM 2 WARN 3, 4 `
CO 2 Alarm limit #2 has been triggered.
4
SO2 ALARM1 WARN 4
SO 2 Alarm limit #1 has been triggered.
4
SO2 ALARM2 WARN 4
SO 2 Alarm limit #2 has been triggered.
4 1 Only appears when the optional O 2 sensor is installed. 2 Only appears when the optional internal zero span (IZS) option is installed. 3 Only appears when the optional CO 2 sensor is installed. 4 Only Appears when the optional gas concentration alarms are installed 3.4.3.
FUNCTIONAL CHECKS
After the analyzer’s components have warmed up for at least 60 minutes, verify that the software properly supports any hardware options that were installed: navigate through the analyzer’s software menus, see the menu trees described in Appendix A. Then check to make sure that the analyzer is functioning within allowable operating parameters: • • Scroll the test functions viewable from the analyzer’s front panel. These functions are also useful tools for diagnosing performance problems with your
analyzer (see Section 11.1.2).
• The enclosed Final Test and Validation Data Sheet (P/N 04271) lists these values as they were before the instrument left the factory. To view the current values of these parameters press the following control button sequence on the analyzer’s front panel. Remember that until the unit has completed its warm-up these parameters may not have stabilized. 70 06864D DCN7562
Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Getting Started
SAMPLE RANGE=50.0 PPM CO= XX.XX
Toggle
to scroll through list of functions.
1 2 3 4 5
This will match the currently selected units of measure for the range being displayed.
Only appears if CO 2 sensor option is installed.
Only appears if O 2 sensor option is installed.
The
STABILE
the CO 2 function can be set to display data related to any of the gasses the analyzer measures, e.g. (if either or the O 2 sensor options are installed). Only appears if analog output
A4
is actively reporting a
TEST FUNCTION
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • RANGE=[Value]PPB
1
RANGE1=[Value]PPB
1
RANGE2=[Value]PPB
1 CO2 RANGE=[Value]% 2 O2 RANGE=[Value]% 3
STABIL=[Value]PPM
4
COMEAS =[Value]MV COREF =[Value]MV MR RATIO =[Value] PRESS =[Value]IN-HG-A SAMP FL=[Value]CC/M SAMPLE TEMP=[Value]ºC BENCH TEMP=[Value]ºC WHEEL TEMP=[Value]ºC
O2 CELL TEMP=[Value]ºC 3
BOX TEMP=[Value]ºC PHT DRIVE =[Value]MV SLOPE=[Value] OFFSET=[Value]MV
CO2 SLOPE=[Value] 2 CO2 OFFSET=[Value]MV 2 O2 SLOPE=[Value] 3 O2 OFFSET=[Value]MV 3
TEST=[Value]MV
5
TIME=[HH:MM:SS]
NOTE
3.4.4.
INITIAL CALIBRATION
To perform the following calibration you must have sources for zero air and span gas
available for input into the sample port on the back of the analyzer. See Section 3.3.2
for instructions for connecting these gas sources. The initial calibration should be carried out using the same reporting range set up as used during the analyzer’s factory calibration. This will allow you to compare your calibration results to the factory calibration as listed on the
Final Test and Validation Data Sheet
. If both available DAS parameters for a specific gas type are being reported via the instruments analog outputs e.g.
CONC1
and
CONC2
when the
DUAL
range mode is activated, separate calibrations should be carried out for each parameter. • • Use the
LOW
button when calibrating for
CONC1
(equivalent to
RANGE1
). Use the
HIGH
button when calibrating for
CONC2
(equivalent to
RANGE2
).
The following procedure assumes that the instrument does not have any
of the available Valve Options installed. See Section 9.3 for instructions
for calibrating instruments that have valve options.
06864D DCN7562 71
Getting Started Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer 3.4.4.1.
INTERFERENTS FOR CO MEASUREMENTS
It should be noted that the gas filter correlation method for detecting CO is subject to interference from a number of other gases that absorb IR in a similar fashion to CO. Most notable of these are water vapor, CO 2 , N 2 O (nitrous oxide) and CH 4 (methane). The T300/T300M has been successfully tested for its ability to reject interference from of these sources, however high concentrations of these gases can interfere with the instrument’s ability to make low-level CO measurements.
For a more detailed discussion of this topic, see Section 12.2.1.3.
3.4.4.2.
INITIAL CALIBRATION PROCEDURE
The following procedure assumes that: • The instrument DOES NOT have any of the available calibration valve or gas inlet options installed; • Cal gas will be supplied through the SAMPLE gas inlet on the back of the analyzer
•
The pneumatic setup matches that described in Section 3.3.2.1.
V
ERIFYING THE
T300/T300M R
EPORTING
R
ANGE
S
ETTINGS
While it is possible to perform the following procedure with any range setting we recommend that you perform this initial checkout using following reporting range settings: • • • Unit of Measure: PPM Analog Output Reporting Range: 50 ppm Mode Setting: SNGL 72 06864D DCN7562
Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Getting Started While these are the default setting for the T300/T300M Analyzer, it is recommended that you verify them before proceeding with the calibration procedure, by pressing: SAMPLE RANGE=50.0 PPM CO= XX.XX
SETUP
Verify that the
MODE
is set for
SNGL.
If it is not, press
SINGL
à
ENTR.
Verify that the
RANGE
is set for
50.0
If it is not, toggle each numeric button until the proper range is set, then press
ENTR
.
SETUP X.X
PRIMARY SETUP MENU
CFG DAS
RNGE
PASS CLK MORE
EXIT
SETUP X.X
RANGE CONTROL MENU MODE
SET UNIT DIL
EXIT
SETUP X.X
RANGE MODE:SINGL
SNGL DUAL AUTO ENTR
EXIT
SETUP X.X
RANGE CONTROL MENU
MODE
SET
UNIT DIL EXIT SETUP X.X
RANGE: 50.0 Conc
0 0 0 5 0 .0
ENTR
EXIT
SETUP X.X
RANGE CONTROL MENU MODE
SET UNIT DIL
EXIT
Press
EXIT
as needed to return to
SAMPLE m
ode.
Verify that the
UNIT
is set for
PPM
If it is not, press
PPM
à
ENTR.
SETUP X.X
CONC UNITS:PPM
PPB PPM UGM MGM ENTR
EXIT
06864D DCN7562 73
Getting Started Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer
D
ILUTION
R
ATIO
S
ET
U
P
If the dilution ratio option is enabled on your T300/T300M Analyzer and your application involves diluting the sample gas before it enters the analyzer, set the dilution ratio as follows:
SAMPLE RANGE=50.0 PPM CO= XX.XX
SETUP X.X
PRIMARY SETUP MENU
CFG DAS
RNGE PASS
CLK MORE EXIT SETUP X.X
RANGE MODE MENU
MODE SET UNIT
DIL
EXIT Toggle buttons to select dilution ratio gain factor for CO gas Default = 1 (e.g. 1:1).
SETUP X.X
DIL FACTOR:1.0 Gain 0 0 0 0 1 .0
ENTR EXIT
SETUP X.X
O2 DIL FACTOR:1.0 Gain 0 0 0 0 1 .0
ENTR EXIT
Toggle buttons to select dilution ratio gain factor for O 2 gas.
NOTE Only appears if the optional O 2 Sensor is installed.
EXIT
discards the new setting.
ENTR
accepts the new setting.
74 06864D DCN7562
Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Getting Started
S
ET
CO S
PAN
G
AS
C
ONCENTRATION
Set the expected CO pan gas concentration. This should be 80-90% of range of concentration range for which the analyzer’s analog output range is set. SAMPLE RANGE=50.0 PPM CO= XX.XX
SAMPLE CO O2 GAS TO CAL:CO ENTR EXIT SAMPLE LOW HIGH RANGE TO CAL:LOW ENTR EXIT M-P CAL RANGE=50.0 PPM CO= XX.XX
M-P CAL CO SPAN CONC:40.0 Conc 0 0 4 0 .0
0 ENTR EXIT EXIT ignores the new setting and returns to the previous display. ENTR accepts the new setting and returns to the CONCENTRATION MENU.
06864D DCN7562 75
Getting Started Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer
Z
ERO
/S
PAN
C
ALIBRATION
To perform the zero/span calibration procedure, press: SAMPLE RANGE=0.0 PPm CO= XX.XX
< TST
TST >
CAL SETUP Set the Display to show the
STABIL
test function.
This function calculates the stability of the CO measurement.
Toggle
TST>
button until ...
SAMPLE
STABIL= XXXX PPM
CO=XX.XX
< TST TST > CAL SETUP 76 Allow zero gas to enter the sample port at the rear of the analyzer.
Wait until
STABIL
falls below 0.5 ppm.
This may take several minutes.
SAMPLE
STABIL= XXXX PPM
CO=XX.XX
< TST TST >
CAL
SETUP M-P CAL
STABIL= XXXX PPM
CO=XX.XX
ZERO CONC EXIT
M-P CAL
STABIL= XXXX PPM
CO=XX.XX
ENTR
CONC EXIT Allow span gas to enter the sample port at the rear of the analyzer.
Press
ENTR
to changes the
OFFSET
&
SLOPE
values for the CO measurements.
Press
EXIT
to leave the calibration unchanged and return to the previous menu.
Wait until
STABIL
falls below 0.5 PPM.
This may take several minutes.
The
SPAN
button now appears during the transition from zero to span.
You may see both keys.
If either the
ZERO
or
SPAN
buttons fail to appear see the Troubleshooting section for tips.
SAMPLE
STABIL= XXXX PPM
CO=XX.XX
< TST TST >
CAL
SETUP M-P CAL
STABIL= XXXX PPM
CO=XX.XX
SPAN
CONC EXIT M-P CAL
STABIL= XXXX PPM
CO=XX.XX
ENTR
CONC EXIT M-P CAL
STABIL= XXXX PPM
CO=XX.XX
EXIT Figure 3-29: Zero/Span Calibration Procedure
Press
ENTR
to changes the
OFFSET
&
SLOPE
values for the CO measurements.
Press
EXIT
to leave the calibration unchanged and return to the previous menu.
EXIT
at this point returns to the SAMPLE menu.
06864D DCN7562
Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Getting Started 3.4.4.3.
O2 SENSOR CALIBRATION PROCEDURE
If your T300/T300M is equipped with the optional O 2 sensor, this sensor should be
calibrated during installation of the instrument. See Section 9.7.1 for instructions.
3.4.4.4.
CO2 SENSOR CALIBRATION PROCEDURE
If your T300/T300M is equipped with the optional CO 2 sensor, this sensor should be
calibrated during installation of the instrument. See Section 9.7.2 for instructions.
Note Once you have completed the above set-up procedures, please fill out the Quality Questionnaire that was shipped with your unit and return it to Teledyne API. This information is vital to our efforts in continuously improving our service and our products. THANK YOU.
06864D DCN7562 77
Getting Started Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer This page intentionally left 78 06864D DCN7562
4. OVERVIEW OF OPERATING MODES
To assist in navigating the analyzer’s software, a series of menu trees can be found in Appendix A of this manual.
Note Some control buttons on the touch screen do not appear if they are not applicable to the menu that you’re in, the task that you are performing, the command you are attempting to send, or to incorrect settings input by the user. For example, the ENTR button may disappear if you input a setting that is invalid or out of the allowable range for that parameter, such as trying to set the 24-hour clock to 25:00:00. Once you adjust the setting to an allowable value, the ENTR button will re-appear.
The T300/T300M software has a variety of operating modes. Most commonly, the analyzer will be operating in
Sample Mode
. In this mode a continuous read-out of the CO concentration can be viewed on the front panel and output as an analog voltage from rear panel terminals, calibrations can be performed and TEST functions and WARNING messages can be examined. If the analyzer is configured to measure a second gas (e.g. CO along with O 2 or CO 2 ) the display will show a readout of both concentrations. The second most important operating mode is SETUP mode. This mode is used for performing certain configuration operations, such as for the DAS system, the reporting ranges, or the serial (RS 232 / RS 485 / Ethernet) communication channels. The SETUP mode is also used for performing various diagnostic tests during troubleshooting. 06864D DCN7562
Figure 4-1: Front Panel Display
79
Overview of Operating Modes Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer The mode field of the front panel display indicates to the user which operating mode the unit is currently running. Besides
SAMPLE
and
SETUP
, other modes the analyzer can be operated in are:
Analyzer Operating Modes Table 4-1: MODE DIAG EXPLANATION
One of the analyzer’s diagnostic modes is active (refer to Section 5.9).
LO CAL A
Unit is performing LOW SPAN (midpoint) calibration initiated automatically by the analyzer’s AUTOCAL feature
LO CAL R
Unit is performing LOW SPAN (midpoint) calibration initiated remotely through the COM ports or digital control inputs.
M-P CAL
This is the basic calibration mode of the instrument and is activated by pressing the CAL button.
SAMPLE SAMPLE A SETUP X.# 2
Sampling normally, flashing text indicates adaptive filter is on. Indicates that unit is in SAMPLE mode and AUTOCAL feature is activated. SETUP mode is being used to configure the analyzer. The gas measurement will continue during this process.
SPAN CAL A 1 SPAN CAL M SPAN CAL R 1 1
Unit is performing SPAN calibration initiated automatically by the analyzer’s AUTOCAL feature Unit is performing SPAN calibration initiated manually by the user. Unit is performing SPAN calibration initiated remotely through the COM ports or digital control inputs. Unit is performing ZERO calibration procedure initiated automatically by the AUTOCAL feature
ZERO CAL A 1 ZERO CAL M 1 ZERO CAL R 1
Unit is performing ZERO calibration procedure initiated manually by the user. Unit is performing ZERO calibration procedure initiated remotely through the COM ports or digital control inputs. 1 Only Appears on units with Z/S valve or IZS options. 2 The revision of the analyzer firmware is displayed following the word SETUP, e.g., SETUP G.3.
4.1.
SAMPLE MODE
This is the analyzer’s standard operating mode. In this mode the instrument is analyzing the gas in the sample chamber, calculating CO concentration and reporting this information to the user via the front panel display, the analog outputs and, if set up properly, the RS-232/RS-485/Ethernet/USB ports. 4.1.1.
TEST FUNCTIONS
A series of
TEST
functions is available for viewing at the front panel whenever the analyzer is at the
SAMPLE
mode. These parameters provide information about the present operating status of the instrument and are useful during troubleshooting (refer to
Section 11.1.2). They can also be recorded in one of the DAS channels (refer to Section
7.2) for data analysis. To view the test functions, press one of the
repeatedly in either direction. 80 06864D DCN7562
Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Overview of Operating Modes
SAMPLE RANGE=50.0 PPM CO= XX.XX
Toggle
to scroll through list of functions.
2 3 1 4 5
This will match the currently selected units of measure for the range being displayed.
Only appears if CO 2 sensor option is installed.
Only appears if O 2 sensor option is installed.
The
STABIL
function can be set to display data related to any of the gasses the analyzer measures, e.g. (if either the CO 2 or the O 2 sensor options are installed. Only appears if analog output
A4
is actively reporting a
TEST FUNCTION Figure 4-2:
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • RANGE=[Value]PPB
1
RANGE1=[Value]PPB
1
RANGE2=[Value]PPB
1 CO2 RANGE=[Value]% 2 O2 RANGE=[Value]% 3
STABIL=[Value]PPM
4
COMEAS =[Value]MV CO REF =[Value]MV MR RATIO =[Value] PRES =[Value]IN-HG-A SAMP FL=[Value]CC/M SAMPLE TEMP=[Value]ºC BENCH TEMP=[Value]ºC WHEEL TEMP=[Value]ºC
O2 CELL TEMP=[Value]ºC 3
BOX TEMP=[Value]ºC PHT DRIVE =[Value]MV SLOPE=[Value] OFFSET=[Value]MV
CO2 SLOPE=[Value] 2 CO2 OFFSET=[Value]MV 2 O2 SLOPE=[Value] 3 O2 OFFSET=[Value]MV 3
TEST=[Value]MV
5
TIME=[HH:MM:SS]
Viewing T300/T300M Test Functions I MPORTANT I MPACT ON R EADING OR D ATA
A value of “XXXX” displayed for any of the TEST functions indicates an out-of-range reading or the analyzer’s inability to calculate it. All pressure measurements are represented in terms of absolute pressure. Absolute, atmospheric pressure is 29.92 in-Hg-A at sea level. It decreases about 1 in-Hg per 300 m gain in altitude. A variety of factors such as air conditioning and passing storms can cause changes in the absolute atmospheric pressure.
06864D DCN7562 81
Overview of Operating Modes Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer
Table 4-2: Test Functions Defined PARAMETER DISPLAY TITLE UNITS MEANING
O Stability 2 CO Range Range 2 Range 1 2 CO Measure CO Reference Measurement / Reference Ratio Sample Pressure Sample Flow O
STABIL RANGE RANGE1 RANGE2
CO 2 2
CO REF PRES 1 1 RANGE RANGE CO MEAS MR Ratio SAMPLE FL
PPB UGM cm 3 3 3 , PPM , MGM PPB, PPM, UGM, MGM % % MV MV - In-Hg-A /min Standard deviation of CO concentration readings. Data points are recorded every ten seconds using the last 25 data points. This function can be reset to show O 2 or CO 2 stability in instruments with those sensor options installed. The full scale limit at which the reporting range of the analyzer is currently set. THIS IS NOT the Physical Range of the instrument.
See Section 5.4.1 for more information.
The range setting for the optional O 2 Sensor. The range setting for the optional CO 2 Sensor. The demodulated, peak IR detector output during the measure portion of the GFC Wheel cycle. The demodulated, peak IR detector output during the reference portion of the GFC Wheel cycle. The result of
CO MEAS
divided by
CO REF
. This ratio is the primary value used to compute CO concentration. The value displayed is not linearized. The absolute pressure of the Sample gas as measured by a pressure sensor located inside the sample chamber. Sample mass flow rate as measured by the flow rate sensor in the sample gas stream. Sample Temperature Bench Temperature Wheel Temperature Box Temperature O 2 Cell Temperature 1 Photo-detector Temp. Control Voltage O
SAMP TEMP BENCH TEMP WHEEL TEMP
2
BOX TEMP CELL TEMP PHT DRIVE 3
° ° ° ° ° C C C C C mV The temperature of the gas inside the sample chamber. Optical bench temperature. GFC Wheel temperature. The temperature inside the analyzer chassis. The current temperature of the O 2 sensor measurement cell. The drive voltage being supplied to the thermoelectric coolers of the IR photo-detector by the sync/demod Board. Slope Offset
SLOPE OFFSET
- - The sensitivity of the instrument as calculated during the last calibration activity. The overall offset of the instrument as calculated during the last calibration activity. O 2 Sensor Slope 1 O 2 Sensor Offset 1 CO 2 Sensor Slope 2 CO 2 Sensor Offset 2 O O CO 2 2 CO 2
SLOPE OFFSET
2
SLOPE OFFSET
- - - - O O 2 2 slope, computed during zero/span calibration. offset, computed during zero/span calibration. CO CO 2 2 slope, computed during zero/span calibration. offset, computed during zero/span calibration. Current Time
TIME
- 1 Only appears when the optional O 2 sensor is installed. 2 Only appears when the optional CO 2 sensor is installed. 3 Only available on the T300. The current time. This is used to create a time stamp on DAS readings, and by the
AUTOCAL
feature to trigger calibration events. 82 06864D DCN7562
Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Overview of Operating Modes
Table 4-3:
4.1.2.
WARNING MESSAGES
The most common instrument failures will be reported as a warning on the analyzer’s front panel and through the
COMM
ports. Section 11.1.1 explains how to use these
messages to troubleshoot problems. Section 4.1.2 shows how to view and clear warning
messages.
List of Warning Messages MESSAGE
MEANING
ANALOG CAL WARNING BENCH TEMP WARNING BOX TEMP WARNING CANNOT DYN SPAN
2
CANNOT DYN ZERO
3
CONC ALRM1 WARNING 1 CONC ALRM2 WARNING 1 CONFIG INITIALIZED DATA INITIALIZED O 2 CELL TEMP WARN 2 PHOTO TEMP WARNING REAR BOARD NOT DET RELAY BOARD WARN SAMPLE FLOW WARN
The instrument’s A/D circuitry or one of its analog outputs is not calibrated. The temperature of the optical bench is outside the specified limits. The temperature inside the chassis is outside the specified limits. Remote span calibration failed while the dynamic span feature was set to turned on. Remote zero calibration failed while the dynamic zero feature was set to turned on. Concentration alarm 1 is enabled and the measured CO le vel is ≥ the set point.
Concentration alarm 2 is enabled and the measured CO level is ≥ the set point.
Configuration storage was reset to factory configuration or erased. DAS data storage was erased. O 2 sensor cell temperature outside of warning limits. The temperature of the IR photo detector is outside the specified limits. The CPU is unable to communicate with the motherboard. The firmware is unable to communicate with the relay board. The flow rate of the sample gas is outside the specified limits.
SAMPLE PRESS WARN
Sample gas pressure outside of operational parameters.
SAMPLE TEMP WARN
The temperature of the sample gas is outside the specified limits.
SOURCE WARNING SYSTEM RESET
1 The IR source may be faulty. The computer was rebooted.
WHEEL TEMP WARNING
The Gas Filter Correlation Wheel temperature is outside the specified limits. 1 Alarm warnings only present when 0ptional alarm package is activated. 2 Only enabled when the optional O 2 Sensor is installed. 06864D DCN7562 83
Overview of Operating Modes Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer To view and clear warning messages: Suppresses the warning messages.
SAMPLE SYSTEM RESET TEST
CAL MSG CLR SETUP
NOTE:
If a warning message persists after several attempts to clear it, the message may indicate a real problem and not an artifact of the warm-up period.
SAMPLE RANGE=XXX.XPPM
CAL
MSG
SETUP
SAMPLE SYSTEM RESET TEST
CAL CLR SETUP
SYSTEM SYSTEM RESET
CAL
CLR
SETUP
MSG
returns the active warnings to the message field.
Press
CLR
to clear the current message.
If more than one warning is active, the next message will take its place.
Once the last warning has been cleared, the
RANGE
the analyzer’s main
MESSAGE FIELD.
function will be displayed in
Figure 4-3: STANDBY RANGE=50.0 PPB CO=XX.XX
CAL MSG SETUP
Viewing and Clearing T300/T300M WARNING Messages 4.2.
CALIBRATION MODE
Pressing the CAL button switches the T300/T300M into calibration mode. In this mode the user can calibrate the instrument with the use of calibrated zero or span gases. This mode is also used to check the current calibration status of the instrument. • For more information about setting up and performing standard calibration
operations or checks, see Section 9.
• For more information about setting up and performing EPA equivalent calibrations,
see Section 9.8, EPA Protocol Calibration.
If the instrument includes one of the available zero/span valve options, the
SAMPLE
mode display will also include
CALZ
and
CALS
buttons. Pressing either of these buttons also puts the instrument into calibration mode. • The
CALZ
button is used to initiate a calibration of the analyzer’s zero point using internally generated zero air. • The
CALS
button is used to calibrate the span point of the analyzer’s current reporting range using span gas.
For more information concerning calibration valve options, see Table 1-1.
For information on using the automatic calibration feature (
ACAL
) in conjunction with
the one of the calibration valve options, see Section 9.4.
I MPORTANT
I
MPACT ON
R
EADINGS OR
D
ATA
It is recommended that this span calibration be performed at 80-90% of full scale of the analyzer’s currently selected reporting range. EXAMPLES: If the reporting range is set for 0 to 50 ppm, an appropriate span point would be 40-45 ppm. If the of the reporting range is set for 0 to 1000 ppb, an appropriate span point would be 800-900 ppb.
84 06864D DCN7562
Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Overview of Operating Modes
4.3.
SETUP MODE
The
SETUP
mode contains a variety of choices that are used to configure the analyzer’s hardware and software features, perform diagnostic procedures, gather information on the instrument’s performance, and configure or access data from the internal data acquisition system (DAS). For a visual representation of the software menu trees, refer to Appendix A. Setup Mode is divided between Primary and Secondary Setup menus and can be protected through password security. 4.3.1.
PASSWORD SECURITY
Setup Mode can be protected by password security through the SETUP>PASS menu
(Section 5.5) to prevent unauthorized or inadvertent configuration adjustments.
4.3.2.
PRIMARY SETUP MENU
The areas accessible under the Setup mode are shown in Table 4-4 and Table 4-5.
Table 4-4: Primary Setup Mode Features and Functions MODE OR FEATURE
Analyzer Configuration Auto Cal Feature
CONTROL BUTTON CFG ACAL DESCRIPTION
Lists button hardware and software configuration information Used to set up and operate the AutoCal feature. Only appears if the analyzer has one of the internal valve options installed. Internal Data Acquisition (DAS) Analog Output Reporting Range Configuration Calibration Password Security Internal Clock Configuration
DAS RNGE PASS CLK
Used to set up the DAS system and view recorded data Used to configure the output signals generated by the instruments Analog outputs. Turns the calibration password feature ON/OFF. Used to Set or adjust the instrument’s internal clock. Advanced
SETUP
features
MORE
This button accesses the instruments secondary setup menu.
MANUAL SECTION
and
See Table 6-5 06864D DCN7562 85
Overview of Operating Modes Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer 4.3.3.
SECONDARY SETUP MENU (SETUP>MORE)
Table 4-5: Secondary Setup Mode (SETUP>MORE) Features and Functions MODE OR FEATURE CONTROL BUTTON DESCRIPTION
External Communication Channel Configuration
COMM
Used to set up and operate the analyzer’s various serial channels including RS-232,RS-485, modem communication, Ethernet and/or USB. System Status Variables
VARS
Used to view various variables related to the instruments current operational status. • Changes made to any variable are not recorded in the instrument’s memory until the
ENTR
button is pressed. • Pressing the
EXIT
button ignores the new setting. System Diagnostic Features and Analog Output Configuration
DIAG
Used to access a variety of functions that are used to configure, test or diagnose problems with a variety of the analyzer’s basic systems. Most notably, the menus used to configure the output signals generated by the instruments Analog outputs are located here. Alarm Limit Configuration 1
ALRM
Used to turn the instrument’s two alarms on and off as well as set the trigger limits for each. 1 Alarm warnings only present when optional alarm package is activated.
MANUAL SECTION
I MPORTANT
I
MPACT ON
R
EADINGS OR
D
ATA
Any changes made to a variable during the SETUP procedures are not acknowledged by the instrument until the ENTR button is pressed. If the EXIT button is pressed before the ENTR button, the analyzer will beep, alerting the user that the newly entered value has not been accepted.
86 06864D DCN7562
5. SETUP MENU
The SETUP menu is sued to set instrument parameters for performing configuration, calibration, reporting and diagnostics operations according to user needs.
5.1.
SETUP
à
CFG: CONFIGURATION INFORMATION
Pressing the
CFG
button displays the instrument’s configuration information. This display lists the analyzer model, serial number, firmware revision, software library revision, CPU type and other information. • Special instrument or software features or installed options may also be listed here. • Use this information to identify the software and hardware installed in your T300/T300M Analyzer when contacting Technical Support. To access the configuration table, press:
SAMPLE RANGE=50.00 PPM CO= XX.XX
SETUP
PRIMARY SETUP MENU CFG
DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE • • • • • • •
Press NEXT or PREV to move back and forth through the following list of Configuration information:
•
MODEL TYPE AND NUMBER PART NUMBER SERIAL NUMBER SOFTWARE REVISION LIBRARY REVISION iCHIP SOFTWARE REVISION CPU TYPE & OS REVISION DATE FACTORY CONFIGURATION SAVED SETUP T300 CO Analyzer PREV NEXT
EXIT
EXIT
Press EXIT at any time to return to the SETUP menu.
06864D DCN7562 87
Setup Menu Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer
5.2.
SETUP
à
ACAL: AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION
Instruments with one of the internal valve options installed can be set to automatically run calibration procedures and calibration checks. These automatic procedures are programmed using the submenus and functions found under the
ACAL
menu. A menu tree showing the
ACAL
menu’s entire structure can be found in Appendix A-1 of this manual. Instructions for using the
ACAL
feature are located in the Section 9.4 of this manual
along with all other information related to calibrating the T300/T300M Analyzer.
SAMPLE RANGE=50.00 PPM CO= XX.XX
SETUP X.X
PRIMARY SETUP MENU
CFG
ACAL
DAS RANG PASS CLK MORE EXIT Accesses AutoCal setup menus
5.3.
SETUP
à
DAS: INTERNAL DATA ACQUISITION SYSTEM
Use the SETUP>DAS menu to capture and record data. Refer to Section 7 for
configuration and operation details.
5.4.
SETUP
à
RNGE: ANALOG OUTPUT REPORTING RANGE CONFIGURATION
Use the SETUP>RNGE menu to configure output reporting ranges, including scaled reporting ranges to handle data resolution challenges. This section also describes configuration for Single, Dual, and Auto Range modes. 5.4.1.
ANALOG OUTPUT RANGES FOR CO CONCENTRATION
The analyzer has several active analog output signals, accessible through the ANALOG OUT connector on the rear panel. 88 06864D DCN7562
Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer
ANALOG OUT
CO concentration outputs Only active if the Optional CO 2 or O 2 Sensor is Test Channel
A1 A2 A3 A4 + - + - + - + -
Setup Menu
LOW range when DUAL mode is selected
Figure 5-1:
HIGH range when DUAL mode is selected
Analog Output Connector Pin Out
The outputs can be configured either at the factory or by the user for full scale outputs of 0.1 VDC, 1VDC, 5VDC or 10VDC. Additionally,
A1, A2
and
A3
may be equipped with optional 0-20 mADC current loop drivers and configured for any current output within that range (e.g. 0-20, 2-20, 4-20, etc.). The user may also adjust the signal level and scaling of the actual output voltage or current to match the input requirements of the recorder or datalogger (See Section
In its basic configuration, the
A1
and
A2
channels output a signal that is proportional to the CO concentration of the sample gas. Several modes are available which allow them
to operate independently or be slaved together (See Section 5.4.3).
EXAMPLE:
A1
OUTPUT: Output Signal = 0-5 VDC representing 0-1000 ppm concentration values
A2
OUTPUT: Output Signal = 0 – 10 VDC representing 0-500 ppm concentration values. Output
A3
is only active if the CO 2 or O 2 sensor option is installed. In this case a signal representing the currently measured CO 2 or O 2 concentration is output on this channel. The output, labeled
A4
is special. It can be set by the user (See Section 5.9.8.1) to
output several of the test functions accessible through the
buttons of the units sample display. 06864D DCN7562 89
Setup Menu Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer 5.4.2.
PHYSICAL RANGE VS ANALOG OUTPUT REPORTING RANGES
Functionally, the T300 Family of CO Analyzers have one hardware PHYSICAL RANGE that is capable of determining CO concentrations between across a very wide array of values.
Table 5-1: T300 Family Physical Range by Model MODEL
T300
RANGE
0 – 1000 ppm T300M 0 – 5000 ppm This architecture improves reliability and accuracy by avoiding the need for extra, switchable, gain-amplification circuitry. Once properly calibrated, the analyzer’s front panel will accurately report concentrations along the entire span of its physical range. Because many applications use only a small part of the analyzer’s full physical range, this can create data resolution problems for most analog recording devices. For example, in an application where an T300 is being used to measure an expected concentration of typically less than 50 ppm CO, the full scale of expected values is only 4% of the instrument’s full 1000 ppm measurement range. Unmodified, the corresponding output signal would also be recorded across only 2.5% of the range of the recording device. The T300/T300M Analyzers solve this problem by allowing the user to select a scaled reporting range for the analog outputs that only includes that portion of the physical range relevant to the specific application. Only this REPORTING RANGE of the analog outputs is scaled; the physical range of the analyzer and the readings displayed on the front panel remain unaltered.
Note Neither the DAS values stored in the CPU’s memory nor the concentration values reported on the front panel are affected by the settings chosen for the reporting range(s) of the instrument.
5.4.3.
REPORTING RANGE MODES: SINGLE, DUAL, AUTO RANGES
The T300/T300M provides three analog output range modes to choose from. • Single range (
SNGL
) mode sets a single maximum range for the analog output. If single range is selected both outputs are slaved together and will represent the same measurement span (e.g. 0-50 ppm), however their electronic signal levels may be configured for different ranges (e.g. 0-10 VDC vs. 0-.1 VDC). • Dual range (
DUAL
) allows the A1 and A2 outputs to be configured with different measurement spans as well as separate electronic signal levels. • Auto range (
AUTO
) mode gives the analyzer to ability to output data via a low range and high range. When this mode is selected the analyzer will automatically switch between the two ranges dynamically as the concentration value fluctuates. Range status is also output via the external digital I/O status outputs (See Section
90 06864D DCN7562
Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer To select the Analog Output Range Type press: SAMPLE RANGE=50.00 PPB CO=XX.XX
SNGL Range
à
DUAL Range1 Range2
à à
AUTO Low Range High Range
06864D DCN7562 91
Setup Menu Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer 5.4.3.1.
SINGLE RANGE MODE (SNGL)
Single Range Mode (SNGL) is the default reporting range mode for the analyzer. When the single range mode is selected (
SNGL
), all analog CO concentration outputs (
A1 and A2
) are slaved together and set to the same reporting range limits (e.g. 500.0 ppb). The span limit of this reporting range can be set to any value within the physical range of the analyzer. Although both outputs share the same concentration reporting range, the electronic signal ranges of the analog outputs may still be configured for different values (e.g. 0-5
VDC, 0-10 VDC, etc; see Section 5.9.3.1)
To select
SNGL
range mode and to set the upper limit of the range, press: SAMPLE RANGE=50.00 PPB CO=XX.XX
SETUP X.X RANGE:500.0 Conc 0 0 5 0 0 .0
ENTR EXIT Toggle these keys to select the upper SPAN limit for the CO 2 or O 2 reporting range NOTE Only appears if the optional CO 2 or O 2 Sensor is installed.
SETUP X.X O2 RANGE:100.00 % 1 0 0 .0
0 ENTR EXIT EXIT discards the new setting.
ENTR accepts the new setting.
92 06864D DCN7562
Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Setup Menu 5.4.3.2.
DUAL RANGE MODE (DUAL)
Selecting the
DUAL
range mode allows the
A1
and
A2
outputs to be configured with different reporting ranges. The analyzer software calls these two ranges low and high. • The
LOW
range setting corresponds with the analog output labeled
A1
on the rear panel of the instrument. • The
HIGH
range setting corresponds with the
A2
output. While the software names these two ranges low and high, they do not have to be configured that way. For example: The low range can be set for a span of 0-1000 ppm while the high range is set for 0-500 ppm. In
DUAL
range mode the
RANGE
test function displayed on the front panel will be replaced by two separate functions: •
RANGE1
: The range setting for the A1 output. •
RANGE2
: The range setting for the A2 output. To select the
DUAL
range mode press following buttonstroke sequence SAMPLE RANGE=50.0 PPM CO=XX.XX
C1
=
LOW
(or
A1
) and
C2
=
HIGH
(or
A2
). When the instrument’s range mode is set to DUAL, the concentration field in the upper right hand corner of the display alternates between displaying the low range value and the high range value. The concentration currently being displayed is identified as
I MPORTANT
I
MPACT ON
R
EADINGS OR
D
ATA
In DUAL range mode the LOW and HIGH ranges have separate slopes and offsets for computing CO concentrations. The two ranges must be independently calibrated.
06864D DCN7562 93
Setup Menu Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer To set the upper range limit for each independent reporting range, press: . SAMPLE RANGE=50.0 PPM CO=XX.XX
ENTR EXIT Toggle these keys to select the upper SPAN limit for the reporting ranges.
Toggle these keys to select the upper SPAN limit for the CO 2 or O 2 reporting range.
NOTE Display only appears if the optional CO 2 or O 2 Sensor is installed.
SETUP X.X O2 RANGE:100.00 % 1 0 0 .0
0 ENTR EXIT EXIT discards the new setting.
ENTR accepts the new setting.
94 06864D DCN7562
Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Setup Menu 5.4.3.3.
AUTO RANGE MODE (AUTO)
In
AUTO
range mode, the analyzer automatically switches the reporting range between two user-defined ranges (low and high). • The unit will switch from low range to high range when the CO 2 concentration exceeds 98% of the low range span. • The unit will return from high range back to low range once both the CO 2 concentration falls below 75% of the low range span. In
AUTO
Range Mode the instrument reports the same data in the same range on both the
A1
and
A2
outputs and automatically switches both outputs between ranges as described above. Also the
RANGE
test function displayed on the front panel will be replaced by two separate functions: • •
RANGE1
: The
LOW
range setting for all analog outputs.
RANGE2
: The
HIGH
range setting for all analog outputs. The high/low range status is also reported through the external, digital status bits (See
06864D DCN7562 95
Setup Menu Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer To set individual ranges press the following control button sequence.
SAMPLE RANGE=50.0 PPM CO=XX.XX
Avoid accidentally setting the
LOW
range (
RANGE1
) of the instrument with a higher span limit than the
HIGH
range (
RANGE2
). This will cause the unit to stay in the low reporting range perpetually and defeat the function of the
AUTO
range mode. The
LOW
and
HIGH
ranges have separate slopes and offsets for computing the CO concentration. The two ranges must be independently calibrated .
SETUP X.X
PRIMARY SETUP MENU
CFG DAS
RNGE PASS
CLK MORE EXIT SETUP X.X
RANGE MODE MENU MODE
SET UNIT DIL EXIT SETUP X.X
RANGE MODE:SNGL
SNGL DUAL
AUTO
DIL ENTR EXIT SETUP X.X
RANGE MODE:AUTO
SNGL DUAL AUTO
ENTR
EXIT SETUP X.X
RANGE CONTROL MENU
MODE
SET
UNIT DIL EXIT SETUP X.X
LOW RANGE:50.0 Conc 0 0 0 5 0 .0
ENTR EXIT
Toggle these buttons to select the upper
SPAN
limit for the reporting range.
SETUP X.X
HIGH RANGE:200.0 Conc 0 0 2 0 0 .0
ENTR EXIT EXIT
discards the new setting.
ENTR
accepts the new setting.
96 06864D DCN7562
Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Setup Menu 5.4.4.
RANGE UNITS
The T300/T300M can display concentrations in parts per million (10 6 mols per mol, PPM) or milligrams per cubic meter (mg/m 3 , MG). Changing units affects all of the display, COMM port and DAS values for all reporting ranges regardless of the analyzer’s range mode. To change the concentration units:
SAMPLE RANGE=50.0 PPM CO=XX.XX
SETUP X.X
PRIMARY SETUP MENU
CFG DAS
RNGE PASS
CLK MORE EXIT The following equations give approximate conversions between volume/volume units and weight/volume units:
CO
CO ppb x 1.25 = CO ug/m 3 CO ppm x 1.25 = CO mg/m 3 SETUP X.X
RANGE MODE MENU
MODE SET
UNIT
DIL EXIT SETUP X.X
RANGE MODE:SNGL SNGL
DUAL AUTO ENTR EXIT SETUP X.X
CONC UNITS:PPB PPB PPM UGM MGM ENTR
EXIT
I
Toggle these buttons to select the units of measure for the reporting ranges.
MPORTANT EXIT
discards the new setting.
ENTR
accepts the new setting.
I
MPACT ON
R
EADINGS OR
D
ATA In order to avoid a reference temperature bias, the analyzer must be recalibrated after every change in reporting units. I MPORTANT
I
MPACT ON
R
EADINGS OR
D
ATA Concentrations displayed in mg/m3 and ug/m3 use 0 Standard Temperature and Pressure (STP). Consult your local regulations for the STP used by your agency. (Example: US EPA uses 25 o
° C
and 760 mmHg for C as the reference temperature). Once the Units of Measurement have been changed from volumetric (ppb or ppm) to mass units (µg/m3 or mg/m3) the analyzer MUST be recalibrated, as the “expected span values” previously in effect will no longer be valid. Simply entering new expected span values without running the entire calibration routine IS NOT sufficient. This will also counteract any discrepancies between STP definitions.
06864D DCN7562 97
Setup Menu Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer 5.4.5.
DILUTION RATIO (OPTION)
This feature is a optional software utility that allows the user to compensate for any dilution of the sample gas that may occur before it enters the sample inlet. Typically this occurs in continuous emission monitoring (CEM) applications where the sampling method used to remove the gas from the stack dilutes it. Using the dilution ratio option is a 4-step process:
1. Select the appropriate units of measure (see Section 5.4.4).
2. Select the reporting range mode and set the reporting range upper limit (see Section
• Ensure that the upper span limit entered for the reporting range is the maximum expected concentration of the
UNDILUTED
gas. 3. Set the dilution factor as a gain (e.g., a value of 20 means 20 parts diluent and 1 part of sample gas):
SAMPLE RANGE=50.0 PPM CO=XX.XX
SETUP X.X
PRIMARY SETUP MENU
CFG DAS
RNGE PASS
CLK MORE EXIT 98 SETUP X.X
RANGE CONTROL MENU
MODE SET UNIT
DIL
EXIT SETUP X.X
CO DIL FACTOR:1.0 Gain 0 0 0 0 1 .0
ENTR EXIT
Toggle these buttons to select dilution ratio gain factor for CO gas.
Default = 1 (e.g. 1:1).
SETUP X.X
O2 DIL FACTOR:1.0 Gain 0 0 0 0 1 .0
ENTR EXIT
Toggle these buttons to select dilution ratio gain factor for CO 2 or O 2 gas.
NOTE Display only appears if the optional CO 2 or O 2 Sensor is installed.
EXIT
discards the new setting.
ENTR
accepts the new setting.
4. Calibrate the analyzer. • Make sure that the calibration span gas is either supplied through the same dilution system as the sample gas or has an appropriately lower actual concentration. • • EXAMPLE: If the reporting range limit is set for 100 ppm and the dilution ratio of the sample gas is 20 gain, either: a span gas with the concentration of 100 ppm can be used if the span gas passes through the same dilution steps as the sample gas, or; a 5 ppm span gas must be used if the span gas
IS NOT
routed through the dilution system. 06864D DCN7562
Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Setup Menu
5.5.
SETUP
à
PASS: PASSWORD PROTECTION
The menu system provides password protection of the calibration and setup functions to prevent unauthorized adjustments. When the passwords have been enabled in the
PASS
menu item, the system will prompt the user for a password anytime a password protected function (e.g., SETUP) is selected. This allows normal operation of the instrument, but requires the password (101) to access to the menus under SETUP. When PASSWORD is disabled (SETUP>OFF), any operator can enter the Primary Setup (SETUP) and Secondary Setup (SETUP>MORE) menus. Whether PASSWORD is enabled or disabled, a password (default 818) is required to enter the VARS or DIAG menus in the SETUP>MORE menu.
Table 5-2: Password Levels PASSWORD
Null (000)
101 818
LEVEL MENU ACCESS ALLOWED
Operation All functions of the main menu (top level, or Primary, menu) Configuration/Maintenance Access to Primary and Secondary SETUP Menus when PASSWORD is enabled Configuration/Maintenance Access to Secondary SETUP Submenus
VARS
and
DIAG
whether PASSWORD is enabled or disabled. To enable or disable passwords, press:
SAMPLE RANGE=50.0 PPM CO= XX.XX
SETUP X.X
PRIMARY SETUP MENU
CFG DAS RNGE
PASS
CLK MORE EXIT Toggle this button to enable, disable password feasture.
SYSTEM
PASSWORD ENABLE: OFF OFF
ENTR EXIT SETUP X.X
PASSWORD ENABLE: ON ON ENTR EXIT
EXIT
discards the new setting.
ENTR
accepts the new setting.
If the password feature is enabled, then when entering either Calibration or Setup Mode, the default password displayed will be 000, and the new password must be input. Example: If all passwords are enabled, the following control button sequence would be required to enter the
SETUP
menu: 06864D DCN7562 99
Setup Menu Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer
SAMPLE RANGE=50.0 PPM CO= XX.XX
SETUP X.X
PRIMARY SETUP MENU
CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK
MORE
EXIT SETUP X.X
SECONDARY SETUP MENU
COMM
VARS DIAG
EXIT
Press individual buttons to set number.
SYSTEM ENTER SETUP PASS:0 0 0 0 ENTR EXIT
Note
EXAMPLE: This password enables the
SETUP
mode.
SYSTEM ENTER SETUP PASS:0 1 0 1 ENTR
EXIT Analyzer enters selected menu
The instrument still prompts for a password when entering the VARS and DIAG menus, even if passwords are disabled. It will display the default password (818) upon entering these menus. The user only has to press ENTR to access the password-protected menus but does not have to enter the required number code.
100 06864D DCN7562
Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Setup Menu
5.6.
SETUP
à
CLK: SETTING THE INTERNAL TIME-OF-DAY CLOCK AND ADJUSTING SPEED
5.6.1.1.
SETTING THE INTERNAL CLOCK’S TIME AND DAY
The T300/T300M has a time of day clock that supports the
DURATION
step of the automatic calibration (
ACAL
) sequence feature, time of day TEST function, and time stamps on for the DAS feature and most COMM port messages. To set the clock’s time and day, press:
SAMPLE RANGE=50.0 PPM CO= XX.XX
SETUP X.X
PRIMARY SETUP MENU
CFG DAS RNGE
PASS CLK
MORE EXIT
SETUP X.X TIME-OF-DAY CLOCK TIME DATE
EXIT
SETUP X.X TIME: 12:00 1 2 :0 0
HOUR MINUTE
ENTR
EXIT Toggle these keys to enter current hour.
SETUP X.X TIME: 22:30 2 2 :3 0 ENTR
EXIT
SETUP X.X DATE: 01-JAN-05 0 1 JAN 0 5
DAY MONTH YEAR
ENTR
EXIT Toggle these buttons to enter current day, month and year.
SETUP X.X DATE: 18-JUN-05 1 8 JUN 0 5 ENTR
EXIT
SETUP X.X TIME-OF-DAY CLOCK TIME DATE EXIT EXIT
returns to
SETUP X.X
display.
5.6.1.2.
ADJUSTING THE INTERNAL CLOCK’S SPEED
In order to compensate for CPU clocks which run faster or slower, you can adjust a variable called
CLOCK_ADJ
to speed up or slow down the clock by a fixed amount every day. The
CLOCK_AD
variable is accessed via the
VARS
submenu: To change the value of this variable, press: 06864D DCN7562 101
Setup Menu Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer SAMPLE RANGE=50.0 PPM CO= XX.XX
SETUP X.X 4) CLOCK_ADJUST=0 Sec/Day PREV NEXT EDIT ENTR EXIT SETUP X.X 4) CLOCK_ADJUST=0 Sec/Day + 0 0 EDIT ENTR EXIT Enter sign and number of seconds per day the clock gains (-) or loses(+) SETUP X.X 4) CLOCK_ADJUST=0 Sec/Day PREV NEXT JUMP EDIT ENTR EXIT EXIT discards the new setting.
ENTR accepts the new setting.
102 06864D DCN7562
Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Setup Menu
5.7.
SETUP
à
COMM: COMMUNICATIONS PORTS
This section introduces the communications setup menu; Section 6 provides the setup
instructions and operation information. Press SETUP>ENTR>MORE>COMM to arrive at the communications menu. 5.7.1.
ID (MACHINE IDENTIFICATION)
Press ID to display and/or change the Machine ID, which must be changed to a unique identifier (number) when more than one instrument of the same model is used: • • • •
in an RS-232 multidrop configuration (Sections 3.3.1.8 and 6.7.2)
on the same Ethernet LAN (Section 6.5)
when applying MODBUS protocol (Section 6.7.1)
when applying Hessen protocol (Section 6.7.2)
The default ID is the same as the model number; for the Model T100, the ID is 0100.
Press any button(s) in the MACHINE ID menu (Figure 5-2) until the Machine ID
Parameter field displays the desired identifier. SETUP X.X
COMMUNICATIONS MENU ID
INET COM1 COM2 EXIT Toggle to cycle through the available character set:
0-9
SETUP X.
MACHINE ID: 300 ID 0 3 0 0 ENTR EXIT
ENTR accepts the new settings EXIT ignores the new settings
Figure 5-2: COMM– Machine ID
The ID can be any 4-digit number and can also be used to identify analyzers in any number of ways (e.g. location numbers, company asset number, etc.) 5.7.2.
INET (ETHERNET)
Use SETUP>COMM>INET to configure Ethernet communications, whether manually
or via DHCP. Please see Section 6.5 for configuration details.
5.7.3.
COM1 AND COM2 (MODE, BAUD RATE AND TEST PORT)
Use the SETUP>COMM>COM1[COM2] menus to: • •
configure communication modes (Section 6.2.1
view/set the baud rate (Section 6.2.2)
•
test the connections of the com ports (Section 6.2.3).
Configuring COM1 or COM2 requires setting the DCE DTE switch on the rear panel.
Section 6.1 provides DCE DTE information.
06864D DCN7562 103
Setup Menu Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer
5.8.
SETUP
à
VARS: VARIABLES SETUP AND DEFINITION
The T300/T300M has several user-adjustable software variables, which define certain operational parameters. Usually, these variables are automatically set by the instrument’s firmware, but can be manually redefined using the
VARS
menu. The following table lists all variables that are available within the 818 password protected level. See Appendix A-2 for a detailed listing of all of the T300/T300M variables that are accessible through the remote interface.
Table 5-3: Variable Names (VARS) NO. VARIABLE DESCRIPTION ALLOWED VALUES VARS DEFAULT VALUES 0 1 2 3 4 DAS_HOLD_OFF CONC
_
PRECISION DYN_ZERO 1 DYN_SPAN 1 CLOCK_ADJ
Changes the Internal Data Acquisition System (DAS)
HOLDOFF
No data is stored in the DAS channels during situations when the software considers the data to be questionable such as during warm up of just after the instrument returns from one of its calibration mode to
SAMPLE
Mode. Allows the user to set the number of significant digits to the right of the decimal point display of concentration and stability values. May be set for intervals between 0.5 – 20 min AUTO, 1, 2, 3, 4 Dynamic zero automatically adjusts offset and slope of the CO response when performing a zero point calibration during
Dynamic span automatically adjusts the offsets and slopes of the CO response when performing a slope calibration during
Adjusts the speed of the analyzer’s clock. Choose the + sign if the clock is too slow, choose the - sign if the clock is too fast. ON/OFF ON/OFF -60 to +60 s/day
5 STABIL_GAS 2
Selects which gas measurement is displayed when the STABIL test function is selected. CO; CO 2 & O 2 1 Use of the DYN_ZERO and DYN_SPAN features are not allowed for applications requiring EPA equivalency. 2 This VARS only appears if either the optional O 2 or CO 2 sensors are installed.
15 min. AUTO OFF OFF 0 sec CO
104 06864D DCN7562
Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer To access and navigate the
VARS
menu, use the following button sequence. Setup Menu
SAMPLE RANGE=500.0 PPM CO= XXXX
SETUP X.X
PRIMARY SETUP MENU
CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK
MORE
EXIT Concentration display through all gasses.
SETUP X.X
SECONDARY SETUP MENU
COMM
VARS
DIAG EXIT SETUP X.X
ENTER PASSWORD:818 8 1 8 ENTR
EXIT In all cases:
EXIT
discards the new setting.
ENTR
accepts the new setting.
Toggle these buttons to enter the correct
PASSWORD.
SETUP X.X
0) DAS_HOLD_OFF=15.0 Minutes
PREV
NEXT
JUMP
EDIT
PRNT EXIT SETUP X.X
1) CONC_PRECISION=AUTO
PREV
NEXT
JUMP
EDIT
PRNT EXIT SETUP X.X
2) DYN_ZERO=OFF
PREV
NEXT
JUMP
EDIT
PRNT EXIT SETUP X.X
3) DYN_SPAN=OFF
PREV
NEXT
JUMP
EDIT
PRNT EXIT
SETUP X.X 4) CLOCK_ADJUST=0 Sec/Day
PREV
NEXT
JUMP EDIT ENTR EXIT SETUP X.X
5) STABIL_GAS=CO
PREV
NEXT
JUMP
EDIT
PRNT EXIT Press
NEXT
for additional VARS; press
NEXT
or
PREV
to move back and forth throughout the list of VARS.
SETUP X.X
DAS_HOLD_OFF=15.0 Minutes 1 5 .0
ENTR EXIT
Toggle these buttons to set the iDAS HOLDOFF time period in minutes (MAX = 20 minutes).
SETUP X.X
CONC_PRECISION=AUTO AUTO 1 2 3 4 ENTR EXIT
Use these buttons to select the precision of the o33 concentration display.
SETUP X.X
DYN_ZERO=OFF OFF ENTR EXIT
Toggle this button to turn the Dynamic Zero calibration feature
ON/ OFF.
SETUP X.X
DYN_SPAN=OFF OFF ENTR EXIT
Toggle this button to turn the Dynamic Span calibration feature
ON/ OFF.
SETUP X.X CLOCK_ADJUST=0 Sec/Day + 0 0
ENTR EXIT SETUP X.X
STABIL_GAS=O2 CO CO2 O2 ENTR EXIT
Enter sign and number of seconds per day the clock gains (-) or loses(+).
Use these buttons to select which gas will be reported by the sTABIL test function.
(O 2 is only available if the optional O 2 sensor is installed) 06864D DCN7562 105
Setup Menu Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer
5.9.
SETUP
à
DIAG: DIAGNOSTICS FUNCTIONS
A series of diagnostic tools is grouped together under the
SETUP
à
MORE
à
DIAG
menu, as these parameters are dependent on firmware revision (see Appendix A). These tools can be used in a variety of troubleshooting and diagnostic procedures and are referred to in many places of the maintenance and trouble-shooting sections of this manual. The various operating modes available under the
DIAG
menu are:
Table 5-4: Diagnostic Mode (DIAG) Functions DIAG SUBMENU SIGNAL I/O SUBMENU FUNCTION
Allows observation of all digital and analog signals in the instrument. Allows certain digital signals such as valves and heaters to be toggled
ON
and
OFF
.
Front Panel Mode Indicator DIAG SIGNAL I/O MANUAL SECTION
ANALOG OUTPUT
When entered, the analyzer performs an analog output step test. This can be used to calibrate a chart recorder or to test the analog output accuracy.
DIAG ANALOG OUTPUT
ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION
This submenu allows the user to configure the analyzer’s analog output channels, including choosing what parameter will be output on each channel. Instructions that appear here allow adjustment and calibration of the voltage signals associated with each output as well as calibration of the analog to digital converter circuitry on the motherboard.
ELECTRICAL TEST
When activated, the analyzer performs an electrical test, which generates a voltage intended to simulate the measure and reference outputs of the SYNC/DEMOD board to verify the signal handling and conditioning of these signals.
DIAG ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATI ON DIAG ELECTRICAL TEST
DARK CALIBRATION PRESSURE CALIBRATION 1 1 FLOW CALIBRATION 1
Disconnects the preamp from synchronous demodulation circuitry on the SYNC/DEMOD PCA to establish the dark offset values for the measure and reference channel.
DIAG DARK CALIBRATION
Allows the user to calibrate the sample pressure sensor. This function is used to calibrate the gas flow output signals of sample gas and ozone supply.
TEST CHAN OUTPUT
Selects one of the available test channel signals to output over the
A4
analog output channel. 1 These settings are retained after exiting DIAG mode.
DIAG PRESSURE CALIBRATION DIAG FLOW CALIBRATION DIAG TEST CHAN OUTPUT
106 06864D DCN7562
Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Setup Menu To access the
DIAG
functions press the following buttons: SAMPLE RANGE=50.0 PPM CO= XXXX
ENTR Activates the selected DIAG submenu.
DIAG DARK CALIBRATION PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT DIAG PRESSURE CALIBRATION PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT DIAG FLOW CALIBRATION PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT DIAG TEST CHANNEL OUTPUT PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT Last three menu items require higher level security password.
DIAG HALT FIRMWARE PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT DIAG MEMORY CONFIGURATION PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT DIAG FACTORY OPTIONS PREV ENTR EXIT 06864D DCN7562 107
Setup Menu Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer 5.9.1.
SIGNAL I/O
The signal I/O diagnostic mode allows a user to review and change the digital and analog input/output functions of the analyzer. Refer to Appendix A-4 for a full list of the parameters available for review under this menu.
I MPORTANT
I
MPACT ON
R
EADINGS OR
D
ATA
Any changes of signal I/O settings will remain in effect only until the signal I/O menu is exited. Exceptions are the ozone generator override and the flow sensor calibration, which remain as entered when exiting.
Access the SIGNAL I/O test mode from the DIAG Menu:
SAMPLE RANGE=50.0 PPM CO= XXXX
SETUP X.X
PRIMARY SETUP MENU
CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK
MORE
EXIT SETUP X.X COMM
SECONDARY SETUP MENU
VARS
DIAG
EXIT SETUP X.X
ENTER PASSWORD:818 8 1 8 ENTR
EXIT
DIAG SIGNAL I/O
NEXT
ENTR
EXIT
DIAG I/O 0) EXT_ZERO_CAL=OFF
PREV
NEXT
EDIT PRNT EXIT
DIAG I/O 1)EXT_SPAN_CAL=OFF PREV NEXT JUMP
EDIT PRNT EXIT
DIAG I/O JUMPTO: 0 0 0 JUMP ENTR
EXIT Press
PREV
and
NEXT
to cycle through the signal types.
Press
JUMP
signal to go directly to a specific (see Appendix A for a list of all
I/O SIGNALS
) Toggle to set location No. of the signal to
JUMP
to.
EXAMPLE
DIAG I/O JUMPTO: 22 2 2 JUMP ENTR
EXIT
DIAG I/O 22) RELAY_WATCHDOG=ON
PREV NEXT JUMP
OFF PRNT EXIT
On status signals this button toggles the signal
ON / OFF.
Pressing
PRNT
will send a formatted printout to the serial port and can be captured with a computer or other output device.
108 06864D DCN7562
Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Setup Menu 5.9.2.
ANALOG OUTPUT
Analog Output is used as a step test to check the accuracy and proper operation of the analog outputs. The test forces all four analog output channels to produce signals ranging from 0% to 100% of the full scale range in 20% increments. This test is useful to verify the operation of the data logging/recording devices attached to the analyzer.
Access the Analog Output Step Test from the DIAG Menu as follows: SAMPLE RANGE=50.0 PPM CO= XXXX
DIAG AOUT ANALOG OUTPUT [20%] ENTR EXIT EXIT EXIT 06864D DCN7562 109
Setup Menu Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer 5.9.3.
ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION
The T300/T300M Analyzer comes equipped with four analog outputs. • The first two outputs (
A1 & A2)
carry analog signals that represent the currently
measured concentration of CO (see Section 5.4.1).
• The third output (
A3
) is only active if the analyzer is equipped with one of the optional 2 nd gas sensors (e.g. O 2 or CO 2 ). • The fourth output (
A4
) outputs a signal that can be set to represent the current value
of one of several test functions (see Table 5-9).
Table 5-5:
Table 5-5 lists the analog I/O functions that are available in the T300/T300M Analyzer.
DIAG - Analog I/O Functions SUB MENU OUTPUT CHANNEL FUNCTION AOUT CALIBRATED CONC_OUT_1 CONC_OUT_2 CONC_OUT_3 ALL A1 A2 A3
Initiates a calibration of the
A1
,
A2
,
A3
and
A4
analog output channels that determines the slope and offset inherent in the circuitry of each output. These values are stored and applied to the output signals by the CPU automatically. Sets the basic electronic configuration of the
A1
output (CO Concentration). There are four options: •
RANGE 1
: Selects the signal type (voltage or current loop) and level of the output. •
REC OFS 1
: Allows them input of a DC offset to let the user manually adjust the output level. •
AUTO CAL
: Enables / Disables the
AOUT CALIBRATED
feature. •
CALIBRATED
: Performs the same calibration as
AOUT CALIBRATED
, but on this one channel only. • Same as for CONC_OUT_1 but for analog channel
A2
. • Same as for CONC_OUT_1 but for analog channel
A3
but only if either the optional O 2 or CO 2 sensors are installed. • Same as for CONC_OUT_1 but for analog channel
A4
(TEST CHANNEL).
TEST OUTPUT A4 AIN CALIBRATED XIN1 . . . XIN8 N/A
Initiates a calibration of the A-to-D Converter circuit located on the Motherboard. For each of 8 external analog input channels, shows the gain, offset, engineering units, and whether the channel is to show up as a Test function. 1 Any changes made to
RANGE
or
REC_OFS
require recalibration of this output. 110 06864D DCN7562
Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer To access the
ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION
submenu, press: SAMPLE RANGE=50.0 PPM CO= XX.XX
DIAG SIGNAL I/O NEXT ENTR EXIT Continue pressing NEXT until ...
AIO Configuration Submenu DIAG ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT DIAG AIO A OUTS CALIBRATED: NO
Adjusts the signal output for Analog Output A2.
Setup Menu SET> scrolls to XIN2 through XIN8
Figure 5-3: Accessing the Analog I/O Configuration Submenus
06864D DCN7562 111
Setup Menu Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer 5.9.3.1.
ANALOG OUTPUT VOLTAGE / CURRENT RANGE SELECTION
In its standard configuration, each of the analog outputs is set to output a 0–5 VDC signals. Several other output ranges are available. Each range has is usable from -5% to + 5% of the rated span.
Table 5-6: Analog Output Voltage Ranges RANGE NAME RANGE SPAN MINIMUM OUTPUT MAXIMUM OUTPUT 0.1V 1V
0-100 mVDC 0-1 VDC -5 mVDC -0.05 VDC 105 mVDC 1.05 VDC
5V
0-5 VDC -0.25 VDC 5.25 VDC
10V
0-10 VDC • The default offset for all VDC ranges is 0-5 VDC. -0.5 VDC 10.5 VDC
CURR
0-20 mA 0 mA 20 mA • While these are the physical limits of the current loop modules, typical applications use 2-20 or 4-20 mA for the lower and upper limits. Please specify desired range when ordering this option. • The default offset for all current ranges is 0 mA.
• Current outputs are available only on A1-A3.
112 06864D DCN7562
Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Setup Menu To change the output type and range, select the
ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION
submenu from the
DIAG
Menu (see Figure 5-3) then press:
From the
AIO CONFIGURATION SUBMENU
DIAG
ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION
PREV NEXT
ENTR
EXIT
DIAG AIO AOUTS CALIBRATED: NO SET>
CAL EXIT Continue pressing
SET>
until you reach the output to be configured
DIAG AIO CONC_OUT_2: 5V, OVR, NOCAL
EDIT
EXIT
DIAG AIO CONC_OUT_2 RANGE: 5V
EDIT
EXIT These buttons set the signal level and type of the selected channel.
DIAG AIO CONC_OUT_2: RANGE: 5V 0.1V 1V 5V 10V CURR ENTR EXIT
Pressing
ENTR
records the new setting and returns to the previous menu.
Pressing
EXIT
ignores the new setting and returns to the previous menu.
06864D DCN7562 113
Setup Menu Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer 5.9.3.2.
ANALOG OUTPUT CALIBRATION
Analog output calibration should to be carried out on first startup of the analyzer (performed in the factory as part of the configuration process) or whenever recalibration is required. The analog outputs can be calibrated automatically, either as a group or individually, or adjusted manually. In its default mode, the instrument is configured for automatic calibration of all channels, which is useful for clearing any analog calibration warnings associated with channels that will not be used or connected to any input or recording device, e.g., datalogger. Manual calibration should be used for the 0.1V range or in cases where the outputs must be closely matched to the characteristics of the recording device. Manual calibration requires the AUTOCAL feature to be disabled. Automatic calibration can be performed via the
CAL
button located inside The
AOUTS CALIBRATION
submenu. By default, the analyzer is configured so that calibration of analog outputs can be initiated as a group with the
AOUT CALIBRATION
command. The outputs can also be calibrated individually, but this requires the AUTOCAL feature be disabled. 5.9.3.3.
ENABLING OR DISABLING THE AUTOCAL FOR AN INDIVIDUAL ANALOG OUTPUT
To enable or disable the
AutoCal
feature for an individual analog output, elect the
ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION
submenu (see Figure 5-3) then press:
114 06864D DCN7562
Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer
NOTE: ANALOG OUTPUTS
configured for 0.1V full scale should always be calibrated manually.
From the
AIO CONFIGURATION SUBMENU
DIAG
ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION
PREV NEXT
ENTR
EXIT
DIAG AIO AOUTS CALIBRATED: NO SET>
CAL EXIT Continue pressing
SET>
until you reach the output to be configured
DIAG AIO CONC_OUT_2: 5V, OVR, NOCAL
EDIT
EXIT
DIAG AIO CONC_OUT_2: RANGE: 5V SET>
EDIT EXIT Continue pressing
SET>
until ...
Setup Menu Toggle this button to turn
AUTO CAL ON
or
OFF
(OFF = manual calibration mode).
DIAG AIO CONC_OUT_2: AUTO CAL.:ON
EDIT
EXIT
DIAG AIO CONC_OUT_2: AUTO CAL.:ON ON
ENTR EXIT
ENTR
accepts the new setting.
EXIT
ignores the new setting.
DIAG AIO CONC_OUT_2: AUTO CAL.:OFF OFF ENTR EXIT
06864D DCN7562 115
Setup Menu Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer 5.9.3.4.
AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION OF THE ANALOG OUTPUTS
To calibrate the outputs as a group with the
AOUTS CALIBRATION
command, select the
ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION
submenu (see Figure 5-3) then press:
I MPORTANT
I
MPACT ON
R
EADINGS OR
D
ATA
Before performing this procedure, make sure that the AUTO CAL for each analog output is enabled. (See Section 5.9.3.3).
CONC_OUT_3 is only active on analyzers with the optional O 2 sensor installed.
Analyzer automatically calibrates all channels for which AUTO-CAL is turned ON.
From the AIO CONFIGURATION SUBMENU DIAG ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT DIAG AIO AOUTS CALIBRATED: NO SET> CAL EXIT DIAG AIO DIAG AIO AUTO CALIBRATING CONC_OUT_1 NOT AUTO CAL. CONC_OUT_2 DIAG AIO DIAG AIO AUTO CALIBRATING CONC_OUT_3 AUTO CALIBRATING TEST_OUTPUT This message appears when AUTO-CAL is Turned OFF for a channel.
If any of the channels have not been calibrated or if at least one channel has AUTO-CAL turned OFF, this message will read NO.
I MPORTANT
DIAG AIO AOUTS CALIBRATED: NO SET> CAL EXIT
I
MPACT ON
R
EADINGS OR
D
ATA
Manual calibration should be used for any analog output set for a 0.1V output range or in cases where the outputs must be closely matched to the characteristics of the recording device.
116 06864D DCN7562
Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Setup Menu 5.9.3.5.
INDIVIDUAL CALIBRATION OF THE ANALOG OUTPUTS
To use the
AUTO CAL
feature to initiate an automatic calibration for an individual analog output, select the
ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION
then press: From the
AIO CONFIGURATION SUBMENU
DIAG
ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION
PREV NEXT
ENTR
EXIT
DIAG AIO AOUTS CALIBRATED: NO SET>
CAL EXIT Continue pressing
SET>
until you reach the output to be configured
DIAG AIO CONC_OUT_2: 5V, CONC2, NOCAL
EDIT
EXIT
DIAG AIO CONC_OUT_2: RANGE: 5V SET>
EDIT EXIT Continue pressing
SET>
until ...
DIAG AIO CONC_OUT_2: CALIBRATED:NO
CAL
EXIT
DIAG AIO AUTO CALIBRATING CONC_OUT_2 DIAG AIO CONC_OUT_2: CALIBRATED: YES
EXIT
06864D DCN7562 117
Setup Menu Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer 5.9.3.6.
MANUAL CALIBRATION OF THE ANALOG OUTPUTS CONFIGURED FOR VOLTAGE RANGES
For highest accuracy, the voltages of the analog outputs can be manually calibrated.
Note The menu for manually adjusting the analog output signal level will only appear if the AUTO-CAL feature is turned off for the channel being adjusted (see Section 5.9.3.3).
Calibration is performed with a voltmeter connected across the output terminals and by changing the actual output signal level using the front panel buttons in 100, 10 or 1
count increments. See Figure 3-9 for pin assignments and diagram of the analog output
connector.
+DC Gnd V Volt Meter
V OUT + V IN + V OUT V IN -
ANALYZER Recording Device
Setup for Checking / Calibrating DCV Analog Output Signal Levels Figure 5-4: Table 5-7: Voltage Tolerances for the TEST CHANNEL Calibration FULL SCALE
0.1 VDC 1 VDC 5 VDC 10 VDC
ZERO TOLERANCE
±0.0005V ±0.001V ±0.002V ±0.004V
SPAN VOLTAGE
90 mV 900 mV 4500 mV 4500 mV
SPAN TOLERANCE
±0.001V ±0.001V ±0.003V ±0.006V
MINIMUM ADJUSTMENT
(1 count) 0.02 mV 0.24 mV 1.22 mV 2.44 mV 118 06864D DCN7562
Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Setup Menu To adjust the signal levels of an analog output channel manually, select the
ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION
submenu (see Figure 5-3) then press:
From the
AIO CONFIGURATION SUBMENU
DIAG
ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION
PREV NEXT
ENTR
EXIT
DIAG AIO AOUTS CALIBRATED: NO SET>
CAL EXIT DISPLAYED AS
CONC_OUT_1 CONC_OUT_2 CONC_OUT_3 TEST OUTPUT
= CHANNEL
= A1 = = = A2 A3 A4
Continue pressing
SET>
until you reach the output to be configured
DIAG AIO CONC_OUT_2: 5V, CONC2, NOCAL
EDIT
EXIT
DIAG AIO CONC_OUT_2: RANGE: 5V SET>
EDIT EXIT
CONC_OUT_3
is only active on analyzers with the optional CO 2 or O 2 sensor installed.
Continue pressing
SET>
until ...
DIAG AIO CONC_OUT_2: CALIBRATED:NO
CAL
EXIT
DIAG AIO CONC_OUT_2: VOLT-Z: 0 mV U100 UP10 UP DOWN DN10 D100 ENTR
EXIT These buttons increase / decrease the analog output signal level (not the value on the display) by 100, 10 or 1 counts. Continue adjustments until the voltage measured at the output of the analyzer and/or the input of the recording device matches the value in the upper right hand corner of the display (within the tolerances listed in Table 8.7.)
DIAG AIO CONC_OUT_2: VOLT-S: 4500 mV U100 UP10 UP DOWN DN10 D100 ENTR EXIT DIAG AIO CONC_OUT_2: CALIBRATED: YES
EXIT
These menus only appear if
AUTO-CAL
is turned
OFF.
06864D DCN7562 119
Setup Menu Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer 5.9.3.7.
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT OF CURRENT LOOP OUTPUT SPAN AND OFFSET
A current loop option may be purchased for the
A1
,
A2
and
A3
analog outputs of the analyzer. This option places circuitry in series with the output of the D-to-A converter on the motherboard that changes the normal DC voltage output to a 0-20 milliamp signal
• The outputs can be ordered scaled to any set of limits within that 0-20 mA range, however most current loop applications call for either 0-20 mA or 4-20 mA range spans. • All current loop outputs have a +5% over range. Ranges whose lower limit is set above 1 mA also have a –5% under range. To switch an analog output from voltage to current loop, follow the instructions in
CURR
from the list of options on the “Output Range” menu). Adjusting the signal zero and span levels of the current loop output is done by raising or lowering the voltage output of the D-to-A converter circuitry on the analyzer’s motherboard. This raises or lowers the signal level produced by the current loop option circuitry. The software allows this adjustment to be made in 100, 10 or 1 count increments. Since the exact amount by which the current signal is changed per D-to-A count varies from output-to-output and instrument-to-instrument, you will need to measure the change in the signal levels with a separate, current meter placed in series with the output circuit.
See Figure 3-9 for pin assignments and diagram of the analog output connector.
mADC IN OUT
Ammeter I OUT + I IN +
Figure 5-5:
I
OUT -
I
IN -
ANALYZER Recording Device
Setup for Checking / Calibration Current Output Signal Levels Using an Ammeter CAUTION G ENERAL S AFETY H AZARD Do not exceed 60 V peak voltage between current loop outputs and instrument ground.
120 06864D DCN7562
Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Setup Menu To adjust the zero and span signal levels of the current outputs, select the
ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION
submenu (see Figure 5-3) then press:
From the
AIO CONFIGURATION SUBMENU
DIAG
ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION
PREV NEXT
ENTR
EXIT
DIAG AIO AOUTS CALIBRATED: NO SET>
CAL EXIT DISPLAYED AS
CONC_OUT_1 CONC_OUT_2 CONC_OUT_3 TEST OUTPUT
= CHANNEL
= = A1 A2 = = A3 A4
Continue pressing
SET>
until you reach the output to be configured
DIAG AIO CONC_OUT_2: 5V, CONC2, NOCAL
EDIT
EXIT
CONC_OUT_3
is only active on analyzers with the optional CO 2 or O 2 sensor installed.
DIAG AIO CONC_OUT_2: RANGE: CURR SET>
EDIT EXIT Continue pressing
SET>
until ...
Analyzer automatically calibrates the DCV signal output from the analog output channel to the VDC-to-mA converter.
DIAG AIO CONC_OUT_2: CALIBRATED:NO
CAL
EXIT
DIAG AIO AUTO CALIBRATING CONC_OUT_2 DIAG AIO CONC_OUT_2: CURR-Z: 0 mV U100 UP10 UP DOWN DN10 D100 ENTR
EXIT These buttons increase / decrease the analog output signal level (not the value on the display) by 100, 10 or 1 counts. Continue adjustments until the current signal measured at the output of the analyzer matches the zero and span points of the intended current range (e.g. 0 mA–20 mA; 4 mA–20 mA).
DIAG AIO CONC_OUT_2: CURR-S: 5000 mV U100 UP10 UP DOWN DN10 D100 ENTR EXIT DIAG AIO CONC_OUT_2: CALIBRATED: YES
EXIT
These menus adjust the mAmp signal output.
06864D DCN7562 121
Setup Menu Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer An alternative method for measuring the output of the Current Loop converter is to connect a 250 ohm ± 1% resistor across the current loop output in lieu of the current
meter (see Figure 3-9 for pin assignments and diagram of the analog output connector).
This allows the use of a voltmeter connected across the resistor to measure converter output as VDC or mVDC.
+DC Gnd V Volt Meter Figure 5-6:
V OUT + V IN +
250 Ω
V OUT V IN -
ANALYZER Recording Device
Alternative Setup Using 250Ω Resistor for Checking Current Output Signal Levels
In this case, follow the procedure above but adjust the output for the following values:
Table 5-8:
% FS
0 100
Current Loop Output Check
Voltage across Resistor for 2-20 mA
500 mVDC 5000 mVDC
Voltage across Resistor for 4-20 mA
1000 mVDC 5000 mVDC 122 06864D DCN7562
Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Setup Menu 5.9.3.8.
TURNING AN ANALOG OUTPUT OVER-RANGE FEATURE ON/OFF
In its default configuration, a ± 5% over-range is available on each of the T300/T300M Analyzer’s analog outputs. This over-range can be disabled if your recording device is sensitive to excess voltage or current. To turn the over-range feature on or off, select the
ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION
submenu (see Figure 5-3) then press:
From the
AIO CONFIGURATION SUBMENU
DIAG
ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION
PREV NEXT
ENTR
EXIT
DIAG AIO AOUTS CALIBRATED: NO SET>
CAL EXIT Toggle this button to turn the Over Range feature
ON/OFF
Continue pressing
SET>
until you reach the output to be configured
DIAG AIO CONC_OUT_2: 5V, OVR, NOCAL
EDIT
EXIT
DIAG AIO CONC_OUT_2: RANGE: 5V SET>
EDIT EXIT
DIAG AIO CONC_OUT_2: OVERRANGE: ON
EDIT
EXIT
DIAG AIO CONC_OUT_2: OVERRANGE: ON ON
ENTR EXIT
DIAG AIO CONC_OUT_2: OVERRANGE: OFF OFF ENTR
EXIT 06864D DCN7562 123
Setup Menu Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer 5.9.3.9.
ADDING A RECORDER OFFSET TO AN ANALOG OUTPUT
Some analog signal recorders require that the zero signal is significantly different from the baseline of the recorder in order to record slightly negative readings from noise around the zero point. This can be achieved in the T300/T300M by defining a zero offset, a small voltage (e.g., 10% of span). To add a zero offset to a specific analog output channel, select the
ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION
submenu (see Figure 5-3) then press:
From the
AIO CONFIGURATION SUBMENU
DIAG
ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION
PREV NEXT
ENTR
EXIT
DIAG AIO AOUTS CALIBRATED: NO SET>
CAL EXIT Continue pressing
SET>
until you reach the output to be configured
DIAG AIO CONC_OUT_2: 5V, OVR, NOCAL
EDIT
EXIT
DIAG AIO CONC_OUT_2: OUTPUT: 5V SET>
EDIT EXIT 124 Toggle these buttons to set ther value of the desired offset.
Continue pressing
SET>
until ...
DIAG AIO CONC_OUT_2: REC OFS: 0 mV
EDIT
EXIT
DIAG AIO CONC_OUT_2: REC OFS: 0 mV +
0 0
0
0 ENTR EXIT
DIAG AIO CONC_OUT_2: REC OFS: -10 mV –
0 EXAMPLE 0
1
0
ENTR
EXIT
DIAG AIO CONC_OUT_2: REC OFS: -10 mV
EXIT
06864D DCN7562
Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Setup Menu 5.9.3.10.
AIN CALIBRATION
This is the submenu to conduct a calibration of the T300/T300M Analyzer’s analog inputs. This calibration should only be necessary after major repair such as a replacement of CPU, motherboard or power supplies. To perform an analog input calibration, select the
ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION
submenu (see Figure 5-3) then press:
From the AIO CONFIGURATION SUBMENU DIAG ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT DIAG AIO AOUTS CALIBRATED: NO 06864D DCN7562 EXIT DIAG AIO AIN CALIBRATED: YES EXIT 125 Setup Menu Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer 5.9.3.11. To configure the analyzer’s external analog inputs option, define for each channel : • • • gain (number of units represented by 1 volt) offset (volts) engineering units to be represented in volts (each press of the touchscreen button scrolls the list of alphanumeric characters from A-Z and 0-9) • whether to display the channel in the Test functions To access and adjust settings for the external Analog Inputs option channels press: DIAG PREV ANALOG I / O CONFIGURATION NEXT ENTR EXIT DIAG AIO AOUTS CALIBRATED: NO < SET SET> CAL EXIT Press SET> to scroll to the first channel. Continue pressing SET> to view each of 8 channels. DIAG AIO XIN1:1.00,0.00,V,OFF < SET SET> EDIT EXIT Press EDIT at any channel to to change Gain, Offset, Units and whether to display the channel in the Test functions (OFF/ON). DIAG AIO XIN1 GAIN:1.00V/V SET> EDIT EXIT DIAG AIO XIN1 OFFSET:0.00V < SET SET> EDIT EXIT DIAG AIO XIN1 GAIN:1.00V/V + 0 0 1 .0 0 ENTR EXIT DIAG AIO XIN1 UNITS:V < SET SET> EDIT DIAG AIO XIN1 DISPLAY:OFF < SET EDIT EXIT EXIT Figure 5-7. DIAG – Analog Inputs (Option) Configuration Menu Press to change Gain value Pressing ENTR records the new setting and returns to the previous menu. Pressing EXIT ignores the new setting and returns to the previous menu. 126 06864D DCN7562 Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Setup Menu 5.9.4. The electrical test function substitutes simulated signals for the the IR photo detector’s CO MEAS and CO REF signals, generated by circuitry on the sync/demod board. This function tests the filtering and amplification functions of that assembly along with the A/D converter on the motherboard. It should be noted that this will not test the IR photo detector itself. While in this mode the user can also view the same test functions viewable from the main SAMPLE display. When the test is running, the concentration reported on the front panel display should be at or near 40.0 ppm. SAMPLE RANGE=50.0 PPM CO= XX.XX SETUP X.X PRIMARY SETUP MENU CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT SETUP X.X SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMM VARS DIAG EXIT 8 SETUP X.X ENTER PASSWORD 1 8 ENTR EXIT DIAG SIGNAL I/O PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT Continue pressing NEXT until ... Press to view Test Functions. NOTE: CO MEAS and CO REF will be artificially altered to enforce a CO reading of operational value. 40.0 ppm. All other Test Functions will report the correct DIAG OPTIC ELECTRICAL TEST PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT DIAG ELEC RANGE=50.0 PPM CO= 40 CAL EXIT 5.9.5. The dark calibration test interrupts the signal path between the IR photo-detector and the remainder of the sync/demod board circuitry. This allows the instrument to compensate for any voltage levels inherent in the sync/demod circuitry that might affect the calculation of CO concentration. For details see Section 9.6.1. 5.9.6. A sensor at the exit of the sample chamber continuously measures the pressure of the sample gas. The data are used to compensate the final CO concentration calculation for changes in atmospheric pressure and are stored in the CPU’s memory as the test function PRES (also viewable via the front panel). For details see Section 9.6.2. 06864D DCN7562 127 Setup Menu Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer 5.9.7. The flow calibration allows the user to adjust the values of the sample flow rates as they are displayed on the front panel and reported through COMM ports to match the actual flow rate measured at the sample inlet. This does not change the hardware measurement of the flow sensors, only the software-calculated values. For details see Section 9.6.3. 5.9.8. When activated, output channel A4 can be used in the standard configuration to report one of the test functions viewable from the SAMPLE mode display. (See also Section 5.9.8.1. The test functions available to be reported are listed in Table 5-9: Table 5-9: Test Channels Functions available on the T300/T300M’s Analog Output TEST CHANNEL DESCRIPTION NONE CO MEASURE CO REFERENCE SAMPLE PRESS URE SAMPLE FLOW SAMPLE TEMP BENCH TEMP WHEEL TEMP O 2 CELL TEMP 1 CHASSIS TEMP PHT DRIVE TEST CHANNEL IS TURNED OFF. The demodulated, peak IR detector output during the measure portion of the GFC Wheel cycle. The demodulated, peak IR detector output during the reference portion of the GFC Wheel cycle. The absolute pressure of the Sample gas as measured by a pressure sensor located inside the sample chamber. Sample mass flow rate as measured by the flow rate sensor in the sample gas stream. The temperature of the gas inside the sample chamber. Optical bench temperature. GFC Wheel temperature. The current temperature of the O 2 sensor measurement cell. The temperature inside the analyzer chassis. The drive voltage being supplied to the thermoelectric coolers of the IR photo detector by the Sync/Demod Board. * Maximum test signal value at full scale of test channel output. 1 When option installed. ZERO 0 mV 0 mV 0 "Hg 0 cm 3 /m 0 ° C 0 ° C 0 ° C n 0 ° C 0 mV FULL SCALE * 5000 mV 5000 mV 40 "Hg 1000 cm 3 /m 70 ° C 70 ° C 70 ° C 70 ° C 70 ° C 5000 mV Once a function is selected, the instrument not only begins to output a signal on the analog output, but also adds TEST to the list of test functions viewable via the front panel display. 128 06864D DCN7562 Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Setup Menu To activate the TEST Channel and select the CO MEASURE function, press: SAMPLE RANGE=50.0 PPM CO= XX.XX SETUP X.X PRIMARY SETUP MENU CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT SETUP X.X SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMM VARS DIAG EXIT SETUP X.X ENTER PASSWORD:818 8 1 8 ENTR EXIT Toggle these buttons to enter the correct PASSWORD. DIAG SIGNAL I/O PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT Continue pressing NEXT until ... DIAG TEST CHAN OUTPUT PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT DIAG TEST CHAN:NONE PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT Toggle to scroll and select a mass flow controller TEST channel parameter. DIAG TEST CHANNEL:CO MEASURE PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT discards the new setting. accepts the new setting. 06864D DCN7562 129 Setup Menu Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer 5.10. à à The T300/T300M includes two CO concentration alarms if OPT 61 is installed on your instrument. Each alarm has a user settable limit, and is associated with a Single Pole Double Throw relay output accessible via the alarm output connector on the instrument’s back panel (See Section 3.3.1.4). If the CO concentration measured by the instrument rises above that limit, the alarm‘s status output relay is closed. The default settings for ALM1 and ALM2 are: Table 5-10: CO Concentration Alarm Default Settings 1 alm1 alm2 Disabled Disabled 100 ppm 300 ppm 1 Set points listed are for PPM. Should the reporting range units of measure be changed (See Section 5.4.3) the analyzer will automatically scale the set points to match the new range unit setting. 130 06864D DCN7562 Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Setup Menu 5.10.1. To enable either of the CO concentration alarms and set the limit points, press: SAMPLE RANGE=50.0 PPM CO= XX.XX SETUP X.X PRIMARY SETUP MENU CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT SETUP X.X SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMM VARS DIAG ALRM EXIT Continue pressing NEXT until the desired Alarm is selected SETUP X.X CO ALRM 2, DISALBED NEXT EDIT PRNT EXIT SETUP X.X CO ALRM 2: OFF ON ENTR EXIT Toggle this button to enable/disable the alarm Toggle these buttons to Set the alarm point DIAG FCAL CO ALARM 2=300.00 PPM 3 0 0 .0 0 ENTR EXIT EXIT discards the new setting ENTR accepts the new setting 06864D DCN7562 131 Setup Menu Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer This page intentionally left blank. 132 06864D DCN7562 This instrument rear panel connections include an Ethernet port, a USB port (option) and two serial communications ports (labeled RS232, which is the COM1 port, and COM2) located on the rear panel (refer to Figure 3-4). These ports give the user the ability to communicate with, issue commands to, and receive data from the analyzer through an external computer system or terminal. This section provides pertinent information regarding communication equipment, describes the instrument’s communications modes, presents configuration instructions for the communications ports, and provides instructions for their use, including communications protocol. Data acquisition is presented in Section 7. 6.1. RS-232 was developed for allowing communications between data terminal equipment (DTE) and data communication equipment (DCE). Basic terminals always fall into the DTE category whereas modems are always considered DCE devices. The difference between the two is the pin assignment of the Data Receive and Data Transmit functions. • DTE devices receive data on pin 2 and transmit data on pin 3. • DCE devices receive data on pin 3 and transmit data on pin 2. To allow the analyzer to be used with terminals (DTE), modems (DCE) and computers (which can be either), a switch mounted below the serial ports on the rear panel allows the user to set the RS-232 configuration for one of these two data devices. This switch exchanges the Receive and Transmit lines on RS-232 emulating a cross-over or null modem cable. The switch has no effect on COM2. 6.2. Use the SETUP>MORE>COMM menu to configure COM1 (labeled RS232 on instrument rear panel) and/or COM2 (labeled COM2 on instrument rear panel) for communication modes, baud rate and/or port testing for correct connection. If using a USB option communication connection, setup requires configuring the COM2 baud rate 06864D DCN7562 133 Communications Setup and Operation Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer 6.2.1. Either of the analyzer’s serial ports ( RS232 or COM2 on rear panel) can be configured to operate in a number of different modes, which are described in Table 6-1. As modes are selected, the analyzer sums the mode ID numbers and displays this combined number on the front panel display. For example, if quiet mode (01), computer mode (02) and Multidrop-Enabled mode (32) are selected, the analyzer would display a combined MODE ID of 35 . Table 6-1: COMM Port Communication Modes MODE 1 ID QUIET COMPUTER HESSEN PROTOCOL E, 8, 1 E, 7, 1 RS-485 DESCRIPTION Quiet mode suppresses any feedback from the analyzer (such as warning messages) to the remote device and is typically used when the port is communicating with a computer program where such intermittent messages might cause communication problems. Such feedback is still available but a command must be issued to receive them. Computer mode inhibits echoing of typed characters and is used when the port is communicating with a computer operated control program. The Hessen communications protocol is used in some European countries. TAPI P/N 02252 contains more information on this protocol. When turned on this mode switches the COMM port settings from ● NO PARITY; 8 data bits; 1 stop bit to EVEN PARITY ; 8 data bits; 1 stop bit. When turned on this mode switches the COM port settings from ● NO PARITY; 8 DATA BITS ; 1 stop bit to EVEN PARITY; 7 DATA BITS ; 1 stop bit. Configures the COM2 Port for RS-485 communication. RS-485 mode has precedence over multidrop mode if both are enabled. SECURITY MULTIDROP PROTOCOL ENABLE MODEM ERROR CHECKING 2 XON/XOFF HANDSHAKE 2 When enabled, the serial port requires a password before it will respond (see Section 5.5). If not logged on, the only active command is the '?' request for the help screen. Multidrop protocol allows a multi-instrument configuration on a single communications channel. Multidrop requires the use of instrument IDs. Enables to send a modem initialization string at power-up. Asserts certain lines in the RS-232 port to enable the modem to communicate. Fixes certain types of parity errors at certain Hessen protocol installations. Disables XON/XOFF data flow control also known as software handshaking. HARDWARE HANDSHAKE Enables CTS/RTS style hardwired transmission handshaking. This style of data transmission handshaking is commonly used with modems or terminal emulation protocols as well as by Teledyne Instrument’s APICOM software. HARDWARE FIFO 2 Disables the HARDWARE FIFO (First In – First Out). When FIFO is enabled it improves data transfer rate for that COM port. COMMAND PROMPT Enables a command prompt when in terminal mode. 1 Modes are listed in the order in which they appear in the SETUP à MORE à COMM à COM[1 OR 2] à MODE menu 2 The default setting for this feature is ON. Do not disable unless instructed to by Teledyne API’s Technical Support personnel. 134 06864D DCN7562 Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Communications Setup and Operation Communication Modes for each COM port must be configured independently. To turn on or off the communication modes for either COM1 or COM2, access the SETUP>MORE>[COM1 or COM2] menu and at the COM1[2] Mode menu press EDIT. Select which COM port to configure SETUP X.X COMMUNICATIONS MENU ID INET COM1 COM2 EXIT The sum of the mode IDs of the selected modes is displayed here SETUP X.X COM1 MODE: 32 SET> EDIT EXIT SETUP X.X COM1 QUIET MODE: OFF NEXT OFF ENTR EXIT Continue pressing NEXT to scroll through the available Modes and press the ON or OFF button to enable or disable each mode. Figure 6-1: COM1[2] – Communication Modes Setup 06864D DCN7562 135 Communications Setup and Operation Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer 6.2.2. To select the baud rate of either COM Port, go to SETUP>MORE>COMM and select either COM1 or COM2 as follows (use COM2 to view/match your personal computer baud rate when using the USB port, Section 6.6): SAMPLE RANGE=50.0 PPM CO= XX.XX SETUP X.X PRIMARY SETUP MENU CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT SETUP X.X SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMM VARS DIAG EXIT SETUP X.X COMMUNICATIONS MENU ID INET COM1 COM2 EXIT SETUP X.X COM1 MODE:0 SET> EDIT EXIT SETUP X.X COM1 BAUD RATE:115200 EDIT EXIT Toggle these buttons to cycle through the available Baud rates: 300 1200 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 SETUP X.X COM1 BAUD RATE:115200 PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT SETUP X.X COM1 BAUD RATE:19200 PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT EXIT discards the new setting. ENTR accepts the new setting. Figure 6-2: COMM Port Baud Rate 136 06864D DCN7562 Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Communications Setup and Operation 6.2.3. The serial ports can be tested for correct connection and output in the COMM menu. This test sends a string of 256 ‘w’ characters to the selected COM port. While the test is running, the red LED labeled TX for that COM port on the instrument’s rear panel analyzer should flicker. To initiate the test, access the COMMUNICATIONS Menu (SETUP>MORE>COMM), then press: SETUP X.X COMMUNICATIONS MENU ID INET COM1 COM2 EXIT Select which COMM port to test. SETUP X.X COM1 MODE:0 SET> EDIT EXIT SETUP X.X COM1 BAUD RATE:19200 SET> EDIT EXIT SETUP X.X COM1 : TEST PORT TEST EXIT Test runs automatically SETUP X.X TRANSMITTING TO COM1 EXIT EXIT returns to COMM menu Figure 6-3: COMM – COM1 Test Port 6.3. The RS232 and COM2 communications (COMM) ports operate on the RS-232 protocol (default configuration). Possible configurations for these two COMM ports are summarized as follows: • RS232 port can also be configured to operate in single or RS-232 Multidrop mode (Option 62); refer to Sections 3.3.1.8 and 5.7.1. • COM2 port can be left in its default configuration for standard RS-232 operation including multidrop, or it can be reconfigured for half-duplex RS-485 operation (please contact the factory for this configuration). Note that when the rear panel COM2 port is in use, except for multidrop communication, the rear panel USB port cannot be used. (Alternatively, when the USB port is enabled, COM2 port cannot be used except for multidrop). 06864D DCN7562 137 Communications Setup and Operation Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer A Code-Activated Switch (CAS), can also be used on either port to connect typically between 2 and 16 send/receive instruments (host computer(s) printers, data loggers, analyzers, monitors, calibrators, etc.) into one communications hub. Contact Teledyne API Sales for more information on CAS systems. To assist in properly connecting the serial ports to either a computer or a modem, there are activity indicators just above the RS-232 port. Once a cable is connected between the analyzer and a computer or modem, both the red and green LEDs should be on. • If the lights are not lit, use small switch on the rear panel to switch it between DTE and DCE modes. • If both LEDs are still not illuminated, make sure the cable properly constructed. To configure the analyzer’s communication ports, use the SETUP>MORE>COMM menu. Refer to Section 5.7.3 for initial setup. 6.4. The COM2 port of the instrument’s rear panel is set up for RS-232 communication but can be reconfigured for RS-485 communication. Contact Technical Support. If this option was elected at the time of purchase, the rear panel was preconfigured at the factory. Choosing this option disallows use of the USB port. 6.5. When using the Ethernet interface, the analyzer can be connected to any standard 10BaseT or 100BaseT Ethernet network via low-cost network hubs, switches or routers. The interface operates as a standard TCP/IP device on port 3000. This allows a remote computer to connect through the network to the analyzer using APICOM, terminal emulators or other programs. The Ethernet cable connector on the rear panel has two LEDs indicating the Ethernet’s current operating status. Table 6-2: Ethernet Status Indicators LED amber (link) green (activity FUNCTION On when connection to the LAN is valid. Flickers during any activity on the LAN. The analyzer is shipped with DHCP enabled by default. This allows the instrument to be connected to a network or router with a DHCP server. The instrument will automatically be assigned an IP address by the DHCP server (Section 6.5.2). This configuration is useful for quickly getting an instrument up and running on a network. However, for permanent Ethernet connections, a static IP address should be used. Section 6.5.1 below details how to configure the instrument with a static IP address. 138 06864D DCN7562 Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Communications Setup and Operation 6.5.1. To configure Ethernet communication manually: 1. Connect a cable from the analyzer’s Ethernet port to a Local Area Network (LAN) or Internet port. 2. From the analyzer’s front panel touchscreen, access the Communications Menu (SETUP>MORE>COMM). 3. Enter the Ethernet menu (INET), follow the setup sequence as shown in Figure 6-4, and edit the Instrument and Gateway IP addresses and Subnet Mask to the desired settings. Alternatively, from the computer, enter the same information through an application such as HyperTerminal. Table 6-3 shows the default Ethernet configuration settings. Table 6-3: LAN/Internet Default Configuration Properties PROPERTY DHCP INSTRUMENT IP ADDRESS GATEWAY IP ADDRESS SUBNET MASK TCP PORT 1 DEFAULT STATE ON 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 3000 DESCRIPTION This displays whether the DHCP is turned ON or OFF. Press EDIT and toggle ON for automatic configuration after first consulting network administrator. This string of four packets of 1 to 3 numbers each (e.g. 192.168.76.55.) is the address of the analyzer itself. Can only be edited when DHCP is set to OFF. A string of numbers very similar to the Instrument IP address (e.g. 192.168.76.1.) that is the address of the computer used by your LAN to access the Internet. Can only be edited when DHCP is set to OFF. Also a string of four packets of 1 to 3 numbers each (e.g. 255.255.252.0) that identifies the LAN to which the device is connected. All addressable devices and computers on a LAN must have the same subnet mask. Any transmissions sent to devices with different subnets are assumed to be outside of the LAN and are routed through the gateway computer onto the Internet. This number defines the terminal control port by which the instrument is addressed by terminal emulation software, such as Internet or Teledyne API’s APICOM. HOST NAME [initially blank] The name by which your analyzer will appear when addressed from other computers on the LAN or via the Internet. To change, see Section 6.5.3. 1 Do not change the setting for this property unless instructed to by Teledyne API’s Technical Support personnel. 06864D DCN7562 139 Communications Setup and Operation Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer SETUP X.X COMMUNICATIONS MENU ID INET COM1 COM2 EXIT SAMPLE ENTER SETUP PASS : 818 8 1 8 ENTR EXIT DHCP: ON is default setting. Skip this step if it has been set to OFF. SETUP X.X DHCP: ON SET> EDIT EXIT Internet Configuration Button Functions BUTTON FUNCTION [0] DEL Location of cursor. Press to cycle through the range of numerals and available characters (“ 0 – 9” & “ . ” ) Moves the cursor one character left or right. Deletes a character at the cursor location. ENTR Accepts the new setting and returns to the previous menu. EXIT Ignores the new setting and returns to the previous menu. Some buttons appear only when relevant. SETUP X.X DHCP: OFF SET> EDIT EXIT SETUP X.X INST IP: 000.000.000.000 EXIT SETUP X.X INST IP: [0] 00.000.000 Cursor location is indicated by brackets SETUP X.X GATEWAY IP: 000.000.000.000 EXIT SETUP X.X GATEWAY IP: [0] 00.000.000 SETUP X.X SUBNET MASK:255.255.255.0 EXIT Pressing EXIT from any of the above display menus causes the Ethernet option to reinitialize its internal interface firmware SETUP X.X TCP PORT 3000 EDIT EXIT SETUP X.X INITIALIZING INET 0% … INITIALIZING INET 100% SETUP X.X SUBNET MASK:[2]55.255.255.0 The PORT number must remain at 3000 . Do not change this setting unless instructed to by Teledyne Instruments Customer Service personnel. SETUP X.X INITIALIZATI0N SUCCEEDED SETUP X.X INITIALIZATION FAILED 140 Figure 6-4: SETUP X.X COMMUNICATIONS MENU ID INET COM1 COM2 EXIT COMM – LAN / Internet Manual Configuration Contact your IT Network Administrator 06864D DCN7562 Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Communications Setup and Operation 6.5.2. The default Ethernet setting is DHCP. 1. See your network administrator to affirm that your network server is running DHCP. 2. Access the Communications Menu (SETUP>MORE>COMM) and follow the setup sequence as shown in Figure 6-5. SETUP X.X COMMUNICATIONS MENU ID INET COM1 COM2 EXIT SETUP X.X ENTER PASSWORD:818 8 1 8 ENTR EXIT EDIT button is disabled when DHCP is ON. DO NOT alter unless instructed to by Teledyne Instruments’ customer Service personnel. Both TCP ports are inactive when this is set for OFF. SETUP X.X DHCP:ON Figure 6-5 : COMM – LAN / Internet Automatic Configuration (DHCP) Contact your IT Network Administrator. 141 Communications Setup and Operation Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer 6.5.3. The HOSTNAME is the name by which the analyzer appears on your network. The default name for all Teledyne API’s T300 analyzers is T300 . To change this name (particularly if you have more than one T300/T300M Analyzer on your network), press: SAMPLE RANGE=50.0 PPM CO= XX.XX SETUP X.X PRIMARY SETUP MENU CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT SETUP X.X ENTER PASSWORD:818 8 1 8 ENTR EXIT SETUP X.X SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMM VARS DIAG EXIT SETUP X.X DHCP:ON EDIT EXIT SETUP X.X COMMUNICATIONS MENU ID INET COM1 COM2 EXIT Continue pressing ????? until ... SETUP X.X HOSTNAME: EDIT SETUP X.X HOSTNAME: EXIT ENTR EXIT BUTTON FUNCTION Moves the cursor one character to the left. Moves the cursor one character to the right. Inserts a character before the cursor location. Deletes a character at the cursor location. Press this key to cycle through the range of numerals and characters available for insertion. 0-9, A-Z, space ’ ~ ! # $ % ^ & * ( ) - _ = +[ ] { } < >\ | ; : , . / ? ENTR EXIT Accepts the new setting and returns to the previous menu. Ignores the new setting and returns to the previous menu. Some keys only appear as needed. Use these buttons to edit the HOSTNAME SETUP X.X HOSTNAME: T300 STATION#2 (example name) ENTR accepts the new setting. EXIT ignores the new setting. SETUP X.X INITIALIZING INET 0% INITIALIZATION process proceeds automatically SETUP X.X INITIALIZATION SUCCEEDED SETUP X.X INITIALIZATION FAILED SETUP X.X COMMUNICATIONS MENU ID INET COM1 COM2 EXIT Contact your IT Network Administrator. 142 06864D DCN7562 Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Communications Setup and Operation 6.6. The analyzer can be operated through a personal computer by downloading the TAPI USB driver and directly connecting their respective USB ports. 1. Install the Teledyne T-Series USB driver on your computer, downloadable from the Teledyne API website under Help Center>Software Downloads (www.teledyne api.com/software). 2. Run the installer file: “TAPIVCPInstaller.exe” 3. Connect the USB cable between the USB ports on your personal computer and your analyzer. The USB cable should be a Type A – Type B cable, commonly used as a USB printer cable. 4. Determine the Windows XP Com Port number that was automatically assigned to the US B connection. (Start → Control Panel → System → Hardware → Device Manager). This is the com port that should be set in the communications software, such as APIcom or Hyperterminal. 06864D DCN7562 Refer to the Quick Start ( Direct Cable Connection ) section of the Teledyne APIcom Manual, PN 07463. 143 Communications Setup and Operation Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer 5. In the instrument’s SETUP>MORE>COMM>COM2 menu, make the following settings: Baud Rate: 115200 COM2 Mode Settings: Quiet Mode Computer Mode MODBUS RTU MODBUS ASCII E,8,1 MODE E,7,1 MODE RS-485 MODE SECURITY MODE MULTIDROP MODE ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ENABLE MODEM ERROR CHECKING OFF ON XON/XOFF HANDSHAKE OFF HARDWARE HANDSHAKE OFF HARDWARE FIFO COMMAND PROMPT ON OFF 6. Next, configure your communications software, such as APIcom. Use the COM port determined in Step 4 and the baud rate set in Step 5. The figures below show how these parameters would be configured in the Instrument Properties window in APIcom when configuring a new instrument. See the APIcom manual (PN 07463) for more details. 144 • • 06864D DCN7562 Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Communications Setup and Operation 6.7. Two communications protocols available with the analyzer are MODBUS and Hessen. MODBUS setup instructions are provided here (Section 6.7.1) and registers are provided in Appendix A. Hessen setup and operation instructions are provided in Section 6.7.2. 6.7.1. The following set of instructions assumes that the user is familiar with MODBUS communications, and provides minimal information to get started. For additional instruction, please refer to the Teledyne API MODBUS manual, PN 06276. Also refer to www.modbus.org for MODBUS communication protocols. • • • • • Instrument firmware with MODBUS capabilities installed. MODBUS-compatible software (TAPI uses MODBUS Poll for testing; see www.modbustools.com) Personal computer Communications cable (Ethernet or USB or RS232) Possibly a null modem adapter or cable Set Com Mode parameters Comm Slave ID Ethernet: Using the front panel menu, go to SETUP – MORE – COMM – INET; scroll through the INET submenu until you reach TCP PORT 2 (the standard setting is 502), then continue to TCP PORT 2 MODBUS TCP/IP; press EDIT and toggle the menu button to change the setting to ON, then press ENTR. (Change Machine ID if needed: see “Slave ID”). USB/RS232: Using the front panel menu, go to SETUP – MORE – COMM – COM2 – EDIT; scroll through the COM2 EDIT submenu until the display shows COM2 MODBUS RTU: OFF (press OFF to change the setting to ON. Scroll NEXT to COM2 MODBUS ASCII and ensure it is set to OFF. Press ENTR to keep the new settings. (If RTU is not available with your communications equipment, set the COM2 MODBUS ASCII setting to ON and ensure that COM2 MODBUS RTU is set to OFF. Press ENTR to keep the new settings). A MODBUS slave ID must be set for each instrument. Valid slave ID’s are in the range of 1 to 247. If your analyzer is connected to a serial network (i.e., RS-485), a unique Slave ID must be assigned to each instrument. To set the slave ID for the instrument, go to SETUP – MORE – COMM – ID. The default MACHINE ID is the same as the model number. Toggle the menu buttons to change the ID. Reboot analyzer For the settings to take effect, power down the analyzer, wait 5 seconds, and power up the analyzer. Make appropriate cable connections Specify MODBUS software settings (examples used here are for MODBUS Poll software) Read the Modbus Poll Register Connect your analyzer either: • via its Ethernet or USB port to a PC (this may require a USB-to-RS232 adapter for your PC; if so, also install the software driver from the CD supplied with the adapter, and reboot the computer if required), or • via its COM2 port to a null modem (this may require a null modem adapter or cable). 1. Click Setup / [Read / Write Definition] /. a. In the Read/Write Definition window (see example that follows) select a Function (what you wish to read from the analyzer). b. c. Input Quantity (based on your firmware’s register map). In the View section of the Read/Write Definition window select a Display (typically Float Inverse). d. Click OK . 2. Next, click Connection/Connect. a. In the Connection Setup window (see example that follows), select the options based on your computer. b. Press OK . Use the Register Map to find the test parameter names for the values displayed (see example that follows). If desired, assign an alias for each. Example Read/Write Definition window: 06864D DCN7562 145 Communications Setup and Operation Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Example Connection Setup window: 146 Example MODBUS Poll window: 06864D DCN7562 Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Communications Setup and Operation 6.7.2. The Hessen protocol is a multidrop protocol, in which several remote instruments are connected via a common communications channel to a host computer. The remote instruments are regarded as slaves of the host computer. The remote instruments are unaware that they are connected to a multidrop bus and never initiate Hessen protocol messages. They only respond to commands from the host computer and only when they receive a command containing their own unique ID number. The Hessen protocol is designed to accomplish two things: to obtain the status of remote instruments, including the concentrations of all the gases measured; and to place remote instruments into zero or span calibration or measure mode. API’s implementation supports both of these principal features. The Hessen protocol is not well defined, therefore while API’s application is completely compatible with the protocol itself, it may be different from implementations by other companies. I 6.7.2.1. Hessen protocol requires the communication parameters of the T300/T300M Analyzer’s COMM ports to be set differently than the standard configuration as shown in Table 6-4. Table 6-4: RS-232 Communication Parameters for Hessen Protocol PARAMETER Baud Rate Data Bits Stop Bits Parity Duplex STANDARD 300 – 19200 8 1 None Full HESSEN 1200 7 2 Even Half MPORTANT To change the baud rate of the T300/T300M’s COMM ports, see Section 6.2.2. To change the rest of the COMM port parameters listed in Table 6-4, see Section 6.2 and MPACT ON EADINGS OR ATA 06864D DCN7562 147 Communications Setup and Operation Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer 6.7.2.2. Once the COMM port has been properly configured, the next step in configuring the T300/T300M to operate over a Hessen protocol network is to activate the Hessen mode for COMM ports and configure the communication parameters for the port(s) appropriately. To activate the Hessen Protocol, press: SAMPLE RANGE=50.0 PPM CO= XX.XX SETUP X.X PRIMARY SETUP MENU CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT SETUP X.X SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMM VARS DIAG EXIT SETUP X.X COMMUNICATIONS MENU ID COM1 COM2 EXIT SETUP X.X COM1 MODE:0 EDIT EXIT Use the PREV and NEXT buttons to between the available modes. SETUP X.X COM1 QUIET MODE:OFF PREV NEXT OFF Continue pressing NEXT until ... EXIT Combined Mode ID displayed here. Activate / Deactivate the HESSEN mode by toggling the ON / OFF button. SETUP X.X COM1 HESSEN PROTOCOL: OFF PREV NEXT OFF ENTR EXIT SETUP X.X COM1 HESSEN PROTOCOL: ON PREV NEXT ON ENTR EXIT SETUP X.X COM1 MODE:16 EXIT EXIT discards the new setting. ENTR accepts the new setting. SETUP X.X COMMUNICATIONS MENU ID HESN COM1 COM2 EXIT 148 06864D DCN7562 Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer SAMPLE RANGE=50.0 PPM CO= XX.XX Communications Setup and Operation 6.7.2.3. Currently there are two versions of Hessen Protocol in use. The original implementation, referred to as TYPE 1 , and a more recently released version, TYPE 2 that has more flexibility when operating with instruments that can measure more than one type of gas. For more specific information about the difference between TYPE 1 and TYPE 2 download the Manual Addendum for Hessen Protocol from the Teledyne API web site: http://www.teledyne-api.com/manuals/ . To select a Hessen Protocol Type press: SETUP X.X PRIMARY SETUP MENU CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT SETUP X.X SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMM VARS DIAG EXIT SETUP X.X COMMUNICATIONS MENU ID HESN COM1 COM2 EXIT SETUP X.X HESSEN VARIATION:TYPE1 Use these buttons to choose the Hessen type. SETUP X.X HESSEN VARIATION:TYPE1 TYP1 TYP2 ENTR EXIT EXIT discards the new setting. ENTR accepts the new setting. 06864D DCN7562 149 Communications Setup and Operation Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer 6.7.2.4. The Teledyne API’s implementation of Hessen Protocol allows the user to choose one of several different modes of response for the analyzer. MODE ID CMD BCC TEXT Table 6-5: Teledyne API’s Hessen Protocol Response Modes MODE DESCRIPTION This is the Default Setting. Reponses from the instrument are encoded as the traditional command format. Style and format of responses depend on exact coding of the initiating command. Responses from the instrument are always delimited with SAMPLE RANGE=50.0 PPM CO= XX.XX SETUP X.X PRIMARY SETUP MENU CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT SETUP X.X SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMM VARS DIAG EXIT SETUP X.X COMMUNICATIONS MENU ID HESN COM1 COM2 EXIT SETUP X.X HESSEN VARIATION:TYPE1 Continue pressing SET until ... SETUP X.X HESSEN RESPONSE MODE:CMD Use these buttons to choose the Hessen Response type. SETUP X.X HESSEN RESPONSE MODE:CMD BCC TEXT CMD ENTR EXIT EXIT discards the new setting. ENTR accepts the new setting. 150 06864D DCN7562 Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Communications Setup and Operation 6.7.3. 6.7.3.1. The T300/T300M Analyzer keeps a list of available gas types. Each entry in this list takes the following format: [GAS TYPE],[RANGE],[GAS ID],[REPORTED] WHERE: GAS TYPE = The type of gas to be reported (e.g. CO, CO 2 , O 2 , etc.). RANGE = The concentration range for this entry in the gas list. This feature permits the user to select which concentration range will be used for this gas list entry. The T300/T300M Analyzer has two ranges: RANGE1 or LOW & RANGE2 or HIGH (See 0 - The HESSEN protocol to use whatever range is currently active. 1 - The HESSEN protocol will always use RANGE1 for this gas list entry. 2 - The HESSEN protocol will always use RANGE2 for this gas list entry. 3 - Not applicable to the T300/T300M Analyzer. GAS ID = An identification number assigned to a specific gas. In the case of the T300/T300M Analyzer in its base configuration, there is only one gas CO, and its default GAS ID is 310. This ID number should not be modified. REPORT = States whether this list entry is to be reported or not reported when ever this gas type or instrument is polled by the HESSEN network. If the list entry is not to be reported this field will be blank. While the T300/T300M Analyzer is a single gas instrument that measures CO, it can have additional, optional sensors for CO 2 or O 2 installed. The default gas list entries for these three gases are: CO, 0, 310, REPORTED CO 2 , 0, 311, REPORTED O 2 , 0, 312, REPORTED These default settings cause the instrument to report the concentration value of the currently active range. If you wish to have just concentration value stored for a specific range, this list entry should be edited or additional entries should be added to the list. EXAMPLE: Changing the above CO gas list entry to read: CO, 2, 310, REPORTED would cause only the last CO reading while RANGE2 (HIGH) range was active to be recorded. 06864D DCN7562 151 Communications Setup and Operation Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer 6.7.3.2. To add or edit an entry to the Hessen Gas List, press: SAMPLE RANGE=500.0 PPB NOX= XXXX SETUP X.X PRIMARY SETUP MENU CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT SETUP X.X SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMM VARS DIAG EXIT SETUP X.X COMMUNICATIONS MENU ID HESN COM1 COM2 EXIT SETUP X.X HESSEN VARIATION:TYPE1 Continue pressing NEXT until ... SETUP X.X CO, 0, 310, REPORTED PREV NEXT INS DEL EDIT PRNT EXIT Use the PREV and NEXT buttons to move between gas list entries. Use the PREV and NEXT buttons to move between gas types. Toggle this button to set the concentration range for the list entry. SETUP X.X GAS TYPE:CO PREV NEXT SETUP X.X CONC RANGE:0 0 ENTR EXIT ENTR EXIT Toggle these buttons to set the appropriate GAS ID . For new list entries this number will be displayed as 000 . SETUP X.X GAS ID:[ID Number] 0 0 0 ENTR EXIT SETUP X.X REPORTED:ON ON ENTR EXIT Toggle this button to turn ON/OFF the REPORT attribute. SETUP X.X O2, 1, 312, REPORTED PREV NEXT INS DEL EDIT PRNT EXIT EXIT sets the Gas typ too NONE. EXIT discards the new setting. ENTR accepts the new setting. 152 06864D DCN7562 Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Communications Setup and Operation 6.7.3.3. To delete an entry from the Hessen Gas list, press: SAMPLE RANGE=50.0 PPM CO= XX.XX There is only one GAS TYPE available on the M400E: O3. SETUP X.X HESSEN GAS LIST YES NO DELETED 06864D DCN7562 153 Communications Setup and Operation Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer 6.7.3.4. Teledyne API’s implementation of Hessen protocols includes a set of status bits that the instrument includes in responses to inform the host computer of its condition. Each bit can be assigned to one operational and warning message flag. The default settings for these bit/flags are: Table 6-6: Default Hessen Status Flag Assignments STATUS FLAG NAME DEFAULT BIT ASSIGNMENT WARNING FLAGS SAMPLE FLOW WARNING BENCH TEMP WARNING SOURCE WARNING BOX TEMP WARNING WHEEL TEMP WARNING SAMPLE TEMP WARN SAMPLE PRESS WARN 0001 0002 0004 0008 0010 0020 0040 INVALID CONC (The Instrument’s Front Panel Display Will Show The Concentration As “Warnings”) OPERATIONAL FLAGS 1 Instrument OFF In MANUAL Calibration Mode In ZERO Calibration Mode 4 In O 2 Calibration Mode (if O 2 sensor installed ) 2,4 In CO 2 Calibration Mode (if CO 2 sensor installed ) 2,4 In SPAN Calibration Mode UNITS OF MEASURE FLAGS UGM MGM PPB PPM SPARE/UNUSED BITS 0080 0100 0200 0400 0400 0400 0800 0000 2000 4000 6000 1000, 8000 AZERO WARN 2 CANNOT DYN SPAN 2 UNASSIGNED FLAGS (0000) DCPS WARNING REAR BOARD NOT DET CANNOT DYN ZERO 3 CONC ALARM 1 3 SYNC WARNING 1 SYSTEM RESET 1 CONC ALARM 2 3 1 These status flags are standard for all instruments and should probably not be modified. 2 3 Only applicable if the optional internal span gas generator is installed. 3 Only applicable if the analyzer is equipped with an alarm options. It is possible to assign more than one flag to the same Hessen status bit. This allows the grouping of similar flags, such as all temperature warnings, under the same status bit. Be careful not to assign conflicting flags to the same bit as each status bit will be triggered if any of the assigned flags is active. 154 06864D DCN7562 Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Communications Setup and Operation To assign or reset the status flag bit assignments, press: SAMPLE RANGE=50.0 PPM CO= XX.XX SETUP SETUP X.X PRIMARY SETUP MENU CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT SETUP X.X SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMM VARS DIAG EXIT SETUP X.X COMMUNICATIONS MENU ID HESN COM1 COM2 EXIT SETUP X.X HESSEN STATUS FLAGS SETUP X.X SOURCE WARNING:0004 NEXT EDIT PRNT EXIT Continue pressing NEXT until ... Continue pressing NEXT until desired flag message is displayed SETUP X.X SAMPLE TEMP WARNING:0020 PREV NEXT EDIT PRNT EXIT The and bit string. CH> buttons move the cursor brackets “ [ ]” left and right along the SETUP X.X BOX TEMP WARNING:[0]008 deletes the character currently inside the cursor brackets. EXIT discards the new setting. ENTR accepts the new setting. Press the [?] button repeatedly to cycle through the available character set: 0-9 NOTE : Values of A-F can also be set but are meaningless. 6.7.3.5. Each instrument on a Hessen Protocol network must have a unique identifier (ID number). If more than one T300/T300M analyzer is on the Hessen network, refer to Section 5.7.1 for information and to customize the ID of each. 06864D DCN7562 155 Communications Setup and Operation Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer This page intentionally left blank. 156 06864D DCN7562 The T300/T300M Analyzer contains a flexible and powerful, Internal Data Acquisition System (DAS) that enables the analyzer to store concentration and calibration data as well as a host of diagnostic parameters. The DAS of the T300/T300M can store up to about one million data points, which can, depending on individual configurations, cover days, weeks or months of valuable measurements. The data is stored in non-volatile memory and is retained even when the instrument is powered off. Data is stored in plain text format for easy retrieval and use in common data analysis programs (such as spreadsheet-type programs). The DAS is designed to be flexible, users have full control over the type, length and reporting time of the data. The DAS permits users to access stored data through the instrument’s front panel or its communication ports. The principal use of the DAS is logging data for trend analysis and predictive diagnostics, which can assist in identifying possible problems before they affect the functionality of the analyzer. The secondary use is for data analysis, documentation and archival in electronic format. To support the DAS functionality, Teledyne API offers APICOM, a program that provides a visual interface for remote or local setup, configuration and data retrieval of the DAS. The APICOM manual, which is included with the program, contains a more detailed description of the DAS structure and configuration, which is briefly described in this manual. The T300/T300M is configured with a basic DAS configuration, which is enabled by default. New data channels are also enabled by default at their creation, but all channels may be turned off for later or occasional use. The green SAMPLE LED on the instrument front panel, which indicates the analyzer status, also indicates certain aspects of the DAS status: Table 7-1: Front Panel LED Status Indicators for DAS LED STATE Off Blinking On DAS STATUS System is in calibration mode. Data logging can be enabled or disabled for this mode. Calibration data are typically stored at the end of calibration periods, concentration data are typically not sampled, diagnostic data should be collected. Instrument is in hold-off mode, a short period after the system exits calibrations. DAS channels can be enabled or disabled for this period. Concentration data are typically disabled whereas diagnostic should be collected. Sampling normally. 06864D DCN7562 157 Data Acquisition System (DAS) and APICOM Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer 7.1. The DAS is designed around the feature of a “record”. A record is a single data point. The type of data recorded in a record is defined by two properties: PARAMETER type that defines the kind of data to be stored (e.g. the average of gas concentrations measured with three digits of precision). See Section 7.1.6. A TRIGGER event that defines when the record is made (e.g. timer; every time a calibration is performed, etc.). See Section 7.1.5. The specific PARAMETERS and TRIGGER events that describe an individual record are defined in a construct called a DATA CHANNEL (see Section 7.1.1). Each data channel is related one or more parameters with a specific trigger event and various other operational characteristics related to the records being made (e.g. the channels name, number or records to be made, time period between records, whether or not the record is exported via the analyzer’s RS-232 port, etc.). 158 06864D DCN7562 Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Data Acquisition System (DAS) and APICOM 7.1.1. • • • The key to the flexibility of the DAS is its ability to store a large number of combinations of triggering events and data parameters in the form of data channels. Users may create up to 50 data channels and each channel can contain one or more parameters. For each channel, the following are selected: One triggering event is selected. Up to 50 data parameters, which can be the shared between channels. Several other properties that define the structure of the channel and allow the user to make operational decisions regarding the channel. Table 7-2: DAS Data Channel Properties PROPERTY DESCRIPTION DEFAULT SETTING SETTING RANGE NAME TRIGGERING EVENT The name of the data channel. The event that triggers the data channel to measure and store the datum. “NONE” ATIMER Up to 6 letters or digits 1. Any available event (see Appendix A-5). NUMBER AND LIST OF PARAMETERS A User-configurable list of data types to be recorded in any given channel. 1 (COMEAS) Any available parameter (see Appendix A-5). REPORT PERIOD The amount of time between each channel data point. 000:01:00 (1 hour) 000:00:01 to 366:23:59 (Days:Hours:Minutes) NUMBER OF RECORDS RS-232 REPORT CHANNEL ENABLED The number of reports that will be stored in the data file. Once the limit is exceeded, the oldest data is over-written. Enables the analyzer to automatically report channel values to the RS-232 ports. Enables or disables the channel. Allows a channel to be temporarily turned off without deleting it. 100 OFF ON 1 to 1 million, limited by available storage space. OFF or ON OFF or ON CAL HOLD OFF Disables sampling of data parameters while instrument is in calibration mode 2 . OFF OFF or ON 1 More with APICOM, but only the first six are displayed on the front panel. 2 When enabled records are not recorded until the DAS HOLD OFF period is passed after calibration mode. DAS HOLD OFF SET in the VARS . 7.1.2. A set of default Data Channels has been included in the analyzer’s software for logging CO concentration and certain predictive diagnostic data. These default channels include but are not limited to: • CONC: Samples CO concentration at one minute intervals and stores an average every hour with a time and date stamp. Readings during calibration and calibration hold off are not included in the data. • By default, the last 800 hourly averages are stored. • PNUMTC: Collects sample flow and sample pressure data at five-minute intervals and stores an average once a day with a time and date stamp. This data is useful for monitoring the condition of the pump and critical flow orifice (sample flow) and the sample filter (clogging indicated by a drop in sample pressure) over time to predict when maintenance will be required. • The last 360 daily averages (about 1 year) are stored. 06864D DCN7562 159 Data Acquisition System (DAS) and APICOM Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer • CALDAT: Logs new slope and offset of CO measurements every time a zero or span calibration is performed and the result changes the value of the slope (triggering event: SLPCHG ). The CO stability data to evaluate if the calibration value was stable are also stored. • This data channel will store data from the last 200 calibrations and can be used to document analyzer calibration and is useful in the detection of the in slope and offset (instrument response) when performing predictive diagnostics as part of a regular maintenance schedule. • The CALDAT channel collects data based on events (e.g. a calibration operation) rather than a timed interval and therefore does not represent any specific length of time. As with all data channels, a date and time stamp is recorded for every logged data point. These default Data Channels can be used as they are, or they can be customized from the front panel to fit a specific application. They can also be deleted to make room for custom user-programmed Data Channels. Appendix A-5 lists the firmware-specific DAS configuration in plain-text format. This text file can either be loaded into APICOM and then modified and uploaded to the instrument or can be copied and pasted into a terminal program to be sent to the analyzer. I MPORTANT MPACT ON EADINGS OR ATA 160 06864D DCN7562 Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Data Acquisition System (DAS) and APICOM Triggering Events and Data Parameters/Functions for these default channels are: List of Channels PARAMETER List of Parameters MODE PRECISION STORE NUM SAMPLES Name: CONC Event: ATIMER Parameters: 1 Report Period: 000:01:00 No. of Records: 800 RS-232 Report: OFF Channel Enabled: ON Cal Hold OFF: ON Name: CALDAT Event: SLPCHG Parameters: 3 Report Period: N/A No. of Records: 200 RS-232 Report: OFF Channel Enabled: ON Cal Hold OFF: OFF Name: PNUMTC Event: ATIMER Parameters: 2 Report Period: 000:01:00 No. of Records: 360 RS-232 Report: OFF Channel Enabled: ON Cal Hold OFF: OFF Name: STBZERO Event: EXITZR Parameters: 3 Report Period: N/A No. of Records: 200 RS-232 Report: OFF Channel Enabled: ON Cal Hold OFF: OFF Name: STBSPN Event: EXITSP Parameters: 2 Report Period: N/A No. of Records: 200 RS-232 Report: OFF Channel Enabled: ON Cal Hold OFF: OFF Name: TEMP Event: EXITSP Parameters: 3 Report Period: 000:06:00 No. of Records: 400 RS-232 Report: OFF Channel Enabled: ON Cal Hold OFF: OFF CONC1 SLOPE1 OFFSET1 ZSCNC1 SMPLFLW SMPLPRS STABIL DETMES RATIO DETMES RATIO BNTEMP BOXTEMP PHTDRV AVG INST I NST INST AVG AVG INST INST INST INST INST AVG AVG AVG 1 1 1 1 2 1 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 3 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF Figure 7-1: Default DAS Channel Setup 06864D DCN7562 161 Data Acquisition System (DAS) and APICOM Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer 7.1.3. DAS data and settings can be viewed on the front panel through the following buttonstroke sequence. SAMPLE RANGE=500.0 PPB NOX= XXXX SETUP X.X PRIMARY SETUP MENU CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE SETUP X.X DATA ACQUISITION VIEW EDIT EXIT EXIT DAS VIEW – Control Button Functions Button PV10 FUNCTION Moves the VIEW backward 10 record PREV NEXT NX10 Moves the VIEW backward 1 records or channel Moves the VIEW forward 1 record or channel Moves the VIEW forward 10 records Selects the previous parameter on the list PRM> Selects the next parameter on the list Buttons only appear when applicable SETUP X.X CONC: DATA AVAILABLE NEXT VIEW EXIT SETUP X.X 101:21:00 CONC1=39.0 PPM PV10 PREV EXIT SETUP X.X PNUMTC: DATA AVAILABLE PREV NEXT VIEW EXIT SETUP X.X 101:21:00 CONC1=39.0 PPM PV10 PREV NEXT NX10 CALDAT: DATA AVAILABLE PREV NEXT VIEW EXIT SETUP X.X 101:19:45 SLOPE1=0.997 PV10 PREV NEXT PRM> SETUP X.X 101:22:00 CONC1=39.1 PPM PV10 PREV EXIT EXIT SETUP X.X 102:04:55 SLOPE1=1.002 PV10 PREV NX10 NEXT 101:19:45 OFFSET=1.3 NEXT to view remaining DAS channels 162 06864D DCN7562 Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Data Acquisition System (DAS) and APICOM 7.1.4. DAS configuration is most conveniently done through the APICOM remote control program. The following list of button strokes shows how to edit the DAS using the front panel. SAMPLE RANGE=50.0 PPM CO= XX.XX SETUP X.X PRIMARY SETUP MENU CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT Main iDAS Menu SETUP X.X DATA ACQUISITION VIEW EDIT EXIT SETUP X.X ENTER PASSWORD:818 8 1 8 ENTR EXIT EDIT Channel Menu SETUP X.X 0) CONC: ATIMER 1, 800 NEXT INS DEL EDIT PRNT EXIT PREV Selects the previous data channel in the list NEXT INS Selects the next data channel in the list Inserts a new data channel into the list BEFORE the selected channel Deletes the currently selected data channel DEL EDIT Enters EDIT mode PRINT Exports the configuration of all data channels to the RS-232 interface Buttons only appear when applicable. Enters EDIT mode for the selected channel When editing the data channels, the top line of the display indicates some of the configuration parameters. For example, the display line: 0) CONC: ATIMER, 1, 800 Translates to the following configuration: Channel No.: 0 NAME: CONC TRIGGER EVENT: ATIMER PARAMETERS: One parameter is included in this channel EVENT: This channel is set up to store 800 records. 06864D DCN7562 163 Data Acquisition System (DAS) and APICOM Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer 7.1.4.1. To edit the name of a DAS data channel, follow the instruction shown in Section 7.1.4.1, then press: Starting at the EDIT CHANNEL MENU SETUP X.X 0) CONC: ATIMER 1, 800 NEXT INS DEL EDIT PRNT EXIT SETUP X.X NAME: CONC SET> EDIT EXIT SETUP X.X NAME: CONC C O N C — — ENTR EXIT 164 06864D DCN7562 Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Data Acquisition System (DAS) and APICOM 7.1.5. Triggering events define when and how the DAS records a measurement of any given data channel. Triggering events are firmware-specific and are listed in Appendix A-5. The most commonly used triggering events are: • ATIMER : Sampling at regular intervals specified by an automatic timer. Most trending information is usually stored at such regular intervals, which can be instantaneous or averaged. • EXITZR , EXITSP , and SLPCHG (exit zero, exit span, slope change): Sampling at the end of (irregularly occurring) calibrations or when the response slope changes. These triggering events create instantaneous data points, e.g., for the new slope and offset (concentration response) values at the end of a calibration. Zero and slope values are valuable to monitor response drift and to document when the instrument was calibrated. • WARNINGS: Some data may be useful when stored if one of several warning messages appears such as WTEMPW (GFC Wheel temperature warning). This is helpful for troubleshooting by monitoring when a particular warning occurrs. To edit the list of data parameters associated with a specific data channel, follow the instruction shown in Section 7.1.4 then press: Starting at the EDIT CHANNEL MENU SETUP X.X 0) CONC: ATIMER 1, 800 PREV NEXT INS DEL EDIT PRNT EXIT SETUP X.X NAME: CONC SET> EDIT EXIT 06864D DCN7562 Continue pressing until ... SETUP X.X EVENT:ATIMER EXIT discards the new setting. accepts the new setting. Toggle these buttons to cycle through the list of available trigger event. EVENT:ATIMER PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT 165 Data Acquisition System (DAS) and APICOM Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer 7.1.6. Data parameters are types of data that may be measured and stored by the DAS. For each analyzer model, the list of available data parameters is different, fully defined and not customizable. Appendix A-5 lists firmware specific data parameters for the T300/T300M. DAS parameters include things like CO concentration measurements, temperatures of the various heaters placed around the analyzer, pressures and flows of the pneumatic subsystem and other diagnostic measurements as well as calibration data such as stability, slope and offset. Most data parameters have associated measurement units, such as mV, ppb, cm³/min, etc., although some parameters have no units (e.g. SLOPE ). With the exception of concentration readings, none of these units of measure can be changed. To change the units of measure for concentration readings, see Section 5.4.4. Each data parameter has user-configurable functions that define how the data are recorded (refer to Table 7-3). Table 7-3: DAS Data Parameter Functions FUNCTION PARAMETER SAMPLE MODE PRECISION STORE NUM SAMPLES EFFECT Instrument-specific parameter name. INST: Records instantaneous reading. AVG: Records average reading during reporting interval. SDEV: Records the standard deviation of the data points recorded during the reporting interval. MIN: Records minimum (instantaneous) reading during reporting interval. MAX: Records maximum (instantaneous) reading during reporting interval. 0 to 4: Sets the number of digits to the right decimal point for each record. Example: Setting 4 ; “399.9865 PPB” Setting 0 ; “400 PPB” OFF: Stores only the average (default). ON: Stores the average and the number of samples in used to compute the value of the parameter. This property is only useful when the AVG sample mode is used. Note that the number of samples is the same for all parameters in one channel and needs to be specified only for one of the parameters in that channel. Users can specify up to 50 parameters per data channel (the T300/T300M provides about 40 parameters). However, the number of parameters and channels is ultimately limited by available memory. Data channels can be edited individually from the front panel without affecting other data channels. However, when editing a data channel, such as during adding, deleting or editing parameters, all data for that particular channel will be lost, because the DAS can store only data of one format (number of parameter columns, etc.) for any given channel. In addition, a DAS configuration can only be uploaded remotely as an entire set of channels. Hence, remote update of the DAS will always delete all current channels and stored data. 166 06864D DCN7562 Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Data Acquisition System (DAS) and APICOM To modify, add or delete a parameter, follow the instruction shown in Section 7.1.4 then press: Starting at the EDIT CHANNEL MENU SETUP X.X 0) CONC: ATIMER 1, 800 PREV NEXT INS DEL EDIT PRNT EXIT SETUP X.X NAME: CONC EDIT EXIT Continue pressing or SET> until ... SETUP X.X PARAMETER:1 EDIT EXIT DAS EDIT – Control Button Functions Button FUNCTION PREV NEXT Selects the previous data channel or parameter Selects the next data channel or parameter Selects the previous property to be edited SET> Selects the next property to be edited\ INS DEL Inserts a new data channel or parameter into the list BEFORE the selected channel Deletes the currently selected data channel or parameter Enters EDIT mode EDIT PRINT Exports the configuration of all data channels to the RS-232 interface Buttons only appear when applicable YES deletes all data currently stored for this data channel and continues into EDIT mode. Toggle these buttons to select a different parameter. Pressing returns to the previous Function. SETUP X.X EDIT PARAMS (DELETE DATA)? YES NO SETUP X.X 0) PARAM=CONC1, MODE=AVG PREV NEXT INS DEL EDIT EXIT NO retains the data and returns to the previous menu. EXIT discards the new setting. ENTR accepts the new setting. SETUP X.X PARAMETER:CONC1 EXIT SETUP X.X PARAMETER:CONC1 PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT Toggle these buttons to cycle through the list of available parameters. SETUP X.X SAMPLE MODE:AVG1 EXIT SETUP X.X PARAMETER:AVG1 INST AVG SDEV MIN MAX ENTR EXIT Press the button for the desired MODE. SETUP X.X PRECISION:1 EXIT SETUP X.X PRECISION:1 4 ENTR EXIT Toggle this button to set from 1 to 4. SETUP X.X STOR NUM SAMPLE:OFF EXIT SETUP X.X STOR NUM SAMPLE:OFF OFF ENTR EXIT Toggle this button to turn ON/OFF. 06864D DCN7562 167 Data Acquisition System (DAS) and APICOM Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer 7.1.7. The DAS defines two principal time periods by which sample readings are taken and permanently recorded: Sample and Report periods. • SAMPLE PERIOD: Determines how often DAS temporarily records a sample reading of the parameter in volatile memory. SAMPLE PERIOD is only used when the DAS parameter’s sample mode is set for AVG , SDEV , MIN or MAX. • The SAMPLE PERIOD is set to one minute by default and generally cannot be accessed from the standard DAS front panel menu, but is available via the instrument’s communication ports by using APICOM or the analyzer’s standard serial data protocol. REPORT PERIOD: Sets how often the sample readings stored in volatile memory are processed, (e.g. average, minimum or maximum are calculated) and the results stored permanently in the instrument’s Disk-on-Module as well as transmitted via the analyzer’s communication ports. The Report Period may be set from the front panel. If the INST sample mode is selected the instrument stores and reports an instantaneous reading of the selected parameter at the end of the chosen report period. 168 06864D DCN7562 Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Data Acquisition System (DAS) and APICOM To define the REPORT PERIOD , follow the instruction shown in Section 7.1.4 then press: Starting at the EDIT CHANNEL MENU Use the PREV and NEXT buttons to scroll to the DATA CHANNEL to be edited. SETUP X.X 0) CONC: ATIMER 1, 800 PREV MEXT INS DEL EDIT PRNT EXIT SETUP X.X NAME: CONC EDIT EXIT Continue pressing SET> until ... SETUP X.X REPORT PERIOD DAYS:0 0 0 0 ENTR EXIT Toggle these buttons to set the days between reports (0 – 366). Press buttons to set hours between reports in the format: HH:MM (max: 23:59). This is a 24 hour clock . PM hours are 13 thru 23, midnight is 00:00. Example 2:15 PM = 14:15 SETUP X.X REPORT PERIOD TIME:01:00 0 1 0 0 ENTR EXIT EXIT discards the new setting. ENTR accepts the new setting. The SAMPLE PERIOD and REPORT PERIOD intervals are synchronized to the beginning and end of the appropriate interval of the instruments internal clock. • If SAMPLE PERIOD were set for one minute the first reading would occur at the beginning of the next full minute according to the instrument’s internal clock. • If the REPORT PERIOD were set for of one hour, the first report activity would occur at the beginning of the next full hour according to the instrument’s internal clock. EXAMPLE: Given the above settings, if the DAS were activated at 7:57:35 the first sample would occur at 7:58 and the first report would be calculated at 8:00 consisting of data points for 7:58, 7:59 and 8:00. During the next hour (from 8:01 to 9:00), the instrument will take a sample reading every minute and include 60 sample readings. 06864D DCN7562 SETUP X.X REPORT PERIOD:000:01:00 EDIT EXIT 169 Data Acquisition System (DAS) and APICOM Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer EPORT ERIODS IN ROGRESS HEN NSTRUMENT S OWERED FF If the instrument is powered off in the middle of a REPORT PERIOD , the samples accumulated so far during that period are lost. Once the instrument is turned back on, the DAS restarts taking samples and temporarily stores them in volatile memory as part of the REPORT PERIOD currently active at the time of restart. At the end of this REPORT PERIOD PERIOD, only the sample readings taken since the instrument was turned back on will be included in any AVG , SDEV , MIN or MAX calculation. Also, the STORE NUM SAMPLES feature will report the number of sample readings taken since the instrument was restarted. 170 06864D DCN7562 Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Data Acquisition System (DAS) and APICOM 7.1.8. The number of data records in the DAS is limited to about a cumulative one million data points in all channels (one megabyte of space on the Disk-on-Module). However, the actual number of records is also limited by the total number of parameters and channels and other settings in the DAS configuration. Every additional data channel, parameter, number of samples setting, etc., will reduce the maximum amount of data points. In general, however, the maximum data capacity is divided amongst all channels (max: 20) and parameters (max: 50 per channel). The DAS will check the amount of available data space and prevent the user from specifying too many records at any given point. If, for example, the DAS memory space can accommodate 375 more data records, the ENTR button will disappear when trying to specify more than that number of records. This check for memory space may also cause the upload of a DAS configuration with APICOM or a terminal program to fail, if the combined number of records would be exceeded. In this case, it is suggested to either try to determine what the maximum number of records available is using the front panel interface or use trial-and-error in designing the DAS script or calculate the number of records using the DAS or APICOM manuals. To set the NUMBER OF RECORDS , follow the instruction shown in Section 7.1.4 then press: . 06864D DCN7562 171 Data Acquisition System (DAS) and APICOM Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Starting at the EDIT CHANNEL MENU SETUP X.X 0) CONC: ATIMER 1, 800 PREV MEXT INS DEL EDIT PRNT EXIT Use the PREV and NEXT keys to scroll to the DATA CHANNEL to be edited. SETUP X.X NAME: CONC EDIT EXIT Continue pressing SET> until ... SETUP X.X NUMBER OF RECORDS:800 EDIT EXIT YES deletes all data currently stored for this data channel and continues into EDIT mode. Toggle these buttons to set the Number of Records to record (0 – 100,000). SETUP X.X EDIT PARAMS (DELETE DATA)? YES NO SETUP X.X NUMBER OF RECORDS:200 0 0 0 2 0 0 ENTR EXIT NO retains the data and returns to the previous menu. EXIT discards the new setting. ENTR accepts the new setting. 172 06864D DCN7562 Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Data Acquisition System (DAS) and APICOM 7.1.9. The DAS can automatically report data to the communications ports, where they can be captured with a terminal emulation program or simply viewed by the user using the APICOM software. To enable automatic COMM port reporting, follow the instruction shown in Section Starting at the EDIT CHANNEL MENU Use the PREV and NEXT buttons to scroll to the DATA CHANNEL to be edited. SETUP X.X 0) CONC: ATIMER 1, 800 PREV MEXT INS DEL EDIT PRNT EXIT SETUP X.X NAME: CONC EDIT EXIT Continue pressing SET> until ... SETUP X.X RS-232 REPORT: OFF EDIT EXIT Toggle these buttons to turn the RS-232 REPORT feature ON/OFF. SETUP X.X RS-232 REPORT: OFF OFF ENTR EXIT EXIT discards the new setting. ENTR accepts the new setting. 7.1.9.1. When enabled, this option avoids unnecessary line breaks on all RS-232 reports. Instead of reporting each parameter in one channel on a separate line, up to five parameters are reported in one line. The COMPACT DATA REPORT generally cannot be accessed from the standard DAS front panel menu, but is available via the instrument’s communication ports by using APICOM or the analyzer’s standard serial data protocol. 06864D DCN7562 173 Data Acquisition System (DAS) and APICOM Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer 7.1.9.2. This option allows the user to specify a starting date for any given channel in case the user wants to start data acquisition only after a certain time and date. If the STARTING DATE is in the past (the default condition), the DAS ignores this setting and begins recording data as defined by the REPORT PERIOD setting. The STARTING DATE generally cannot be accessed from the standard DAS front panel menu, but is available via the instrument’s communication ports by using APICOM or the analyzer’s standard serial data protocol. 7.1.10. Data channels can be temporarily disabled, which can reduce the read/write wear on the Disk-on-Module. To disable a data channel, follow the instruction shown in Section 7.1.4 then press: Starting at the EDIT CHANNEL MENU Use the PREV and NEXT bttons to scroll to the DATA CHANNEL to be edited. SETUP X.X 0) CONC: ATIMER 1, 800 PREV MEXT INS DEL EDIT PRNT EXIT SETUP X.X NAME: CONC EDIT PRNT EXIT Continue pressing SET> until ... SETUP X.X CHANNEL ENABLE:ON EDIT EXIT Toggle these buttons to enable or disable the CHANNEL. SETUP X.X CHANNEL ENABLE:ON ON ENTR EXIT EXIT discards the new setting. ENTR accepts the new setting. 174 06864D DCN7562 Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Data Acquisition System (DAS) and APICOM 7.1.11. The DAS HOLDOFF feature prevents data collection during calibration operations and at certain times when the quality of the analyzer’s CO measurements may not be certain (e.g. while the instrument is warming up). In this case, the length of time that the HOLDOFF feature is active is determined by the value of the internal variable ( VARS ), DAS_HOLDOFF. To set the length of the DAS_HOLDOFF period, go to the SETUP>MORE>VARS menu (Section 5.8) and EDIT the “0) DAS_HOLD_OFF…” parameter. To enable or disable the HOLDOFF feature for an individual channel, follow the instruction shown in Section 7.1.4 then press: Starting at the EDIT CHANNEL MENU Use the PREV and NEXT buttons to scroll to the DATA CHANNEL to be edited. SETUP X.X 0) CONC: ATIMER 1, 800 PREV MEXT INS DEL EDIT PRNT EXIT SETUP X.X NAME: CONC EDIT EXIT Continue pressing SET> until ... SETUP X.X CAL.HOLD OFF: OFF EDIT EXIT Toggle these buttons to turn the HOLDOFF feature ON/OFF. SETUP X.X CAL.HOLD OFF: OFF OFF ENTR EXIT EXIT discards the new setting. ENTR accepts the new setting. 06864D DCN7562 175 Data Acquisition System (DAS) and APICOM Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer 7.2. The DAS can be configured and operated remotely via either the APICOM interface or a terminal emulation program. Once a DAS configuration is edited (which can be done offline and without interrupting DAS data collection), it is conveniently uploaded to the instrument and can be stored on a computer for later review, alteration or documentation and archival. 7.2.1. Figure 7-2 shows examples of APICOM’s main interface, which emulates the look and functionality of the instrument’s actual front panel. Figure 7-3 shows an example of APICOM being used to remotely configure the DAS feature. The APICOM user manual (Teledyne API’s P/N 039450000) is included in the APICOM installation file, which can be downloaded at http://www.teledyne api.com/software/apicom/. 176 Figure 7-2: APICOM Remote Control Program Interface 06864D DCN7562 Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Data Acquisition System (DAS) and APICOM 06864D DCN7562 Figure 7-3: APICOM User Interface for Configuring the DAS Once a DAS configuration is edited (which can be done offline and without interrupting DAS data collection), it is conveniently uploaded to the instrument and can be stored on a computer for later review, alteration or documentation and archival. Refer to the APICOM manual for details on these procedures. The APICOM user manual (Teledyne API’s P/N 039450000) is included in the APICOM installation file, which can be downloaded at http://www.teledyne-api.com/manuals/. 177 Data Acquisition System (DAS) and APICOM Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer 7.2.2. Although Teledyne API recommends the use of APICOM, the DAS can also be accessed and configured through a terminal emulation program such as HyperTerminal To do this: • • All configuration commands must be created and edited off line (e.g. cut & pasted in from a text file or word processor) following a strict syntax (see below for example). The script is then uploaded via the instrument’s RS-232 port(s). I MPORTANT Figure 7-4: DAS Configuration Through a Terminal Emulation Program Both of the above steps are best started by: 1. Downloading the default DAS configuration. 2. Getting familiar with its command structure and syntax conventions. 3. Altering a copy of the original file offline. 4. Uploading the new configuration into the analyzer. MPACT ON EADINGS OR ATA 178 06864D DCN7562 Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Data Acquisition System (DAS) and APICOM Refer to Section 8.2.1 for details on remote access to and from the T300/T300M Analyzer via the instrument’s COMM ports. 06864D DCN7562 179 06864D DCN7562 This section provides information needed when using external digital and serial I/O for remote operation. It assumes that the electrical connections have been made as described The T300 can be remotely configured, calibrated or queried for stored data through the rear panel serial ports, via either Computer mode (using a personal computer) or Interactive mode (using a terminal emulation program). 8.1. Computer mode is used when the analyzer is connected to a computer with a dedicated interface program such as APICOM. 8.1.1. APICOM is an easy-to-use, yet powerful interface program that allows a user to access and control any of Teledyne API’s main line of ambient and stack-gas instruments from a remote connection through direct cable, modem or Ethernet. Running APICOM, a user can: • Establish a link from a remote location to the T300 through direct cable connection via RS-232 modem or Ethernet. • View the instrument’s front panel and remotely access all functions that could be accessed manually on the instrument. • • • Remotely edit system parameters and set points. Download, view, graph and save data for predictive diagnostics or data analysis. Retrieve, view, edit, save and upload DAS configurations (Section 7.2.1). • Check on system parameters for trouble-shooting and quality control. APICOM is very helpful for initial setup, data analysis, maintenance and troubleshooting. Refer to the APICOM manual available for download from http://www.teledyne-api.com/software/apicom/. 06864D DCN7562 181 Remote Operation Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer 8.2. Interactive mode is used with a terminal emulation programs or a “dumb” computer terminal. 8.2.1. Start a terminal emulation program such as HyperTerminal. All configuration commands must be created following a strict syntax or be pasted in from an existing text file, which was edited offline and then uploaded through a specific transfer procedure. The commands that are used to operate the analyzer in this mode are listed in Table 8-1 and in Appendix A. 8.2.1.1. Table 8-1: Interactive Mode Software Commands COMMAND Control-T Control-C CR(carriage return) BS (backspace) ESC(escape) ?[ID] CR Function Switches the analyzer to terminal mode (echo, edit). If mode flags 1 & 2 are OFF, the interface can be used in interactive mode with a terminal emulation program. Switches the analyzer to computer mode (no echo, no edit). A carriage return is required after each command line is typed into the terminal/computer. The command will not be sent to the analyzer to be executed until this is done. On personal computers, this is achieved by pressing the ENTER button. Erases one character to the left of the cursor location. Erases the entire command line. This command prints a complete list of available commands along with the definitions of their functionality to the display device of the terminal or computer being used. The ID number of the analyzer is only necessary if multiple analyzers are on the same communications line, such as the multi-drop setup. 8.2.1.2. Commands are not case-sensitive and all arguments within one command (i.e. ID numbers, key words, data values, etc.) must be separated with a space character. All Commands follow the syntax: X [ID] COMMAND Where X [ID] is the command type (one letter) that defines the type of command. Allowed designators are listed in Appendix A-6. is the machine identification number (Section 5.7.1). Example: the Command “? 700” followed by a carriage return would print the list of available commands for the revision of software currently installed in the instrument assigned ID Number 700. COMMAND is the command designator: This string is the name of the command being issued (LIST, ABORT, NAME, EXIT, etc.). Some commands may have additional arguments that define how the command is to be executed. Press ? Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Remote Operation Table 8-2: Teledyne API’s Serial I/O Command Types COMMAND C D L T V W COMMAND TYPE Calibration Diagnostic Logon Test measurement Variable Warning 8.2.1.3. Data types consist of integers, hexadecimal integers, floating-point numbers, Boolean expressions and text strings. Integer data : Used to indicate integral quantities such as a number of records, a filter length, etc. • They consist of an optional plus or minus sign, followed by one or more digits. • For example, +1, -12, 123 are all valid integers. Hexadecimal integer data : Used for the same purposes as integers. • They consist of the two characters “0x,” followed by one or more hexadecimal digits (0-9, A-F, a-f), which is the ‘C’ programming language convention. • No plus or minus sign is permitted. • For example, 0x1, 0x12, 0x1234abcd are all valid hexadecimal integers. Floating-point number : Used to specify continuously variable values such as temperature set points, time intervals, warning limits, voltages, etc. • They consist of an optional plus or minus sign, followed by zero or more digits, an optional decimal point and zero or more digits. • • At least one digit must appear before or after the decimal point. Scientific notation is not permitted. • For example, +1.0, 1234.5678, -0.1, 1 are all valid floating-point numbers. Boolean expressions : Used to specify the value of variables or I/O signals that may assume only two values. • They are denoted by the key words ON and OFF . Text strings : Used to represent data that cannot be easily represented by other data types, such as data channel names, which may contain letters and numbers. • They consist of a quotation mark, followed by one or more printable characters, including spaces, letters, numbers, and symbols, and a final quotation mark. • • For example, “a”, “1”, “123abc”, and “()[]<>” are all valid text strings. It is not possible to include a quotation mark character within a text string. Some commands allow you to access variables, messages, and other items. When using these commands, • • you must type the entire name of the item you cannot abbreviate any names. 06864D DCN7562 183 Remote Operation Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer 8.2.1.4. Reporting of status messages as an audit trail is one of the three principal uses for the RS-232 interface (the other two being the command line interface for controlling the instrument and the download of data in electronic format). You can effectively disable the reporting feature by setting the interface to quiet mode (see Section 6.2.1, Table 6-1). Status reports include warning messages, calibration and diagnostic status messages. Refer to Appendix A-3 for a list of the possible messages, and this for information on controlling the instrument through the RS-232 interface. 8.2.1.5. All messages from the instrument (including those in response to a command line request) are in the format: X DDD:HH:MM [Id] MESSAGE Where: X DDD:HH:MM [ID] MESSAGE is a command type designator, a single character indicating the message type, as shown in the Table 8-2. is the time stamp, the date and time when the message was issued. It consists of the Day-of-year (DDD) as a number from 1 to 366, the hour of the day (HH) as a number from 00 to 23, and the minute (MM) as a number from 00 to 59. is the analyzer ID, a number with 1 to 4 digits. is the message content that may contain warning messages, test measurements, variable values, etc. is a carriage return / line feed pair, which terminates the message. 8.3. The T300/T300M can be connected to a modem for remote access. This requires a cable between the analyzer’s COMM port and the modem, typically a DB-9F to DB-25M cable (available from Teledyne API with P/N WR0000024). Once the cable has been connected, check to make sure: • • The DTE-DCE is in the DCE position. The T300/T300M COMM port is set for a baud rate that is compatible with the modem, • • The modem is designed to operate with an 8-bit word length with one stop bit. The MODEM ENABLE communication mode is turned on (Mode 64, see Table 6-1). 184 06864D DCN7562 Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Remote Operation Once this is completed, the appropriate setup command line for your modem can be entered into the analyzer. The default setting for this feature is: AT Y0 &D0 &H0 &I0 S0=2 &B0 &N6 &M0 E0 Q1 &W0 This string can be altered to match your modem’s initialization and can be up to 100 characters long. To change this setting press: SAMPLE RANGE=500.0 PPB NOX= XXXX Concentration display through all gasses. SETUP X.X PRIMARY SETUP MENU CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT SETUP X.X SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMM VARS DIAG EXIT SETUP X.X COM1 MODE:0 EDIT EXIT Continue pressing or SET> until ... SETUP X.X COMMUNICATIONS MENU ID COM1 COM2 EXIT SETUP X.X COM1 PORT INIT:AT Y0 &DO &H &I0 SETUP X.X COM1 PORT INIT:AT Y0 &DO &H &I0 The and CH> buttons move the cursor left and right along the text string. The INS and CH> button inserts a new character before the cursor position. The DEL button deletes character at the cursor position. EXIT discards the new setting. ENTR accepts the new setting. Toggle this button to cycle through the available character set: • Alpha: A-Z (Upper and Lower Case); • Special Characters: space ’ ~ ! # $ % ^ & * ( ) - _ = +[ ] { } < > | ; : , . / ? • Numerals: 0-9 06864D DCN7562 185 Remote Operation To initialize the modem press: Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Test Runs Automatically. SAMPLE RANGE=50.0 PPM CO= XX.XX SETUP X.X COM1: INITIALIZE MODEM EXIT 186 06864D DCN7562 Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Remote Operation 8.4. • • • • • In order to provide security for remote access of the T300/T300M, a LOGON feature can be enabled to require a password before the instrument will accept commands. This is done by turning on the SECURITY MODE SECURITY MODE is enabled, the following items apply. • • A password is required before the port will respond or pass on commands. If the port is inactive for one hour, it will automatically logoff, which can also be achieved with the LOGOFF command. • Three unsuccessful attempts to log on with an incorrect password will cause subsequent logins to be disabled for 1 hour, even if the correct password is used. If not logged on, the only active command is the '?' request for the help screen. The following messages will be returned at logon: LOGON SUCCESSFUL - Correct password given LOGON FAILED - Password not given or incorrect LOGOFF SUCCESSFUL - Connection terminated successfully To log on to the T300/T300M Analyzer with SECURITY MODE feature enabled, type: LOGON 940331 940331 is the default password. To change the default password, use the variable RS 232_PASS issued as follows: V RS-232_PASS=NNNNNN Where N is any numeral between 0 and 9. 06864D DCN7562 187 Remote Operation Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer This page intentionally left blank. 188 06864D DCN7562 This section describes the calibration procedures for the T300/T300M. All of the methods described in this section can be initiated and controlled through the COM ports. I MPORTANT MPACT ON EADINGS OR ATA Error! Reference source not found. 9.1. The calibration procedures in this section assume that the range mode, analog range and units of measure have already been selected for the analyzer. If this has not been done, please do so before continuing (see Section 5.7 for instructions). 9.1.1. Calibration of the T300/T300M Analyzer requires specific equipment and supplies. These include, but are not limited to, the following: • • • Zero-air source Span gas source Gas lines - All Gas lines should be PTFE (Teflon), FEP, glass, stainless steel or brass • A recording device such as a strip-chart recorder and/or data logger (optional) (For electronic documentation, the internal data acquisition system DAS can be used). • Traceability Standards 06864D DCN7562 189 Calibration Procedures Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer 9.1.1.1. Zero air or zero calibration gas is defined as a gas that is similar in chemical composition to the measured medium but without the gas to be measured by the analyzer. For the T300/T300M zero air should contain less than 25 ppb of CO and other major interfering gases such as CO and Water Vapor. It should have a dew point of -5 ° C or less. If your application is not a measurement in ambient air, the zero calibration gas should be matched to the composition of the gas being measured. • Pure nitrogen (N 2 ) can be used as a zero gas for applications where CO is measured in nitrogen. • If your analyzer is equipped with an external zero air scrubber option, it is capable of creating zero air from ambient air. For analyzers without the zero air scrubber, a zero air generator such as the Teledyne API’s T701 can be used. Please visit the company website for more information. 9.1.1.2. Span Gas is a gas specifically mixed to match the chemical composition of the type of gas being measured at near full scale of the desired measurement range. It is recommended that the span gas used have a concentration equal to 80-90% of the full measurement range. If Span Gas is sourced directly from a calibrated, pressurized tank, the gas mixture should be CO mixed with Zero Air or N 2 at the required ratio. For oxygen measurements using the optional O 2 sensor, we recommend a reference gas of 21% O 2 in N 2 . • • For quick checks, ambient air can be used at an assumed concentration of 20.8%. Generally, O 2 concentration in dry, ambient air varies by less than 1%. 9.1.1.3. All equipment used to produce calibration gases should be verified against standards of the National Institute for Standards and Technology (NIST). To ensure NIST traceability, we recommend to acquire cylinders of working gas that are certified to be traceable to NIST Standard Reference Materials (SRM). These are available from a variety of commercial sources. Table 9-1: NIST-SRM NIST-SRMs Available for Traceability of CO Calibration Gases Type Nominal Concentration 680b 1681b 2613a 2614a CO in N 2 CO in N 2 CO in Zero Air CO in Zero Air 500 ppm 1000 ppm 20 ppm 45 ppm 2659a1 2626a O 2 in N 2 CO 2 in N 2 21% by weight 4% by weight 27452 CO 2 in N 2 16% by weight 1 Used to calibrate optional O 2 sensor. 2 Used to calibrate optional CO 2 sensor. It is generally a good idea to use 80% of the reporting range for that channel for the span point calibration. For instance, if the reporting range of the instrument is set for 50.0 PPM, the proper span gas would be 40.0 PPM. 190 06864D DCN7562 Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Calibration Procedures 9.1.2. A strip chart recorder, data acquisition system or digital data acquisition system should be used to record data from the serial or analog outputs of the T300/T300M. • If analog readings are used, the response of the recording system should be checked against a NIST traceable voltage source or meter. • Data recording devices should be capable of bi-polar operation so that negative readings can be recorded. • For electronic data recording, the T300/T300M provides an internal data acquisition system (DAS), which is described in detail in Section 7. APICOM, a remote control program, is also provided as a convenient and powerful tool for data handling, download, storage, quick check and plotting (see Section 7.2.1). 9.2. I MPORTANT I MPACT ON R EADINGS OR D ATA ZERO/SPAN CALIBRATION CHECKS VS. ZERO/SPAN CALIBRATION Pressing the ENTR button during the following procedure resets the stored values for OFFSET and SLOPE and alters the instrument’s Calibration. This should ONLY BE DONE during an actual calibration of the T300/T300M. NEVER press the ENTR button if you are only checking calibration. If you wish to perform a calibration CHECK, do not press ENTR and refer to Section 9.2.2. 06864D DCN7562 191 Calibration Procedures Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Calibrated CO Gas at span gas concentration 9.2.1. STEP ONE: Connect the Sources of Zero Air and Span Gas as shown below. Source of SAMPLE GAS Removed during calibration VENT here if input is pressurized MODEL 701 Zero Gas Generator VENT SAMPLE EXHAUST VENT SPAN PRESSURE SPAN ZERO AIR Instrument Chassis Figure 9-1: Pneumatic Connections – Basic Configuration – Using Bottled Span Gas Calibrated CO Gas at span gas concentration Model 700 Gas Dilution Calibrator Source of SAMPLE GAS Removed during calibration VENT here if input is pressurized 192 MODEL 701 Zero Gas Generator SAMPLE EXHAUST VENT SPAN PRESSURE SPAN ZERO AIR Instrument Chassis Figure 9-2: Pneumatic Connections – Basic Configuration – Using Gas Dilution Calibrator 06864D DCN7562 Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Calibration Procedures 9.2.2. Analyzer display continues to cycle through all of the available gas measurements throughout this procedure. SAMPLE RANGE=50.0PPM CO=XX.XX < TST TST > CAL MSG SETUP Toggle TST> button until ... SAMPLE STABIL= XXXX PPM CO=XX.XX < TST TST > CAL SETUP Set the Display to show the STABIL test function. This function calculates the stability of the CO measurement. Allow zero gas to enter the sample port at the rear of the analyzer. Wait until STABIL falls below or 0.2 PPM (for T300) or 1.0 PPM (for T300M). This may take several minutes. Record CO zero point readings Allow span gas to enter the sample port at the rear of the analyzer. Wait until STABIL falls below 0.2 PPM (for T300) or 1.0 PPM (for T300M). This may take several minutes. Record CO span point readings\ The ZERO and/or SPAN keys will appear at various points of this process. It is not necessary to press them. 06864D DCN7562 193 Calibration Procedures Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer 9.2.3. The following section describes the basic method for manually calibrating the T300/T300M. If the analyzer’s reporting range is set for the AUTO range mode, a step will appear for selecting which range is to be calibrated ( LOW or HIGH ). Each of these two ranges MUST be calibrated separately. I MPORTANT MPACT ON EADINGS OR ATA 9.2.3.1. The expected CO span gas concentration should be 80% of the reporting range of the instrument (see Section 5.4.1). The default factory setting is 40 ppm. To set the span gas concentration, press: 194 06864D DCN7562 Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Calibration Procedures SAMPLE RANGE=50.0PPM CO=XX.XX < TST TST > CAL MSG SETUP SAMPLE CO O2 GAS TO CAL:CO ENTR EXIT Only appears if either the O2 or CO2 Sensors are installed. SAMPLE LOW HIGH RANGE TO CAL:LOW ENTR EXIT Only appears if the DUAL or AUTO range modes are selected. Use these buttons to choose the appropriate range. Repeat entire procedure for each range. M-P CAL RANGE=50.0PPM CO=XX.XX CONC EXIT I The CO span concentration value is automatically default to 4 0.0 Conc . If this is not the the concentration of the span gas being used, toggle these buttons to set the correct concentration of the CO calibration gas. M-P CAL CO SPAN CONC:40.0 Conc 0 0 4 0 .0 0 ENTR EXIT EXIT ignores the new setting and returns to the previous display. ENTR accepts the new setting and returns to the CONCENTRATION MENU. MPORTANT MPACT ON EADINGS OR ATA 06864D DCN7562 195 Calibration Procedures Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer 9.2.3.2. SAMPLE RANGE=50.0PPM CO=XX.XX < TST TST > CAL MSG SETUP On instruments with a O 2 or CO 2 sensor installed the analyzer will simultaneously display the gas measurements throughout this procedure. Toggle TST> button until ... SAMPLE STABIL= XXXX PPM CO=XXXX < TST TST > CAL MSG SETUP Allow zero gas to enter the sample port at the rear of the analyzer. 196 Only appears if the DUAL or AUTO range modes are selected. Use these buttons to choose the appropriate range. Repeat entire procedure for each range. The SPAN button now appears during the transition from zero to span. You may see both buttons. If either the ZERO or SPAN buttons fail to appear see Section 11 for troubleshooting tips. Set the Display to show the STABIL test function. This function calculates the stability of the CO measurement. SAMPLE STABIL= XXXX PPM CO=XXXX < TST TST > CAL SETUP SAMPLE CO CO2 GAS TO CAL:CO O2 ENTR EXIT SAMPLE RANGE TO CAL:LOW LOW HIGH ENTR EXIT M-P CAL STABIL= XXXX PPM CO=XXXX ZERO CONC EXIT M-P CAL STABIL= XXXX PPM CO=X.XXX ENTR CONC EXIT Allow span gas to enter the sample port at the rear of the analyzer. SAMPLE STABIL= XXXX PPM CO=XXXX < TST TST > CAL SETUP SAMPLE CO O2 GAS TO CAL:CO ENTR EXIT SAMPLE LOW HIGH RANGE TO CAL:LOW ENTR EXIT M-P CAL STABIL= XXXX PPM CO=X.XXX SPAN CONC EXIT M-P CAL STABIL= XXXX PPM CO=X.XXX ENTR CONC EXIT M-P CAL STABIL= XXXX PPM CO=X.XXX EXIT Wait until STABIL falls below 0.2 PPM (for T300) or 1.0 PPM (for T300M). This may take several minutes. Only appears if either the O2 or CO2 Sensors are installed. Press ENTR to changes the OFFSET & SLOPE values for the CO measurement. Press EXIT to leave the calibration unchanged and return to the previous menu. O Wait until STABIL falls below 0.2 PPM (for T300) or 1.0 PPM (for T300M). This may take several minutes. Only appears if either the 2 or the CO 2 sensor is installed. Press ENTR to change the OFFSET & SLOPE values for the CO measurement. Press EXIT to leave the calibration unchanged and return to the previous menu. EXIT at this point returns to the SAMPLE menu. 06864D DCN7562 Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Calibration Procedures 9.3. There are a variety of valve options available on the T300/T300M for handling calibration gases (see Table 1-1 for descriptions of each). Generally performing calibration checks and zero/span point calibrations on analyzers with these options installed is similar to the methods discussed in the previous sections of this section. The primary differences are: • On instruments with Z/S valve options, zero air and span gas is supplied to the analyzer through other gas inlets besides the sample gas inlet. • The zero and span calibration operations are initiated directly and independently with dedicated buttons ( CALZ & CALS ). 9.3.1. Each of the various calibration valve options requires a different pneumatic setup that is dependent on the exact nature and number of valves present. Source of SAMPLE GAS Removed during calibration VENT here if input is pressurized Calibrated CO Gas at span gas concentration Model 700 gas Dilution Calibrator VENT SAMPLE EXHAUST VENT SPAN PRESSURE SPAN Instrument Chassis ZERO AIR MODEL 701 Zero Gas Generator Figure 9-3: VENT Pneumatic Connections – Option 50A: Ambient Zero/Ambient Span Calibration Valves 06864D DCN7562 197 Calibration Procedures Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Source of SAMPLE GAS Removed during calibration VENT here if input is pressurized Calibrated CO Gas at span gas concentration VENT SAMPLE EXHAUST VENT SPAN Instrument Chassis Figure 9-4: MODEL 701 Zero Gas Generator PRESSURE SPAN ZERO AIR Pneumatic Connections – Option 50B: Ambient Zero/Pressurized Span Calibration Valves Source of SAMPLE GAS Removed during calibration VENT here if input is pressurized Calibrated CO Gas at span gas concentration Model 700 gas Dilution Calibrator Instrument Chassis VENT SAMPLE EXHAUST VENT SPAN PRESSURE SPAN ZERO AIR Figure 9-5: Pneumatic Connections – Option 50H: Zero/Span Calibration Valves 198 06864D DCN7562 Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Source of SAMPLE GAS Removed during calibration Calibrated CO Gas at span gas concentration VENT Calibration Procedures VENT here if input is pressurized Instrument Chassis SAMPLE EXHAUST VENT SPAN PRESSURE SPAN ZERO AIR Figure 9-6: Pneumatic Connections – Option 50E: Zero/Span Calibration Valves 06864D DCN7562 199 Calibration Procedures Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer 9.3.2. Front panel display shows all of the available gas measurements throughout this procedure. SAMPLE RANGE=50.0PPM CO=XX.XX < TST TST > CAL CALZ CALS SETUP Toggle TST> button until ... Set the Display to show the STABIL test function. This function calculates the stability of the CO measurement SAMPLE STABIL= XXXX PPM CO=XXXX < TST TST > CAL CALZ CALS SETUP Allow zero gas to enter the sample port at the rear of the analyzer. Wait until STABIL falls below 0.2 PPM (for T300) or 1.0 PPM (for T300M). This may take several minutes. Record CO zero point readings Allow span gas to enter the sample port at the rear of the analyzer. Wait until STABIL falls below 0.2 PPM (for T300) or 1.0 PPM (for T300M). This may take several minutes. Record CO span point readings. The ZERO and/or SPAN buttons will appear at various points of this process. It is not necessary to press them. 200 06864D DCN7562 Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Calibration Procedures 9.3.3. The following section describes the basic method for manually calibrating the T300/T300M Analyzer. If the analyzer’s reporting range is set for the DUAL or AUTO range modes, a step will appear for selecting which range is to be calibrated ( LOW or HIGH ). I MPORTANT MPACT ON EADINGS OR ATA 9.3.3.1. The expected CO span gas concentration should be 80% of the reporting range of the instrument (see Section 5.4.1). The default factory setting is 40 ppm. To set the span gas concentration, press: 06864D DCN7562 201 Calibration Procedures Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer SAMPLE RANGE=50.0PPM CO=XX.XX < TST TST > CAL CALZ CALS SETUP SAMPLE CO O2 GAS TO CAL:CO ENTR EXIT Only appears if either the O 2 or or the CO 2 sensor is installed. SAMPLE LOW HIGH RANGE TO CAL:LOW ENTR EXIT Only appears if the DUAL or AUTO range modes are selected. Use these buttons to choose the appropriate range. Repeat entire procedure for each range. M-P CAL RANGE=50.0PPM CO=XX.XX CONC EXIT I The default CO span concentration value is 4 0.0 Conc . If this is not the the concentration of the span gas being used, toggle these buttons to set the correct concentration of the CO calibration gas. M-P CAL CO SPAN CONC:40.0 Conc 0 0 4 0 .0 0 ENTR EXIT EXIT ignores the new setting and returns to the previous display. ENTR accepts the new setting and returns to the CONCENTRATION MENU. MPORTANT MPACT ON EADINGS OR ATA 9.3.3.2. The zero and cal operations are initiated directly and independently with dedicated buttons ( CALZ & CALS ). 202 06864D DCN7562 Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Calibration Procedures SAMPLE RANGE=50.0PPM CO=XX.XX < TST TST > CAL CALZ CALS SETUP Front panel display simultaneously shows CO, NO, and NO 2 measurements throughout this procedure. Toggle TST> button until ... SAMPLE STABIL= XXXX PPM CO=XXXX < TST TST > CAL CALZ CALS SETUP Allow zero gas to enter the sample port at the rear of the analyzer. Set the Display to show the STABIL test function. This function calculates the stability of the NO/CO measurement. Only appears if the DUAL or AUTO range modes are selected. Use these buttons to choose the appropriate range. Repeat entire procedure for each range. SAMPLE STABIL= XXXX PPM CO=XXXX < TST TST > CAL CALZ CALS SETUP SAMPLE CO O2 GAS TO CAL:CO ENTR EXIT SAMPLE RANGE TO CAL:LOW LOW HIGH ENTR EXIT ZERO CAL M STABIL= XXXX PPM CO=XXXX ZERO CONC EXIT ZERO CAL M STABIL= XXXX PPM ENTR CONC CO=XXXX Allow span gas to enter the sample port at the rear of the analyzer. EXIT Only appears if either the O2 or the CO2 sensor is installed. SAMPLE STABIL= XXXX PPM CO=XXXX < TST TST > CAL CALZ CALS SETUP SAMPLE CO O2 GAS TO CAL:CO ENTR EXIT SAMPLE LOW HIGH RANGE TO CAL:LOW ENTR EXIT SPAN CAL M STABIL= XXXX PPM CO=X.XXX SPAN CONC EXIT SPAN CAL M STABIL= XXXX PPM CO=X.XXX ENTR CONC EXIT SPAN CAL M STABIL= XXXX PPM CO=X.XXX EXIT EXIT at this point returns to the SAMPLE menu. O 2 Wait until STABIL falls below 0.2 PPM (for T300) or 1.0 PPM (for T300M). This may take several minutes. Only appears if either the or the CO 2 sensor is installed. Analyzers enters ZERO cal mode . Press ENTR to change the OFFSET & SLOPE values for the CO measurement. Press EXIT to leave the calibration unchanged and return to the previous menu. Wait until STABIL falls below 0.2 PPM (for T300) or 1.0 PPM (for T300M). This may take several minutes. When the analyzer enters SPAN cal mode, the button appears. SPAN You may see both buttons during the transition from ZERO to SPAN modes. If either the ZERO or SPAN button fails to appear see Section 11 for troubleshooting tips. Press the ENTR OFFSET Press EXIT to change & SLOPE values for the CO measurement. return to the previous menu. to leave the calibration unchanged and 06864D DCN7562 203 Calibration Procedures Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer 9.3.3.3. Contact closures for controlling calibration and calibration checks are located on the rear panel CONTROL IN connector. Instructions for setup and use of these contacts can be When the appropriate contacts are closed for at least 5 seconds, the instrument switches into zero, or span calibration mode and any internal zero/span valves installed will be automatically switched to the appropriate configuration. • • The remote calibration contact closures may be activated in any order. It is recommended that contact closures remain closed for at least 10 minutes to establish a reliable reading. • The instrument will stay in the selected mode for as long as the contacts remain closed. If contact closures are being used in conjunction with the analyzer’s AutoCal (see Section 9.4) feature and the AutoCal attribute “ CALIBRATE” is enabled, the T300/T300M will not recalibrate the analyzer until the contact is opened. At this point, the new calibration values will be recorded before the instrument returns to Sample Mode . If the AutoCal attribute “ CALIBRATE” is disabled, the instrument will return to Sample Mode , leaving the instrument’s internal calibration variables unchanged. 9.4. The AutoCal system allows unattended periodic operation of the Z ERO/SPAN valve options by using the T300/T300M Analyzer’s internal time of day clock. AutoCal operates by executing SEQUENCES programmed by the user to initiate the various calibration modes of the analyzer and open and close valves appropriately. It is possible to program and run up to three separate sequences ( SEQ1 , SEQ2 and SEQ3 ). Each sequence can operate in one of three modes, or be disabled. Table 9-2: AUTOCAL Modes MODE NAME DISABLED ZERO ACTION Disables the Sequence. Causes the Sequence to perform a Zero calibration/check. ZERO-SPAN SPAN Causes the Sequence to perform a Zero point calibration/check followed by a Span point calibration/check. Causes the Sequence to perform a Span concentration calibration/check only. 204 06864D DCN7562 Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Calibration Procedures For each mode, there are seven parameters that control operational details of the Table 9-3: AutoCal Attribute Setup Parameters ATTRIBUTE TIMER ENABLED STARTING DATE STARTING TIME DELTA DAYS DELTA TIME DURATION CALIBRATE RANGE TO CAL ACTION Turns on the Sequence timer. Sequence will operate after Starting Date. Time of day sequence will run. Number of days to skip between each Sequence execution. • If set to 7, for example, the AutoCal feature will be enabled once every week on the same day. Number of hours later each “Delta Days” Seq is to be run. • If set to 0, the sequence will start at the same time each day. Delta Time is added to Delta Days for the total time between cycles. • This parameter prevents the analyzer from being calibrated at the same daytime of each calibration day and prevents a lack of data for one particular daytime on the days of calibration. Number of minutes the sequence operates. • This parameter needs to be set such that there is enough time for the concentration signal to stabilize. • The STB parameter shows if the analyzer response is stable at the end of the calibration. • This parameter is logged with calibration values in the DAS. Enable to do a calibration – Disable to do a cal check only. • This setting must be OFF for analyzers used in US EPA applications and with internal span gas generators installed and functioning. LOW calibrates the low range, HIGH calibrates the high range. Applies only to auto and remote range modes; this property is not available in single and independent range modes. 06864D DCN7562 205 Calibration Procedures Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer The following example sets sequence #2 to do a zero-span calibration every other day starting at 2:15 PM on September 4, 2008, lasting 15 minutes, without calibration. This will start ½ hour later each iteration. Table 9-4: Example AutoCal Sequence MODE AND ATTRIBUTE SEQUENCE VALUE 2 MODE TIMER ENABLE STARTING DATE ZERO-SPAN ON Sept. 4, 2008 STARTING TIME DELTA DAYS DELTA TIME DURATION CALIBRATE 14:15 2 00:30 30.0 ON COMMENT Define Sequence #2 Select Zero and Span Mode Enable the timer Start after Sept 4, 2008 First Span starts at 2:15 PM Do Sequence #2 every other day Do Sequence #2 ½ hr later each day Operate Span valve for 15 min Calibrate at end of Sequence I MPORTANT I MPORTANT MPACT ON EADINGS OR ATA MPACT ON EADINGS OR ATA 206 06864D DCN7562 Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Calibration Procedures 9.4.1. à To program the example sequence shown in Table 9-4, press: 06864D DCN7562 207 Calibration Procedures Toggle buttons to set Day, Month & Year: Format : DD-MON-YY Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer SAMPLE RANGE = 50.0 PPM CO=XX.XX < TST TST > CAL CALZ CZLS SETUP SETUP X.X CFG ACAL DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT SETUP X.X SEQ 1) DISABLED NEXT MODE EXIT SETUP X.X SEQ 2) DISABLED PREV NEXT MODE EXIT SETUP X.X MODE: DISABLED NEXT ENTR EXIT SETUP X.X MODE: ZERO PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT SETUP X.X MODE: ZERO–SPAN PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT SETUP X.X SEQ 2) ZERO–SPAN, 1:00:00 PREV NEXT MODE SET EXIT SETUP X.X TIMER ENABLE: ON SET> EDIT EXIT SETUP X.X STARTING DATE: 01–JAN–07 EDIT EXIT SETUP X.X STARTING DATE: 01–JAN–02 0 4 SEP 0 8 ENTR EXIT CONTINUE NEXT PAGE With STARTING TIME 208 06864D DCN7562 Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Calibration Procedures CONTINUED FROM PREVIOUS PAGE - STARTING DATE Toggle buttons to set time: Format : HH:MM This is a 24 hr clock . PM hours are 13 – 24. Example 2:15 PM = 14:15 Toggle buttons to set number of days between procedures (1-365). Toggle buttons to set delay time for each iteration of the sequence: HH:MM (0 – 24:00) SETUP X.X STARTING DATE: 04–SEP–08 SET> EDIT EXIT SETUP X.X STARTING TIME:00:00 EDIT EXIT SETUP X.X STARTING TIME:00:00 1 4 : 1 5 SETUP X.X STARTING TIME:14:15 SET> SETUP X.X EDIT DELTA DAYS: 1 EDIT DELTA DAYS: 1 0 0 2 SETUP X.X DELTA DAYS:2 SET> EDIT ENTR EXIT ENTR EXIT EXIT EXIT EXIT SETUP X.X DELTA TIME00:00 EDIT EXIT SETUP X.X DELTA TIME: 00:00 0 0 :3 0 ENTR EXIT SETUP X.X DELTA TIME:00:30 SET> EDIT EXIT CONTINUE NEXT PAGE With DURATION TIME 06864D DCN7562 209 Calibration Procedures Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Toggle buttons to set duration for each iteration of the sequence: Set in Decimal minutes from 0.1 – 60.0. CONTINUED FROM PREVIOUS PAGE DELTA TIME SETUP X.X DURATION:15.0 MINUTES EDIT EXIT SETUP X.X DURATION 15.0MINUTES 3 0 .0 ENTR EXIT SETUP X.X DURATION:30.0 MINUTES SET> EDIT EXIT SETUP X.X CALIBRATE: OFF EDIT EXIT Toggle button between Off and ON. SETUP X.X CALIBRATE: OFF ON SETUP X.X CALIBRATE: ON ENTR EXIT Display show: SEQ 2) ZERO–SPAN, 2:00:30 Sequence Delta Time MODE Delta Days EXIT SETUP X.X SEQ 2) ZERO–SPAN, 2:00:30 PREV NEXT MODE SET EXIT EXIT returns to the SETUP Menu. 9.4.1.1. If the T300/T300M Analyzer is set for either the Dual or Auto reporting range modes, the following three steps will appear at the beginning of the AutoCal setup routine: SETUP X.X RANGE TO CAL: LOW EDIT EXIT SETUP X.X RANGE TO CAL: LOW LOW HIGH ENTR SETUP SETUP X.X RANGE TO CAL: HIGH EXIT SETUP X.X SEQ 2) ZERO–SPAN, 2:00:30 PREV NEXT MODE SET EXIT EXIT returns to the PRIMARY SETUP Menu. 210 06864D DCN7562 Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Calibration Procedures 9.5. After completing one of the calibration procedures described above, it is important to evaluate the analyzer’s calibration SLOPE and OFFSET parameters. These values describe the linear response curve of the analyzer. The values for these terms, both individually and relative to each other, indicate the quality of the calibration. To perform this quality evaluation, you will need to record the values of both test functions (see Section 3.4.3 or Appendix A-3), all of which are automatically stored in the DAS channel CALDAT for data analysis, documentation and archival. Make sure that these parameters are within the limits listed below and frequently compare them to those values on the Final Test and Validation Data Sheet that came attached to your manual, which should not be significantly different. If they are, refer to the troubleshooting Section 10. Table 9-5: FUNCTION SLOPE OFFS Calibration Data Quality Evaluation MINIMUM VALUE 0.700 -0.500 OPTIMUM VALUE 1.000 0.000 MAXIMUM VALUE 1.300 0.500 These values should not be significantly different from the values recorded on the Teledyne API’s Final Test and Validation Data Sheet that was shipped with your instrument. If they are, refer to the troubleshooting The default DAS configuration records all calibration values in channel CALDAT as well as all calibration check (zero and span) values in its internal memory. • Up to 200 data points are stored for up to 4 years of data (on weekly calibration checks) and a lifetime history of monthly calibrations. • Review these data to see if the zero and span responses change over time. • These channels also store the STABIL value (standard deviation of CO concentration) to evaluate if the analyzer response has properly leveled off during the calibration procedure. • Finally, the CALDAT channel also stores the converter efficiency for review and documentation. If your instrument has either an O 2 or CO 2 sensor option installed these should be calibrated as well. 06864D DCN7562 211 Calibration Procedures Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer 9.6. 9.6.1. The dark calibration test interrupts the signal path between the IR photo-detector and the remainder of the sync/demod board circuitry. This allows the instrument to compensate for any voltage levels inherent in the sync/demod circuitry that might affect the calculation of CO concentration. Performing this calibration returns two offset voltages, one for CO MEAS and one for CO REF that are automatically added to the CPU’s calculation routine. The two offset voltages from the last calibration procedure may be reviewed by the user via the front panel display. (See also Section 5.9.5). To activate the dark calibration procedure or review the results of a previous calibration, press: 212 06864D DCN7562 Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Calibration Procedures SAMPLE RANGE=50.0 PPM CO= XX.XX SETUP X.X PRIMARY SETUP MENU CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT SETUP X.X SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMM VARS DIAG EXIT 8 SETUP X.X ENTER PASSWORD 1 8 ENTR EXIT DIAG SIGNAL I/O PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT Continue pressing NEXT until ... DIAG OPTIC DARK CALIBRATION PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT DIAG DARK CO DARK CALIBRATION VIEW CAL Calibration runs automatically Offset for CO REF signal DIAG DARK REF DARK OFFSET: 0.0mV DIAG DARK EXIT DARK CAL 1% COMPLETE EXIT EXIT Offset for CO MEAS signal DIAG DARK MEAS DARK OFFSET: 0.0mV EXIT DIAG DARK DARK CALIBRATION ABORTED EXIT 9.6.2. A sensor at the sample chamber outlet continuously measures the pressure of the sample gas. These data are used to compensate the final CO concentration calculation for changes in atmospheric pressure and is stored in the CPU’s memory as the test function PRES (also viewable via the front panel). See also Section 5.9.6. I MPORTANT MPACT ON EADINGS OR ATA 06864D DCN7562 213 Calibration Procedures Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer To cause the analyzer to measure and record a value for PRES , press. SAMPLE RANGE=50.0 PPM CO= XX.XX DIAG PRESSURE CALIBRATION PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT DIAG PCAL PRESSURE CALIBRATION CAL EDIT EXIT DIAG PCAL SAMPLE PRESS: 29.93 IN-HG-A 2 9 .9 3 ENTR EXIT EXIT discards the new setting. ENTR accepts the new setting. 214 06864D DCN7562 Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Calibration Procedures 9.6.3. The flow calibration allows the user to adjust the values of the sample flow rates as they are displayed on the front panel and reported through COMM ports to match the actual flow rate measured at the sample inlet. This does not change the hardware measurement of the flow sensors, only the software-calculated values. To carry out this adjustment, connect an external, sufficiently accurate flow meter to the sample inlet (see Section 10.3.4 for more details). Once the flow meter is attached and is measuring actual gas flow, press: SAMPLE RANGE=50.0 PPM CO= XX.XX SETUP X.X PRIMARY SETUP MENU CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT SETUP X.X SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMM VARS DIAG EXIT SETUP X.X ENTER PASSWORD:818 8 1 8 ENTR EXIT DIAG SIGNAL I/O PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT Continue pressing NEXT until ... DIAG FLOW CALIBRATION PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT DIAG FCAL ACTUAL FLOW: 1000 CC/M 1 0 0 0 ENTR EXIT Toggle these buttons to match the actual flow as measured by the external flow meter. EXIT discards the new setting. ENTR accepts the new setting. 06864D DCN7562 215 Calibration Procedures Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer 9.7. This section provides the calibration setup and procedures for the O 2 Sensor and the CO 2 Sensor options. 9.7.1. 2 Presented here are first the setup and then the calibration steps for the O 2 Sensor. 9.7.1.1. The pneumatic connections for calibrating are as follows: Source of SAMPLE GAS Removed during calibration 3-way Valve SAMPLE EXHAUST VENT here if input is pressurized Instrument Chassis Manual Control Valve PUMP Figure 9-7: O 2 Sensor Calibration Set Up O 2 SENSOR ZERO GAS: Teledyne API recommends using pure N 2 when calibration the zero point of your O 2 sensor option. O 2 SENSOR SPAN GAS: Teledyne API recommends using 20.8% O 2 in N 2 when calibration the span point of your O 2 sensor option (See Table 3-12). 216 06864D DCN7562 Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Calibration Procedures 9.7.1.2. Set the expected O 2 span gas concentration. This should be equal to the percent concentration of the O 2 span gas of the selected reporting range (default factory setting = 20.8%; the approximate O 2 content of ambient air). SAMPLE RANGE=50.0 PPM CO= XX.XX < TST TST > CAL SETUP SAMPLE CO CO2 GAS TO CAL:CO O2 ENTR EXIT M-P CAL RANGE=50.0 PPM CO= XX.XX CONC EXIT SAMPLE CO CO2 GAS TO CAL:O2 O2 ENTR EXIT M-P CAL O2 SPAN CONC:20.95% 0 2 0 .9 5 ENTR EXIT EXIT ignores the new setting and returns to the previous display. ENTR accepts the new setting and returns to the previous menu. The O 2 span concentration value automatically defaults to 20.8 % . If this is not the the concentration of the span gas being used, toggle these buttons to set the correct concentration of the O 2 calibration gases. 06864D DCN7562 217 Calibration Procedures Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer 9.7.1.3. To change the stability test function from CO concentration to the O 2 sensor output, press: SAMPLE RANGE=50.0 PPM CO= XX.XX < TST TST > CAL SETUP SETUP X.X PRIMARY SETUP MENU CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT SETUP X.X SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMM VARS DIAG ALRM EXIT SETUP X.X ENTER PASSWORD:818 8 1 8 ENTR EXIT SETUP X.X 0) DAS_HOLD_OFF=15.0 Minutes NEXT> JUMP EDIT PRNT EXIT Continue pressing NEXT until ... Press 3 times to return to menu. SETUP X.X 2) STABIL_GAS=CO EDIT PRNT EXIT CO2 and O2 options only appear if associated sensors are installed. SETUP X.X STABIL_GAS:CO CO CO2 O2 ENTR EXIT SETUP X.X STABIL_GAS:O2 CO CO2 O2 ENTR EXIT 218 06864D DCN7562 Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Calibration Procedures 9.7.1.4. To perform the zero/span calibration procedure: SAMPLE RANGE=50.0 PPM CO= XX.XX < TST TST > CAL SETUP Toggle TST> button until ... SAMPLE O2 STB=X.XX % CO=XX.XX < TST TST > CAL SETUP Allow zero gas to enter the sample port at the rear of the analyzer. Set the Display to show the O2 STB test function. This function calculates the stability of the CO measurement. Press O2 à ENTR initiate zero point calibration of the O2 sensor. to Wait until O2 STB falls below 0.01%. This may take several minutes. SAMPLE O2 STB=X.XX % CO=XX.XX < TST TST > CAL SETUP SAMPLE CO CO2 GAS TO CAL:O2 O2 ENTR EXIT M-P CAL O2 STB=X.XX % CO=XX.XX ZERO CONC EXIT M-P CAL O2 STB=X.XX % CO=XX.XX ENTR CONC EXIT Allow span gas to enter the sample port at the rear of the analyzer. Press ENTR to change the OFFSET & SLOPE values for the O 2 measurement. Press EXIT to leave the calibration unchanged and return to the previous menu. Wait until O2 STB falls below 0.01% This may take several minutes. SAMPLE O2 STB=X.XX % CO=XX.XX < TST TST > CAL SETUP SAMPLE CO CO2 GAS TO CAL:O2 O2 ENTR EXIT Press O2 à ENTR to initiate span point calibration of the O2 sensor. The SPAN button now appears during the transition from zero to span. You may see both buttons. If either the ZERO or SPAN buttons fail to appear see the chapter on Troubleshooting for tips. M-P CAL O2 STB=X.XX % CO=XX.XX SPAN CONC EXIT M-P CAL O2 STB=X.XX % CO=XX.XX ENTR CONC EXIT M-P CAL O2 STB=X.XX % CO=XX.XX EXIT Press the OFFSET values for the O measurement. Press ENTR EXIT to change & menu. SLOPE 2 to leave the calibration unchanged and return to the previous EXIT at this point returns to the SAMPLE menu. 06864D DCN7562 219 Calibration Procedures Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer 9.7.2. 2 Presented here are first the setup and then the calibration steps for the CO 2 Sensor. 9.7.2.1. The pneumatic connections for calibrating are as follows Source of SAMPLE GAS Removed during calibration 3-way Valve SAMPLE EXHAUST VENT here if input is pressurized Instrument Chassis Manual Control Valve PUMP Figure 9-8: CO 2 Sensor Calibration Set Up CO 2 SENSOR ZERO GAS: Teledyne API recommends using pure N 2 when calibration the zero point of your CO 2 sensor option. CO 2 SENSOR SPAN GAS: Teledyne API recommends using 16% CO 2 in N 2 when calibration the span point of your CO 2 sensor option (Table 3-12) is 20%. 220 06864D DCN7562 Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Calibration Procedures 9.7.2.2. Set the expected CO 2 span gas concentration. This should be equal to the percent concentration of the CO 2 span gas of the selected reporting range (default factory setting = 12%). SAMPLE RANGE=50.0 PPM CO= XX.XX < TST TST > CAL SETUP SAMPLE CO CO2 GAS TO CAL:CO O2 ENTR EXIT M-P CAL RANGE=50.0 PPM CO= XX.XX 0 ENTR EXIT span concentration value automatically defaults to 12 %. If this is not the the concentration of the span gas being used, toggle these buttons to set the correct concentration calibration gases. EXIT ignores the new setting and returns to the previous display. ENTR accepts the new setting and returns to the previous menu. 06864D DCN7562 221 Calibration Procedures Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer 9.7.2.3. To change the stability test function from CO concentration to the CO 2 sensor output, press: SAMPLE RANGE=50.0 PPM CO= XX.XX < TST TST > CAL SETUP SETUP X.X PRIMARY SETUP MENU CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT SETUP X.X SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMM VARS DIAG ALRM EXIT SETUP X.X ENTER PASSWORD:818 8 1 8 ENTR EXIT SETUP X.X 0) DAS_HOLD_OFF=15.0 Minutes Press EXIT 3 times to return to SAMPLE menu. SETUP X.X 2) STABIL_GAS=CO 2 associated sensors are options only SETUP X.X STABIL_GAS:CO CO CO2 O2 ENTR EXIT SETUP X.X STABIL_GAS:CO2 CO CO2 O2 ENTR EXIT 2 222 06864D DCN7562 Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Calibration Procedures 9.7.2.4. To perform the zero/span calibration procedure: SAMPLE RANGE=50.0 PPM CO= XX.XX < TST TST > CAL SETUP Toggle TST> button until ... SAMPLE CO2 STB=X.XX % O=XX.XX < TST TST > CAL SETUP Allow zero gas to enter the sample port at the rear of the analyzer. Press CO2: ENTR to initiate zero point calibration of the CO2 sensor. Set the Display to show the CO2 STB test function. This function calculates the stability of the CO measurement. Wait until CO2 STB falls below 0.01%. This may take several minutes. SAMPLE CO2 STB=X.XX % CO=XX.XX < TST TST > CAL SETUP SAMPLE CO CO2 GAS TO CAL:CO2 O2 ENTR EXIT M-P CAL CO2 STB=X.XX % O=XX.XX ZERO CONC EXIT M-P CAL CO2 STB=X.XX % CO=XX.XX ENTR CONC EXIT Allow span gas to enter the sample port at the rear of the analyzer. Press ENTR to change the OFFSET & SLOPE values for the O 2 measurement. Press EXIT to leave the calibration unchanged and return to the previous menu. Wait until CO2 STB falls below 0.01% This may take several minutes. Press CO2: ENTR O2 sensor. to initiate span point calibration of the The SPAN button now appears during the transition from zero to span. You may see both buttons. If either the ZERO or SPAN buttons fail to appear see the chapter on Troubleshooting for tips. SAMPLE CO2 STB=X.XX CO=XX.XX < TST TST > CAL SETUP SAMPLE CO CO2 GAS TO CAL:CO2 O2 ENTR EXIT M-P CAL CO2 STB=X.XX % CO=XX.XX SPAN CONC EXIT M-P CAL CO2 STB=X.XX % CO=XX.XX ENTR CONC EXIT M-P CAL CO2 STB=X.XX % CO=XX.XX EXIT Press ENTR to changes the OFFSET & SLOPE values for the CO 2 measurement. Press EXIT to leave the calibration unchanged and return to the previous menu. EXIT at this point returns to the SAMPLE menu. 06864D DCN7562 223 Calibration Procedures Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer 9.8. When running this instrument for U.S. EPA compliance, always calibrate prior to use, adhering to the EPA designation conditions for operating this instrument (Section 2.2). Pay strict attention to the built-in warning features, periodic inspection, regular zero/span checks, regular test parameter evaluation for predictive diagnostics and data analysis, and routine maintenance. Any instrument(s) supplying the zero air and span calibration gasses used must themselves be calibrated and that calibration must be traceable to an EPA/NIST primary standard. Comply with Code of Federal Regulations, Title 40 (downloadable from the U.S. Government Publishing Office at http://www/gpo.gov/fdsys/ ) and with Quality Assurance Guidance documents (available on the EPA website, http://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/qalist.html ). Give special attention to specific regulations regarding the use and operation of ambient carbon monoxide analyzers (gas filter correlation). 224 06864D DCN7562 This page intentionally left blank. 06864D DCN7562 225 06864D DCN7562 Predictive diagnostic functions, including data acquisition records, failure warnings and test functions built into the analyzer, allow the user to determine when repairs are necessary without performing painstaking preventative maintenance procedures. There are, however, a minimal number of simple procedures that when performed regularly will ensure that the analyzer continues to operate accurately and reliably over its lifetime. Repairs and troubleshooting are covered in Section 11 of this manual. 10.1. Table 10-1 shows a typical maintenance schedule for the analyzer. Please note that in certain environments (i.e. dusty, very high ambient pollutant levels) some maintenance procedures may need to be performed more often than shown. CAUTION G ENERAL S AFETY H AZARD Risk of electrical shock. Disconnect power before performing any of the following operations that require entry into the interior of the analyzer. CAUTION Q UALIFIED P ERSONNEL The operations outlined in this section are to be performed by qualified maintenance personnel only. 227 06864D DCN7562 Maintenance Schedule & Procedures Teledyne API – Technical Manual - Model T300 Family CO Analyzers This page intentionally left blank. 228 06864D DCN7562 Table 10-1: T300/T300M Maintenance Schedule Particulate Filter Replace Weekly or As Needed No Verify Test Functions Record and Analyze Weekly or after any Maintenance or Repair No Pump Diaphragm Replace Annually Yes Perform Flow Check Check Flow Annually No Perform Leak Check Verify Leak Tight Annually or after any Maintenance or Repair No Pneumatic lines Examine and Clean As Needed Yes if cleaned Cleaning Clean As Needed Only if cover removed 229 06864D DCN7562 Maintenance Schedule & Procedures Table 10-2: T300/T300M Test Function Record FUNCTION OPERATING MODE* STABILITY ZERO CAL CO MEAS ZERO CAL ZERO CAL MR RATIO SPAN CAL PRES SAMPLE PHT DRIVE SAMPLE AFTER WARM UP SLOPE SPAN CAL OFFSET ZERO CAL Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer DATE RECORDED 230 06864D DCN7562 10.2. The Test Functions can be used to predict failures by looking at how their values change over time. Initially it may be useful to compare the state of these Test Functions to the values recorded on the printed record of the final calibration performed on your instrument at the factory, P/N 04307. Table 10-3 can be used as a basis for taking action as these values change with time. The internal data acquisition system (DAS) is a convenient way to record and track these changes. Use APICOM to download and review this data from a remote location. Table 10-3: Predictive uses for Test Functions FUNCTION CONDITION BEHAVIOR STABILITY Zero Cal Increasing CO MEAS MR RATIO PRES PHT DRIVE OFFSET SLOPE Zero Cal Zero Cal Span Cal Sample Any, but with Bench Temp at 48°C Zero Cal Span Cal Decreasing Increasing Decreasing Increasing Decreasing Increasing > 1” Decreasing > 1” Increasing Increasing Decreasing Increasing Decreasing INTERPRETATION • Pneumatic Leaks – instrument & sample system • Detector deteriorating • Source Aging • Detector deteriorating • Optics getting dirty or contaminated • Source Aging • Detector deteriorating • Contaminated zero gas (H 2 O) • Source Aging • Detector deteriorating • GFC Wheel Leaking • Pneumatic Leaks • Contaminated zero gas (CO) • Source Aging • Pneumatic Leaks – instrument & sample system • Calibration system deteriorating • GFC Wheel Leaking • Source Aging • Calibration system deteriorating • Pneumatic Leak between sample inlet and Sample Cell • Change in sampling manifold • Dirty particulate filter • Pneumatic obstruction between sample inlet and Sample Cell • Obstruction in sampling manifold • Mechanical Connection between IR-Detector and Sample Cell deteriorating • IR-Photodetector deteriorating • See MR Ratio - Zero Cal Decreasing above • See MR Ratio - Zero Cal Increasing above • See MR Ratio - Span Cal Decreasing above • See MR Ratio – Span Cal Increasing above 06864D DCN7562 231 Maintenance Schedule & Procedures Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer 10.3. The following procedures are to be performed periodically as part of the standard maintenance of the T300. 10.3.1. The particulate filter should be inspected often for signs of plugging or contamination. We recommend that the filter and the wetted surfaces of the filter housing are handled as little as possible when you change the filter. Do not touch any part of the housing, filter element, PTFE retaining ring, glass cover and the o-ring. To change the filter: 1. Turn OFF the analyzer to prevent drawing debris into the instrument. 2. Open the T300 Analyzer’s hinged front panel and unscrew the knurled retaining ring on the filter assembly. 232 Figure 10-1: Sample Particulate Filter Assembly 3. Carefully remove the retaining ring, PTFE o-ring, glass filter cover and filter element. 4. Replace the filter, being careful that the element is fully seated and centered in the bottom of the holder. 5. Re-install the PTFE o-ring (with the notches up), the glass cover, then screw on the retaining ring and hand tighten. Inspect the seal between the edge of filter and the o-ring to assure a proper seal. 6. Re-start the Analyzer. 06864D DCN7562 Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Maintenance Schedule & Procedures 10.3.2. The diaphragm in the sample pump periodically wears out and must be replaced. A sample rebuild kit is available – see label on the pump itself for the part number of the pump rebuild kit. Instructions and diagrams are included with the kit. Always perform a Flow and Leak Check after rebuilding the Sample Pump. 10.3.3. 10.3.3.1. This method is easy and fast. It detects, but does not locate most leaks. It also verifies that the sample pump is in good condition. 1. Turn the analyzer ON, and allow enough time for flows to stabilize. 2. Cap the sample inlet port. 3. After several minutes, when the pressure has stabilized, scroll through TEST menu, note the SAMPLE PRESSURE reading. the 4. If the reading is < 10 in-Hg, the pump is in good condition and there are no large leaks. 5. Check the sample gas flow. If the flow is <10 cm 3 /min and stable, there are no large leaks in the instrument’s pneumatics. 10.3.3.2. If you can’t locate the leak by the above procedure, use the following procedure. Obtain a leak checker similar to the Teledyne API P/N 01960, which contains a small pump, shut-off valve and pressure gauge. Alternatively, a convenient source of low-pressure gas is a tank of span gas, with the two-stage regulator adjusted to less than 15 psi with a shutoff valve and pressure gauge. CAUTION G ENERAL S AFETY H AZARD Do not use bubble solution with vacuum applied to the analyzer. The solution may contaminate the instrument. Do not exceed 15 PSIG pressure. 1. Turn OFF power to the instrument. 2. Install a leak checker or tank of gas as described above on the sample inlet at the rear panel. 3. Remove the instrument cover and locate the inlet side of the sample pump. Remove the flow assembly from the pump and plug it with the appropriate gas-tight fitting. 4. Pressurize the instrument with the leak checker, allowing enough time to fully pressurize the instrument through the critical flow orifice. Check each fitting with soap bubble solution, looking for bubbles. Once the fittings have been wetted with soap solution, do not re-apply vacuum, as it will suck soap solution into the instrument and contaminate it. Do not exceed 15 psi pressure. 06864D DCN7562 233 Maintenance Schedule & Procedures Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer 5. If the instrument has one of the zero and span valve options, the normally closed ports on each valve should also be separately checked. Connect the leak checker to the normally closed ports and check with soap bubble solution. 6. Once the leak has been located and repaired, the leak-down rate should be < 1 in Hg (0.4 psi) in 5 minutes after the pressure is shut off. 10.3.4. CAUTION G ENERAL S AFETY H AZARD Always use a separate calibrated flow meter capable of measuring flows in the 0 – 1000 cm 3 /min range to measure the gas flow rate though the analyzer. DO NOT use the built in flow measurement viewable from the Front Panel of the instrument. This measurement is only for detecting major flow interruptions such as clogged or plugged gas lines. See Figure 3-4 for SAMPLE port location. 1. Attach the Flow Meter to the sample inlet port on the rear panel. Ensure that the inlet to the Flow Meter is at atmospheric pressure. 2. Sample flow should be 800 cm 3 /min ± 10%. 3. Once an accurate measurement has been recorded by the method described above, adjust the analyzer’s internal flow sensors (See Section 9.6.3). Low flows indicate blockage somewhere in the pneumatic pathway, typically a plugged sintered filter or critical flow orifice in one of the analyzer’s flow control assemblies. High flows indicate leaks downstream of the Flow Control Assembly. 10.3.5. The T300/T300M sensor assembly and optical bench are complex and delicate. Disassembly and cleaning is not recommended. Please check with the factory before disassembling the optical bench. 10.3.6. If necessary, the exterior surfaces of the T300/T300M can be cleaned with a clean damp cloth. Do NOT submerge any part of the instrument and do NOT use any cleaning solution. 234 06864D DCN7562 This contains a variety of methods for identifying the source of performance problems with the analyzer. Also included in this are procedures that are used in repairing the instrument. NOTE Q UALIFIED P ERSONNEL The operations outlined in this section must be performed by qualified maintenance personnel only. CAUTION G ENERAL S AFETY H AZARD • Risk of electrical shock. Some operations need to be carried out with the instrument open and running. • Exercise caution to avoid electrical shocks and electrostatic or mechanical damage to the analyzer. • Do not drop tools into the analyzer or leave those after your procedures. • Do not shorten or touch electric connections with metallic tools while operating inside the analyzer. • Use common sense when operating inside a running analyzer. 11.1. The T300/T300M Carbon Monoxide Analyzer has been designed so that problems can be rapidly detected, evaluated and repaired. During operation, it continuously performs diagnostic tests and provides the ability to evaluate its key operating parameters without disturbing monitoring operations. A systematic approach to troubleshooting will generally consist of the following five steps: 1. Note any WARNING MESSAGES and take corrective action as necessary. 2. Examine the values of all TEST functions and compare them to factory values. Note any major deviations from the factory values and take corrective action. 3. Use the internal electronic status LEDs to determine whether the electronic communication channels are operating properly. • Verify that the DC power supplies are operating properly by checking the voltage test points on the relay PCA. • Note that the analyzer’s DC power wiring is color-coded and these colors match the color of the corresponding test points on the relay PCA. 06864D DCN7562 235 Troubleshooting and Service Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer 4. SUSPECT A LEAK FIRST! • Technical Support data indicate that the majority of all problems are eventually traced to leaks in the internal pneumatics of the analyzer or the diluent gas and source gases delivery systems. • Check for gas flow problems such as clogged or blocked internal/external gas lines, damaged seals, punctured gas lines, a damaged / malfunctioning pumps, etc. 5. Follow the procedures defined in Section 11.5 to confirm that the analyzer’s vital functions are working (power supplies, CPU, relay PCA, touchscreen, PMT cooler, etc.). • See Figure 3-6 for the general layout of components and sub-assemblies in the analyzer. • See the wiring interconnect diagram and interconnect list in Appendix D. 11.1.1. The most common and/or serious instrument failures will result in a warning message being displayed on the front panel. Table 11-1 lists warning messages, along with their meaning and recommended corrective action. It should be noted that if more than two or three warning messages occur at the same time, it is often an indication that some fundamental analyzer sub-system (power supply, relay board, motherboard) has failed rather than an indication of the specific failures referenced by the warnings. In this case, a combined-error analysis needs to be performed. The analyzer will alert the user that a Warning message is active by flashing the FAULT LED, displaying the the Warning message in the Param field along with the CLR button (press to clear Warning message). The MSG button displays if there is more than one warning in queue or if you are in the TEST menu and have not yet cleared the message. The following display/touchscreen examples provide an illustration of each: 236 06864D DCN7562 Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Troubleshooting and Service The analyzer will also alert the user via the Serial I/O COM port(s). To view or clear the various warning messages press: 06864D DCN7562 237 Troubleshooting and Service Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Suppresses the warning messages. SAMPLE SYSTEM RESET TEST CAL MSG CLR SETUP NOTE: If a warning message persists after several attempts to clear it, the message may indicate a real problem and not an artifact of the warm-up period. SAMPLE SYSTEM RESET TEST CAL MSG CLR SETUP SAMPLE SYSTEM RESET TEST CAL MSG CLR SETUP SYSTEM SYSTEM RESET TEST CLR SETUP MSG returns the active warnings to the message field. Press CLR to clear the current message. If more than one warning is active, the next message will take its place. Once the last warning has been cleared, the RANGE the analyzer’s main MESSAGE FIELD. function will be displayed in STANDBY RANGE=50.0 PPB CO=XX.XX TEST CAL MSG SETUP Figure 11-1: Viewing and Clearing Warning Messages 238 06864D DCN7562 Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Troubleshooting and Service Table 11-1: Warning Messages - Indicated Failures WARNING MESSAGE FAULT CONDITION BENCH TEMP WARNING BOX TEMP WARNING CANNOT DYN SPAN CANNOT DYN ZERO CONFIG INITIALIZED DATA INITIALIZED PHOTO TEMP WARNING REAR BOARD NOT DET RELAY BOARD WARN SAMPLE FLOW WARN SAMPLE PRES WARN POSSIBLE CAUSES The optical bench temp is controlled at 48 < 5 ° ± C or > 48 ° 2 Box Temp is ° C. C. Dynamic Span operation failed Dynamic Zero operation failed Bad bench heater Bad bench temperature sensor Bad relay controlling the bench heater Entire relay board is malfunctioning I 2 C bus malfunction NOTE: Box temperature typically runs ~7 o C warmer than ambient temperature. Poor/blocked ventilation to the analyzer. Stopped exhaust-fan Ambient temperature outside of specified range Measured concentration value is too high or low. Concentration slope value to high or too low Measured concentration value is too high. Concentration offset value to high. Failed disk on module User erased data Configuration and Calibration data reset to original Factory state. Data Storage in DAS was erased Failed disk on module User cleared data PHT DRIVE is >4800 mVDC Motherboard not detected on power up. The CPU cannot communicate with the Relay Board. Sample flow rate is < 500 cm or > 1000 cm 3 /min. 3 /min Sample Pressure is <10 in-Hg or > 35 in-Hg Normally 29.92 in-Hg at sea level decreasing at 1 in-Hg per 1000 ft of altitude (with no flow – pump disconnected). Failed IR photo-detector Failed sync/demod board IR photo-detector improperly attached to the sample chamber Bench temp too high. Warning only appears on serial I/O com port(s) Front panel display will be frozen, blank or will not respond. Massive failure of motherboard I 2 C bus failure Failed relay board Loose connectors/wiring Failed sample pump Blocked sample inlet/gas line Dirty particulate filter Leak downstream of critical flow orifice Failed flow sensor/circuitry If sample pressure is < 10 in-hg: Blocked particulate filter Blocked sample inlet/gas line Failed pressure sensor/circuitry If sample pressure is > 35 in-hg: Pressurized sample gas. Install vent Blocked vent line on pressurized sample/zero/span gas supply Bad pressure sensor/circuitry 06864D DCN7562 239 Troubleshooting and Service Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Table 13-1: Warning Messages – Indicated Failures (cont.) WARNING MESSAGE FAULT CONDITION SAMPLE TEMP WARN SOURCE WARNING Occurs when CO Ref is <1250 mVDC or >4950 mVDC. Either of these conditions will result in an invalid M/R ratio. SYSTEM RESET WHEEL TEMP WARNING Sample temperature is < 10 o C or > 100 o C. The computer has rebooted. The filter wheel temperature is controlled at 68 ± 2 ° C POSSIBLE CAUSES Ambient temperature outside of specified range Failed bench heater Failed bench temperature sensor Relay controlling the bench heater Failed relay board I 2 C bus GFC Wheel stopped Failed sync/demod board If status LEDs on the sync/demod board ARE flashing the cause is most likely a failed: IR source Relay board I 2 C bus IR photo-detector This message occurs at power on. If you have not cycled the power on your instrument: Failed +5 VDC power, Fatal error caused software to restart Loose connector/wiring Blocked cooling vents below GFC Assembly. Make sure that adequate clear space beneath the analyzer. Analyzer’s top cover removed Wheel heater Wheel temperature sensor Relay controlling the wheel heater Entire relay board I 2 C bus 11.1.2. Besides being useful as predictive diagnostic tools, the test functions viewable from the front panel can be used to isolate and identify many operational problems when combined with a thorough understanding of the analyzer’s Theory of Operation (see The acceptable ranges for these test functions are listed in the “Nominal Range” column of the analyzer Final Test and Validation Data Sheet (T300, P/N 04307 and T300M, P/N 04311) shipped with the instrument. Values outside these acceptable ranges indicate a failure of one or more of the analyzer’s subsystems. Functions whose values are still within the acceptable range but have significantly changed from the measurement recorded on the factory data sheet may also indicate a failure. 240 06864D DCN7562 Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Troubleshooting and Service The following table contains some of the more common causes for these values to be out of range. Table 11-2: Test Functions - Indicated Failures TEST FUNCTIONS ( As Displayed) TIME RANGE STABIL CO MEAS & CO REF MR Ratio PRES SAMPLE FL SAMP TEMP BENCH TEMP WHEEL TEMP Time of day clock is too fast or slow. Battery in clock chip on CPU board may be dead. Incorrectly configured measurement range(s) could cause response problems with a Data logger or chart recorder attached to one of the analog output. If the Range selected is too small, the recording device will over range. If the Range is too big, the device will show minimal or no apparent change in readings. If the value displayed is too high the IR Source has become brighter. Adjust the variable gain potentiometer on the sync/demod board (see Section 11.5.7.1). If the value displayed is too low or constantly changing and the CO REF is OK: • Failed multiplexer on the motherboard • Failed sync/demod board • Loose connector or wiring on sync/demod board • If the value displayed is too low or constantly changing and the CO REF is bad: • GFC Wheel stopped or rotation is too slow • Failed sync/demod board IR source • Failed IR source • Failed relay board • Failed I 2 C bus • Failed IR photo-detector When the analyzer is sampling zero air and the ratio is too low: • The reference cell of the GFC Wheel is contaminated or leaking. • The alignment between the GFC Wheel and the segment sensor, the M/R sensor or both is incorrect. • Failed sync/demod board When the analyzer is sampling zero air and the ratio is too high: • Zero air is contaminated • Failed IR photo-detector SAMPLE PRES WARN. Check for gas flow problems (see Section 11.2). SAMPLE TEMP should be close to BENCH TEMP. Temperatures outside of the specified range or oscillating temperatures are cause for concern. Bench temp control improves instrument noise, stability and drift. Temperatures outside of the specified range or oscillating temperatures are cause for concern. Table 11-1 for BENCH TEMP WARNING. BOX TEMP PHT DRIVE Wheel temp control improves instrument noise, stability and drift. Outside of set point or oscillating temperatures are causes for concern. See Table 11-1 for WHEEL TEMP WARNING. If the box temperature is out of range, check fan in the power supply module. Areas to the side and rear of instrument should allow adequate ventilation. See Table 11-1 for BOX TEMP WARNING. If this drive voltage is out of range it may indicate one of several problems: • A poor mechanical connection between the photodetector, its associated mounting hardware and the absorption cell housing; • An electronic failure of the IR Photo-Detector’s built-in cooling circuitry, or; • A temperature problem inside the analyzer chassis. In this case other temperature warnings would also be active such as BENCH TEMP WARNING or BOX TEMP WARNING. 06864D DCN7562 241 Troubleshooting and Service Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer TEST FUNCTIONS ( As Displayed) SLOPE OFFSET Values outside range indicate Contamination of the zero air or span gas supply Instrument is Miscalibrated Blocked gas flow Contaminated or leaking GFC Wheel (either chamber) Faulty IR photo-detector Faulty sample faulty IR photo-detector pressure sensor (P1) or circuitry Invalid M/R ratio (see above) Bad/incorrect span gas concentration due. Values outside range indicate Contamination of the zero air supply Contaminated or leaking GFC Wheel (either chamber) Faulty IR photo-detector 242 06864D DCN7562 Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Troubleshooting and Service 11.1.3. The signal I/O diagnostic mode allows access to the digital and analog I/O in the analyzer. Some of the digital signals can be controlled through the touchscreen. These signals, combined with a thorough understanding of the instruments Theory of Operation (found in Section 12), are useful for troubleshooting in three ways: • The technician can view the raw, unprocessed signal level of the analyzer’s critical inputs and outputs. • Many of the components and functions that are normally under algorithmic control of the CPU can be manually exercised. • The technician can directly control the signal level Analog and Digital Output signals. This allows the technician to observe systematically the effect of directly controlling these signals on the operation of the analyzer. The following flowchart shows an example of how to use the Signal I/O menu to view the raw voltage of an input signal or to control the state of an output voltage or control signal. (See also Sections 5.9.1 and 06864D DCN7562 243 Troubleshooting and Service Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer SAMPLE RANGE=50.0 PPM CO= XXXX Press JUMP to go directly to a specific signal (see Appendix A for a list of all I/O SIGNALS) Toggle to set location No. of the VAR to JUMP to. EXAMPLE DIAG I/O JUMPTO: 22 2 2 JUMP ENTR EXIT DIAG I/O 22) RELAY_WATCHDOG=ON PREV NEXT JUMP OFF PRNT EXIT On status signals this button toggles the signal ON / OFF. Pressing PRNT will send a formatted printout to the serial port and can be captured with a computer or other output device. Figure 11-2: Example of Signal I/O Function 244 06864D DCN7562 Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Troubleshooting and Service 11.1.4. Several color-coded light-emitting diodes (LEDs) are located inside the instrument to assist in determining if the analyzer’s CPU, I 2 C bus and relay board, GFC Wheel and the sync/demodulator board are functioning properly. 11.1.4.1. DS5, a red LED, that is located on upper portion of the motherboard, just to the right of the CPU board, flashes when the CPU is running the main program loop. After power up, approximately 30 to 60 seconds, DS5 should flash on and off. If characters are written to the front panel display but DS5 does not flash then the program files have become corrupted. If after 30 – 60 seconds neither the DS5 is flashing or no characters have been written to the front panel display then the CPU is bad and must be replaced. CPU Status LED Figure 11-3: CPU Status Indicator 06864D DCN7562 245 Troubleshooting and Service Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer 11.1.4.2. Two LEDs located on the Sync/Demod Board are there to make it obvious that the GFC Wheel is spinning and the synchronization signals are present: LED D1 D2 Table 11-3: Sync/Demod Board Status Failure Indications FUNCTION M/R Sensor Status (Flashes slowly) Segment Sensor Status (Flashes quickly) FAULT STATUS LED is stuck ON or OFF LED is stuck ON or OFF INDICATED FAILURE(S) GFC Wheel is not turning M/R Sensor on Opto-Pickup Board failed Sync/Demod Board failed JP 4 Connector/Wiring faulty Failed/Faulty +5 VDC Power Supply (PS1) GFC Wheel is not turning Segment Sensor on Opto-Pickup Board failed Sync/Demod Board failed JP 4 Connector/Wiring faulty Failed/Faulty +5 VDC Power Supply (PS1) 246 Figure 11-4: Sync/Demod Board Status LED Locations 06864D DCN7562 Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Troubleshooting and Service 11.1.4.3. There are eight LEDs located on the Relay Board. The most important of which is D1, which indicates the health of the I 2 C bus. If D1 is blinking the other faults following LEDs can be used in conjunction with DIAG menu signal I/O to identify hardware failures of the relays and switches on the relay (see Section 11.1.3 and Appendix D). LED D1 (Red) FUNCTION I 2 C bus Health (Watch Dog Circuit) Table 11-4: I 2 C Status LED Failure Indications FAULT STATUS Continuously ON or Continuously OFF INDICATED FAILURE(S) Failed/Halted CPU Faulty Motherboard, Touchscreen or Relay Board Faulty Connectors/Wiring between Motherboard, Touchscreen or Relay Board Failed/Faulty +5 VDC Power Supply (PS1) 06864D DCN7562 Figure 11-5: Relay Board Status LEDs 247 Troubleshooting and Service Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Table 11-5: LED Relay Board Status LED Failure Indications FUNCTION SIGNAL I/O PARAMETER ACTIVATED BY VIEW RESULT D2 Yellow D3 Yellow D4 Yellow D5 Green D6 Green D7 Green D8 Green DIAGNOSTIC TECHNIQUE Wheel Heater Bench Heater Spare Sample/Cal Gas Valve Option Zero/Span Gas Valve Option Shutoff Valve Option IR SOURCE WHEEL_HEATER BENCH_HEATER N/A WHEEL_TEMP BENCH_TEMP N/A Voltage displayed should change. If not: Failed Heater Faulty Temperature Sensor Failed AC Relay Faulty Connectors/Wiring Voltage displayed should change. If not: Failed Heater Faulty Temperature Sensor Failed AC Relay Faulty Connectors/Wiring N/A CAL_VALVE SPAN_VALVE SHUTOFF_VALVE IR_SOURCE N/A N/A N/A CO_MEASURE Sample/Cal Valve should audibly change states. If not: Failed Valve Failed Relay Drive IC on Relay Board Failed Relay Board Faulty +12 VDC Supply (PS2) Faulty Connectors/Wiring Zero/Span Valve should audibly change states. If not: Failed Valve Failed Relay Drive IC on Relay Board Failed Relay Board Faulty +12 VDC Supply (PS2) Faulty Connectors/Wiring Shutoff Valve should audibly change states. If not: Failed Valve Failed Relay Drive IC on Relay Board Failed Relay Board Faulty +12 VDC Supply (PS2) Faulty Connectors/Wiring Voltage displayed should change. If not: Failed IR Source Faulty +12 VDC Supply (PS2) Failed Relay Board Failed IR Photo-Detector Failed Sync/Demod Board Faulty Connectors/Wiring 248 06864D DCN7562 Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Troubleshooting and Service 11.2. When troubleshooting flow problems, it is a good idea to first confirm that the actual flow and not the analyzer’s flow sensor and software are in error, or the flow meter is in error. Use an independent flow meter to perform a flow check as described in Section 10.3.4. If this test shows the flow to be correct, check the pressure sensors as described The T300/T300M has one main gas flow path. With the IZS or zero/span valve option installed, there are several subsidiary paths but none of those are displayed on the front panel or stored by the DAS. With the O 2 sensor option installed, third gas flow controlled with a critical flow orifice is added, but this flow is not measured or reported. In general, flow problems can be divided into three categories: 1. Flow is too high 2. Flow is greater than zero, but is too low, and/or unstable 3. Flow is zero (no flow) When troubleshooting flow problems, it is crucial to confirm the actual flow rate without relying on the analyzer’s flow display. The use of an independent, external flow meter to perform a flow check as described in Section 10.3.4 is essential. The flow diagrams found in a variety of locations within this manual depicting the T300/T300M in its standard configuration and with options installed can help in trouble shooting flow problems. For your convenience they are collected here. 06864D DCN7562 249 Troubleshooting and Service Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer SAMPLE GAS INLET 11.2.1. Particulate Filter INSTRUMENT CHASSIS GFC Motor Heat Sync GFC Wheel Housing EXHAUST GAS OUTLET SAMPLE CHAMBER PUMP Sample Gas In Span Gas In Zero Gas In Flow / Pressure Sensor PCA FLOW SENSOR Sample Gas Flow Control SAMPLE PRESSURE SENSOR Figure 11-6: T300/T300M – Basic Internal Gas Flow SAMPLE GAS INLET INSTRUMENT CHASSIS SPAN1 INLET SPAN2/VENT OUTLET ZERO AIR INLET Zero / Span Valve Sample / Cal Valve Particulate Filter GFC Motor Heat Sync GFC Wheel Housing SAMPLE CHAMBER EXHAUST GAS OUTLET PUMP Flow / Pressure Sensor PCA FLOW SENSOR SAMPLE PRESSURE SENSOR Sample Gas Flow Control Figure 11-7: Internal Pneumatic Flow OPT 50A – Zero/Span Valves (OPT 50A & 50B) 250 06864D DCN7562 Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Troubleshooting and Service Sample Gas In SAMPLE GAS INLET INSTRUMENT CHASSIS Span Gas In SPAN1 INLET SPAN2/VENT OUTLET Shutoff Valve Sample / Cal Valve Zero / Span Valve Particulate Filter GFC Motor Heat Sync GFC Wheel Housing SAMPLE CHAMBER Zero Gas In ZERO AIR INLET EXHAUST GAS OUTLET PUMP Flow / Pressure Sensor PCA FLOW SENSOR SAMPLE PRESSURE SENSOR Sample Gas In Span Gas In Zero Gas In Sample Gas Flow Control Figure 11-8: Internal Pneumatic Flow OPT 50B – Zero/Span/Shutoff Valves SAMPLE GAS INLET INSTRUMENT CHASSIS SPAN1 INLET Sample / Cal Valve Particulate Filter SPAN2/VENT OUTLET Zero / Span Valve GFC Motor Heat Sync GFC Wheel Housing ZERO AIR INLET ZERO Air Scrubber SAMPLE CHAMBER EXHAUST GAS OUTLET PUMP Flow / Pressure Sensor PCA FLOW SENSOR SAMPLE PRESSURE SENSOR Sample Gas Flow Control Figure 11-9: Internal Pneumatic Flow OPT 50H – Zero/Span Valves with Internal Zero Air Scrubber 06864D DCN7562 251 Troubleshooting and Service Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Sample Gas In SAMPLE GAS INLET INSTRUMENT CHASSIS Shutoff Valve Sample / Cal Valve Span Gas In SPAN1 INLET SPAN2/VENT OUTLET Zero / Span Valve Particulate Filter GFC Motor Heat Sync GFC Wheel Housing SAMPLE CHAMBER Zero Gas In ZERO AIR INLET ZERO Air Scrubber EXHAUST GAS OUTLET PUMP Flow / Pressure Sensor PCA FLOW SENSOR SAMPLE PRESSURE SENSOR Sample Gas Flow Control Figure 11-10: Internal Pneumatic Flow OPT 50E – Zero/Span/Shutoff w/ Internal Zero Air Scrubber INSTRUMENT CHASSIS SAMPLE GAS INLET Particulate Filter EXHAUST GAS OUTLET O 2 Sensor Flow Control O 2 Sensor GFC Motor Heat Sync GFC Wheel Housing SAMPLE CHAMBER 252 PUMP Flow / Pressure Sensor PCA SAMPLE PRESSURE SENSOR FLOW SENSOR Sample Gas Flow Control Figure 11-11: T300/T300M – Internal Pneumatics with O 2 Sensor Option 65A 06864D DCN7562 Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer SAMPLE GAS INLET EXHAUST GAS OUTLET Particulate Filter Troubleshooting and Service INSTRUMENT CHASSIS GFC Motor Heat Sync GFC Wheel Housing SAMPLE CHAMBER CO 2 Probe PUMP Flow / Pressure Sensor PCA SAMPLE PRESSURE SENSOR FLOW SENSOR Sample Gas Flow Control Figure 11-12: T300/T300M – Internal Pneumatics with CO 2 Sensor Option 67A 11.2.2. 11.2.2.1. The unit displays a SAMPLE FLOW warning message on the front panel display or the SAMPLE FLOW test function reports a zero or very low flow rate. Confirm that the sample pump is operating (turning). If not, use an AC voltmeter to make sure that power is being supplied to the pump if no power is present at the electrical leads of the pump. 1. If AC power is being supplied to the pump, but it is not turning, replace the pump. 2. If the pump is operating but the unit reports no gas flow, perform a flow check as 3. If no independent flow meter is available: • Disconnect the gas lines from both the sample inlet and the exhaust outlet on the rear panel of the instrument. • • • Make sure that the unit is in basic SAMPLE Mode. Place a finger over an Exhaust outlet on the rear panel of the instrument. If gas is flowing through the analyzer, you will feel pulses of air being expelled from the Exhaust outlet. 06864D DCN7562 253 Troubleshooting and Service Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer 4. If gas flows through the instrument when it is disconnected from its sources of zero air, span gas or sample gas, the flow problem is most likely not internal to the analyzer. Check to make sure that: • All calibrators/generators are turned on and working correctly. • • Gas bottles are not empty or low. Valves, regulators and gas lines are not clogged or dirty. 11.2.2.2. 1. Check if the pump diaphragm is in good condition. If not, rebuild the pump (see valve and re-check. 3. Check for the sample filter and the orifice filter for dirt. Replace filters (see 10.3.1). 4. Check for partially plugged pneumatic lines, or valves. Clean or replace them. 5. Check for plugged or dirty critical flow orifices. Replace them. 6. If an IZS option is installed in the instrument, press CALZ and CALS. If the flow increases then suspect a bad sample/cal valve. 11.2.2.3. The most common cause of high flow is a leak in the sample flow control assembly or between there and the pump. If no leaks or loose connections are found in the fittings or the gas line between the orifice and the pump, replace the critical flow orifice(s) inside the sample flow control assembly. 254 06864D DCN7562 Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Troubleshooting and Service 11.2.2.4. This warning means that there is inadequate gas flow. There are four conditions that might cause this: 1. A leak upstream or downstream of the flow sensor 2. A flow obstruction upstream or downstream of the flow sensor 3. Bad Flow Sensor Board 4. Bad pump To determine which case is causing the flow problem, view the sample pressure and sample flow functions on the front panel. If the sample pressure is reading abnormally low, then the cause is likely a flow obstruction upstream of the flow sensor. First, check the sample filter and make sure it is not plugged and then systematically check all the other components upstream of the orifice to ensure that they are not obstructed. If the sample pressure is reading normal but the sample flow is reading low then it is likely that the pump diaphragm is worn or there is an obstruction downstream of the flow sensor. 11.2.2.5. If the actual flow measured does not match the displayed flow, but is within the limits of 720-880 cm 3 /min, adjust the calibration of the flow measurement as described in Section 11.2.2.6. The sample pump should start immediately after the front panel power switch is turned ON. With the Sample Inlet plugged, the test function PRES should read about 10 in-Hg for a pump that is in good condition. The pump needs rebuilding if the reading is above 10 in-Hg. If the test function SAMP FL is greater than 10 cm 3 /min there is a leak in the pneumatic lines. 11.3. 11.3.1. There are several symptoms that can be caused by the analyzer being miscalibrated. This condition is indicated by out of range Slopes and Offsets as displayed through the test functions and is frequently caused by the following: 1. Bad span gas. This can cause a large error in the slope and a small error in the offset. Delivered from the factory, the T300 Analyzer’s slope is within ±15% of nominal. Bad span gas will cause the analyzer to be calibrated to the wrong value. If in doubt have the span gas checked by an independent lab. 2. Contaminated zero gas. Excess H 2 O can cause a positive or negative offset and will indirectly affect the slope. 3. Dilution calibrator not set up correctly or is malfunctioning. This will also cause the slope, but not the zero, to be incorrect. Again the analyzer is being calibrated to the wrong value. 06864D DCN7562 255 Troubleshooting and Service 256 Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer 4. Too many analyzers on the manifold. This can cause either a slope or offset error because ambient gas with its pollutants will dilute the zero or span gas. 11.3.2. As stated earlier, leaks both in the T300/T300M and in the external system are a common source of unstable and non-repeatable readings. 1. Check for leaks in the pneumatic systems as described in Section 10.3.3. Don’t forget to consider pneumatic components in the gas delivery system outside the T300/T300M such as: • A change in zero air source such as ambient air leaking into zero air line, or; • A change in the span gas concentration due to zero air or ambient air leaking into the span gas line. 2. Once the instrument passes a leak check, perform a flow check (see Section 10.3.4) to make sure adequate sample is being delivered to the sensor assembly. 3. A failing IR photo-detector may be at fault. Check the CO MEAS and CO REF test functions via the front panel display to make sure the signal levels are in the normal range (See Appendix A) and are quiet. 4. Confirm the sample pressure, wheel temperature, bench temperature, and sample flow readings are correct and have steady readings. 5. Disconnect the exhaust line from the optical bench near the rear of the instrument and plug this line into the SAMPLE inlet creating a pneumatic loop. The CO concentration (either zero or span) now must be constant. If readings become quiet, the problem is in the external pneumatics supplies for sample gas, span gas or zero air. 6. If pressurized span gas is being used with a zero/span valve option, make sure that the venting is adequate. 11.3.3. 1. Confirm that the carbon monoxide span gas source is accurate; this can be done by switching between two span-gas tanks. If the CO concentration is different, there is a problem with one of the tanks. 2. Check for leaks in the pneumatic systems as described in Section 10.3.3. 3. Make sure that the expected span gas concentration entered into the instrument during calibration is the correct span gas concentration and not too different from expected span value. This can be viewed via the CONC submenu of the Sample Displays. 4. Check to make sure that there is no ambient air or zero air leaking into span gas line. 11.3.4. 1. Confirm that there is a good source of zero air. Dilute a tank of span gas with the same amount of zero air from two different sources. If the CO Concentration of the two measurements is different, there is a problem with one of the sources of zero air. 2. Check for leaks in the pneumatic systems as described in 10.3.3. 3. If the analyzer has had zero/span valve options, the CO scrubber may need maintenance. 4. Check to make sure that there is no ambient air leaking into zero air line. 06864D DCN7562 Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Troubleshooting and Service 11.4. Dynamic problems (i.e. problems which only manifest themselves when the analyzer is monitoring sample gas) can be the most difficult and time consuming to isolate and resolve. The following provides an itemized list of the most common dynamic problems with recommended troubleshooting checks and corrective actions. 11.4.1. Individual control loops are used to maintain the set point of the absorption bench, filter wheel and IR photo-detector temperatures. If any of these temperatures are out of range or are poorly controlled, the T300/T300M will perform poorly. 11.4.1.1. OX EMPERATURE The box temperature sensor is mounted to the motherboard and cannot be disconnected to check its resistance. Rather check the BOX TEMP signal using the SIGNAL I/O function under the DIAG Menu (See Section 5.9.1). This parameter will vary with ambient temperature, but at ~30 o C (6-7° above room temperature) the signal should be ~1450 mV. AMPLE EMPERATURE The Sample Temperature should closely track the bench temperature. If it does not, locate the sensor, which is located at the midpoint of the optical bench in a brass fitting. Unplug the connector labeled “Sample”, and measure the resistance of the thermistor; at room temperature (25°C) it should be ~30K Ohms, at operating temperature, 48°C, it should be ~ 12K Ohms 11.4.1.2. There are three possible failures that could cause the Bench temperature to be incorrect. 1. The heater mounted to the bottom of the Absorption bench is electrically shorted or open. • Check the resistance of the two heater elements by measuring between pin 2 and 4 (~76 Ohms), and pin 3 and 4 (~330 Ohms), of the white five-pin connector just below the sample temperature sensor on the Bench (pin 1 is the pointed end). 2. Assuming that the I 2 C bus is working and that there is no other failure with the relay board, the solid-state relay (K2) on the relay board may have failed. • Using the BENCH_HEATER parameter under the signal I/O function, as described above, turn on and off K2 (D3 on the relay board should illuminate as the heater is turned on). • Check the AC voltage present between pin 2 and 4, for a 100 or 115 VAC model, and pins 3 and 4, for a 220-240 VAC model. WARNING E LECTRICAL S HOCK H AZARD Hazardous Voltages are present during this test. 06864D DCN7562 257 Troubleshooting and Service Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer 3. If the relay has failed there should be no change in the voltage across pins 2 and 4 or 3 and 4. Note: K2 is in a socket for easy replacement. 4. If K2 checks out OK, the thermistor temperature sensor located on the optical bench near the front of the instrument could be at fault. • Unplug the connector labeled “Bench”, and measure the resistance of the thermistor. • At room temperature it should have approximately 30K Ohms resistance; near the 48 o C set point it should have ~12K ohms. 11.4.1.3. Like the bench heater above there are three possible causes for the GFC Wheel temperature to have failed. 1. The wheel heater has failed. • Check the resistance between pins 1 and 4 on the white five-pin connector just below the sample temperature sensor on the bench (pin 1 is the pointed end). • It should be approximately 275 ohms. 2. Assuming that the I 2 C bus is working and that there is no other failure with the relay board; the solid-state relay (K1) on the relay board may have failed. • Using the WHEEL_HEATER parameter under the signal I/O function, as described above, turn on and off K1 (D2 on the relay board should illuminate as the heater is turned on). • Check the AC voltage present between pin 1 and 4. WARNING E LECTRICAL S HOCK H AZARD Hazardous Voltages are present during this test. 3. If the relay has failed there should be no change in the voltage across pins 1 and 4. • K1 is socketed for easy replacement. 4. If K1 checks out OK, the thermistor temperature sensor located at the front of the filter wheel assembly may have failed. 5. Unplug the connector labeled “Wheel”, and measure the resistance of the thermistor. The resistance near the 68°C set point is ~5.7k ohms. 258 06864D DCN7562 Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Troubleshooting and Service 11.4.1.4. If the PHT DRIVE test parameter described in Table 10-3 is out of range there are four possible causes of failure. 1. The screws retaining the IR photo detector to the absorption bench have become loose. • Carefully tighten the screws, hand-tight and note whether, after the analyzer has come up to operating temperature, whether the PHT DRIVE voltage has returned to an acceptable level. 2. The two large transistor-type devices mounted to the side of the Absorption Bench have come loose from the bench. • Tighten the retaining screws and note whether there is an improvement in the PHT DRIVE voltage. 3. The photo-detector has failed. Contact the factory for instructions. 4. The sync demodulator circuit board has failed. Contact the factor for instructions. 11.4.2. Noise is continuously monitored in the TEST functions as the STABIL reading and only becomes meaningful after sampling a constant gas concentration for at least 10 minutes. Compare the current STABIL reading with that recorded at the time of manufacture (included in the T300/T300M Final Test and Validation Data Sheet ,P/N 04271 shipped with the unit from Teledyne API). 1. The most common cause of excessive noise is leaks. Leak check and flow check the instrument described in Section 10.3.3 and 10.3.4. 2. Detector failure – caused by failure of the hermetic seal or over-temperature due to poor heat sinking of the detector can to the optical bench. • In addition to increased noise due to poor signal-to-noise ratio, another indicator of detector failure is a drop in the signal levels of the CO MEASURE signal and CO REFERENCE signal. 3. Sync/Demod Board failure. There are many delicate, high impedance parts on this board. Check the CO MEAS and CO REF Test Functions via the Front Panel Display. 4. The detector cooler control circuit can fail for reasons similar to the detector itself failing. Symptoms would be a change in MR RATIO Test Function when zero air is being sampled. 5. Also check the SIGNAL I/O parameter PHT DRIVE . • After warm-up, and at 25 working properly. o C ambient, if PHT DRIVE < 4800 mV, the cooler is • If PHT DRIVE is > 4800 mV there is a malfunction. 6. The +5 and ± 15 VDC voltages in the T300/T300M are provided by switching power supplies. 06864D DCN7562 259 Troubleshooting and Service Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer • • • • Switch mode supplies create DC outputs by switching the input AC waveform at high frequencies. As the components in the switcher age and degrade, the main problem observed is increased noise on the DC outputs. If a noisy switcher power supply is suspected, attach an oscilloscope to the DC output test points located on the top right hand edge of the Relay board. Look for short period spikes > 100 mV p-p on the DC output 11.5. The preceding subsections discussed a variety of methods for identifying possible sources of failures or performance problems within the analyzer. In most cases this included a list of possible causes. If the problem is not resolved at this point, the next step is to check the subsystems. This subsection describes how to determine whether an individual component or subsystem is the cause of the problem being investigated. 11.5.1. The analyzer is correctly configured for the AC mains voltage in use if: • • The Sample Pump is running. The GFC Wheel motor is spinning. LEDs D1 & D2 (located on the sync/demod PCA) should be flashing. • If incorrect power is suspected, check that the correct voltage and frequency is present at the line input on the rear panel. 260 06864D DCN7562 Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Troubleshooting and Service 11.5.2. If you have determined that the analyzer’s AC mains power is working, but the unit is still not operating properly, there may be a problem with one of the instrument’s switching power supplies. The supplies can have two faults, namely no DC output, and noisy output. To assist tracing DC Power Supply problems, the wiring used to connect the various printed circuit assemblies and DC Powered components and the associated test points on the relay board follow a standard color-coding scheme as defined in the following table. Table 11-6: NAME Dgnd +5V Agnd +15V -15V +12R +12V DC Power Test Point and Wiring Color Codes TEST POINT# 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 TP AND WIRE COLOR Black Red Green Blue Yellow Purple Orange A voltmeter should be used to verify that the DC voltages are correct per the values in the table below, and an oscilloscope, in AC mode, with band limiting turned on, can be used to evaluate if the supplies are producing excessive noise (> 100 mV p-p). Table 11-7: DC Power Supply Acceptable Levels POWER SUPPLY ASSY VOLTAGE PS1 PS1 PS1 PS1 PS1 PS2 PS2 +5 +15 -15 Agnd Chassis +12 Dgnd CHECK RELAY BOARD TEST POINTS FROM TEST POINT TO TEST POINT NAME Dgnd Agnd Agnd # 1 3 3 NAME +5 +15 -15V # 2 4 5 Agnd Dgnd +12V Ret +12V Ret 3 1 6 6 Dgnd Chassis +12V Dgnd 1 N/A 7 1 MIN V 4.8 13.5 -14V -0.05 -0.05 11.75 -0.05 MAX V 5.25 16V -16V 0.05 0.05 12.5 0.05 11.5.3. 2 Operation of the I 2 C bus can be verified by observing the behavior of D1 on the relay PCA. Assuming that the DC power supplies are operating properly, the I 2 C bus is operating properly if D1 on the relay PCA is flashing. 06864D DCN7562 261 Troubleshooting and Service Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer 11.5.4. Verify the functioning of the touchscreen by observing the display when pressing a touchscreen control button. Assuming that there are no wiring problems and that the DC power supplies are operating properly, if pressing a control button on the display does not change the display, any of the following may be the problem: • The touchscreen controller may be malfunctioning. • The internal USB bus may be malfunctioning. You can verify this failure by logging on to the instrument using APICOM or a terminal program to any of the communications ports. If the analyzer responds to remote commands and the display changes accordingly, the touchscreen interface may be faulty. 11.5.5. Verify the functioning of the front panel display by observing it when power is applied to the instrument. Assuming that there are no wiring problems and that the DC power supplies are operating properly, the display screen should light and show the splash screen with logo and other indications of its state as the CPU goes through its initialization process. 11.5.6. The relay board PCA (P/N 04135) can be most easily checked by observing the condition of the its status LEDs on the relay board, as described in Section 11.1.4.3, and the associated output when toggled on and off through signal I/O function in the diagnostic menu, see Section 11.1.3. 1. If the front panel display responds to button presses and D1 on the relay board is NOT flashing then either the wiring between the touchscreen and the relay board is bad, or the relay board is bad. 2. If D1 on the relay board is flashing and the status indicator for the output in question (heater power, valve drive, etc.) toggles properly using the signal I/O function, then the associated control device on the relay board is bad. • Several of the control devices are in sockets and can be easily replaced. • The table below lists the control device associated with a particular function: Table 11-8: Relay Board Control Devices FUNCTION Wheel Heater Bench Heater Spare AC Control IZS Valves IR Source Drive CONTROL DEVICE K1 K2 K3 U4 U5 IN SOCKET Yes Yes Yes Yes No The IR source drive output can be verified by measuring the voltage at J16 with the IR source disconnected. It should be 11.5± 0.5 VDC. 262 06864D DCN7562 Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Troubleshooting and Service 11.5.7. 11.5.7.1. To verify that the Sync/Demodulator Assembly is working, follow the procedure below: 1. Verify that D1 and D2 are flashing. • If not, check the opto pickup assembly, Section 11.5.7.3 and the GFC Wheel drive, Section 11.5.7.4. • If the wheel drive and opto pickup are working properly then verify that there is 2.4 ±0.1 VAC and 2.5 ±0.15 VDC between digital ground and TP 5 on the sync/demod board. If not then check the wiring between the sync/demod and opto pickup assembly (see interconnect drawing, P/N 04216). If good then the sync/demod board is bad. 2. Verify that the IR source is operating, Section 11.5.7.5. 3. With the analyzer connected to zero air, measure between TP11 (measure) and analog ground, and TP12 (reference) and analog ground. • If they are similar to values recorded on the factory data sheet then there is likely a problem with the wiring or the A/D converter. • If they are not then either the sync demodulator board or the IR-photodetector are bad. See Section 11.4.1.4 for problems with the IR-photodetector TEC drive. 11.5.7.2. The electric test function substitutes simulated signals for CO MEAS and CO REF, generated by circuitry on the sync/demod board. This function tests the filtering and amplification of that assembly along with the A/D converter on the motherboard. It should be noted that this will not test the IR photo detector itself. While in this mode the user can also view the same test functions viewable from the main SAMPLE display. When the test is running, the concentration reported on the front panel display should be at or near 40.0 ppm. SAMPLE RANGE=50.0 PPM CO= XX.XX Press NOTE: CO MEAS and CO REF will be artificially altered to enforce a CO reading of 40.0 ppm. All other Test Functions will report the correct operational value. 06864D DCN7562 DIAG OPTIC ELECTRICAL TEST PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT DIAG ELEC RANGE=50.0 PPM CO= 40 263 Troubleshooting and Service Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer 11.5.7.3. Operation of the opto pickup PCA (P/N 04088) can be verified with a voltmeter. Measure the AC and DC voltage between digital ground on the relay board, or touchscreen and TP2 and TP4 on the sync pickup PCA. For a working board, with the GFC motor spinning, they should read 2.4 ±0.1 VAC and 2.5 ±0.15 VDC. Further confirmation that the pickups and motor are operating properly can be obtained by measuring the frequency at TP2 and TP4 using a frequency counter, a digital voltmeter with a frequency counter, or an oscilloscope, per Table 11-9. Table 11-9: Opto Pickup Board Nominal Output Frequencies AC Mains Freq. 50 Hz 60 Hz Nominal Measured Frequency TP2 25 30 TP4 300 360 11.5.7.4. If the D1 and D2 on the sync demodulator board are not flashing then: 1. Check for power to the motor by measuring between pins 1 and 3 on the connector feeding the motor. • For instruments configured for 120 or 220-240VAC there should be approximately 88 VAC for instruments configured for 100VAC, it should be the voltage of the AC mains, approximately 100VAC. 2. Verify that the frequency select jumper, JP4, is properly set on the relay board. • • For 50 Hz operation it should be installed. For 60 Hz operation may either be missing or installed in a vertical orientation. 3. If there is power to the motor and the frequency select jumper is properly set then the motor is likely bad. • See Section 11.6.2 for instructions on removing and replacing the GFC assembly that the motor is bolted to. 11.5.7.5. The IR source can be checked using the following procedure: 1. With the source disconnected, energize the analyzer and wait for it to start operating. • Measure the drive Voltage between pins 1 and 2 on the jack that the source is normally connected to; it should be 11.5 ± 0.25 VDC. • If not, then the problem is with the wiring, the relay board, or the +12V power supply. 2. If the drive voltage is correct, then remove the source from the heat sink assembly (2 screws on top) and connect to its mating connector. • • • Observe the light being emitted from the source. It should be centered at the bottom of the U-shaped element. If there is either no emission or a badly centered emission, then the source is bad. 264 06864D DCN7562 Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Troubleshooting and Service 11.5.7.6. The pressure/flow sensor PCA, located on the top of the absorption bench, can be checked with a voltmeter using the following procedure which, assumes that the wiring is intact, and that the motherboard and the power supplies are operating properly: 1. For Pressure related problems: • Measure the voltage across C1 - it should be 5 ± 0.25 VDC. If not, then the board is bad. • • Measure the voltage across TP4 and TP1. With the sample pump disabled it should be 4500 mV ±250 mV. • With the pump energized it should be approximately 200 mV less. If the voltage is incorrect, then S1, the pressure transducer is bad, the board is bad, or there is a pneumatic failure preventing the pressure transducer from sensing the absorption cell pressure properly. 2. For flow related problems: • Measure the voltage across TP2 and TP1 - it should be 10 ±0.25 VDC. If not, then the board is bad. • • Measure the voltage across TP3 and TP1: With proper flow (800 sccm at the sample inlet) this should be approximately 4.5V (this voltage will vary with altitude). • With flow stopped (sample inlet blocked) the voltage should be approximately 1V. If the voltage is incorrect, the flow sensor is bad, the board is bad, or there is a leak upstream of the sensor. 06864D DCN7562 265 Troubleshooting and Service Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer 11.5.8. 11.5.8.1. The simplest method to check the operation of the A-to-D converter on the motherboard is to use the Signal I/O function under the DIAG menu to check the two A/D reference voltages and input signals that can be easily measured with a voltmeter. 1. Use the Signal I/O function (see Section 11.1.3 and Appendix A) to view the value of REF_4096_MV and REF_GND. • If both are within 3 mV of nominal (4096 and 0), and are stable, ±0.5 mV then the basic A/D is functioning properly. If not then the motherboard is bad. 2. Choose a parameter in the Signal I/O function such as SAMPLE_PRESSURE, SAMPLE_FLOW, CO_MEASURE or CO_REFERENCE. • Compare these voltages at their origin (see interconnect drawing, P/N 04215 and interconnect list, P/N 04216) with the voltage displayed through the signal I/O function. • If the wiring is intact but there is a large difference between the measured and displayed voltage (±10 mV) then the motherboard is bad. See also Sections 5.9.1 and 11.1.3. 11.5.8.2. The ANALOG OUTPUT submenu, located under the SETUP à MORE à DIAG menu is used to verify that the T300/T300M Analyzer’s analog outputs are working properly. The test generates a signal on functioning outputs simultaneously as shown in the following table. (See also Section 5.9.2). Table 11-10: Analog Output Test Function - Nominal Values Voltage Outputs STEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 % 0 20 40 60 80 100 FULL SCALE OUTPUT OF VOLTAGE RANGE 100MV 1V 5V 10V 0 NOMINAL OUTPUT VOLTAGE 0 0 0 20 mV 40 mV 60 mV 80 mV 100 mV 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1 2 3 4 5 2 4 6 8 10 For each of the steps the output should be within 1% of the nominal value listed in the table below except for the 0% step, which should be within 0mV ±2 mV. Make sure you take into account any offset that may have been programmed into channel (see If one or more of the steps fails to be within these ranges, it is likely that there has been a failure of either or both of the DACs and their associated circuitry on the motherboard. To perform the test connect a voltmeter to the output in question and perform an analog output step test as follows: 266 06864D DCN7562 Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Troubleshooting and Service SAMPLE RANGE=50.0 PPM CO= XXXX SETUP X.X PRIMARY SETUP MENU CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT 8 SETUP X.X ENTER PASSWORD 1 8 ENTR EXIT SETUP X.X SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMM VARS DIAG EXIT DIAG SIGNAL I/O PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT Performs analog output step test 0% to 100% DIAG AOUT ANALOG OUTPUT 20% EXIT • Pressing the button under “0%” pause the test. Brackets will appear around the value: EXAMPLE: [20%] • Pressing the same button again will resume the test. DIAG AOUT ANALOG OUTPUT [20%] EXIT 11.5.8.3. To verify that the analog outputs with the optional current mode output are working properly, connect a 250 ohm resistor across the outputs and use a voltmeter to measure the output as described in Section 5.9.3.6 and then perform an analog output step test as described in Section 11.5.8.2. For each step the output should be within 1% of the nominal value listed in the table below. Table 11-11: Analog Output Test Function - Nominal Values Voltage Outputs STEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 % 0 20 40 60 80 100 CURRENT 2 mA OUTPUT RANGE 2 -20 NOMINAL OUTPUT VALUES V(250 OHMS) CURRENT 0.5V 4 4 -20 V(250 OHMS) 1 5.6 9.2 12.8 16.4 20 1.4 2.3 3.2 4.1 5 7.2 10.4 13.6 16.8 20 1.8 2.6 3.4 4.2 5 06864D DCN7562 267 Troubleshooting and Service Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer 11.5.8.4. The procedure below can be used to test the Status outputs: 1. Connect a jumper between the “D“ pin and the “ ” pin on the status output connector. 2. Connect a 1000 ohm resistor between the “+” pin and the pin for the status output that is being tested. 3. Connect a voltmeter between the “ ” pin and the pin of the output being tested (see table below). Under the DIAG à SIGNAL I/O menu (see Section 11.1.3), scroll through the inputs and outputs until you get to the output in question. Alternately turn on and off the output noting the voltage on the voltmeter, it should vary between 0 volts for ON and 5 volts for OFF. Table 11-12: Status Outputs Check PIN (LEFT TO RIGHT) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 STATUS SYSTEM OK CONC VALID HIGH RANGE ZERO CAL SPAN CAL DIAG MODE SPARE SPARE 11.5.8.5. The control input bits can be tested by the following procedure: 1. Jumper the +5 pin on the Status connector to the U on the Control In connector. 2. Connect a second jumper from the _ pin on the Status connector to the A pin on the Control In connector. The instrument should switch from Sample Mode to ZERO CAL R mode. 3. Connect a second jumper from the _ pin on the Status connector to the B pin on the Control In connector. The instrument should switch from Sample Mode to SPAN CAL R mode. 4. In each case, the T300/T300M should return to Sample Mode when the jumper is removed. 268 06864D DCN7562 Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Troubleshooting and Service 11.5.9. There are two major types of CPU board failures, a complete failure and a failure associated with the Disk On Module (DOM). If either of these failures occurs, contact the factory. For complete failures, assuming that the power supplies are operating properly and the wiring is intact, the CPU is faulty if on power-on, the watchdog LED on the motherboard is not flashing. In some rare circumstances, this failure may be caused by a bad IC on the motherboard, specifically U57, the large, 44 pin device on the lower right hand side of the board. If this is true, removing U57 from its socket will allow the instrument to start up but the measurements will be invalid. If the analyzer stops during initialization (the front panel display shows a fault or warning message), it is likely that the DOM, the firmware or the configuration and data files have been corrupted. 11.5.10. 11.5.10.1. Teledyne API analyzers use the RS-232 communications protocol to allow the instrument to be connected to a variety of computer-based equipment. RS-232 has been used for many years and as equipment has become more advanced, connections between various types of hardware have become increasingly difficult. Generally, every manufacturer observes the signal and timing requirements of the protocol very carefully. Problems with RS-232 connections usually center around the following general areas: 1. Incorrect cabling and connectors. See Section 3.3 for connector and pin-out information. 2. The BAUD rate and protocol are incorrectly configured. See Section 6.2.2. 3. If a modem is being used, additional configuration and wiring rules must be 4. Incorrect setting of the DTE-DCE Switch. Ensure that switch is set correctly. See 5. Verify that cable (P/N 03596) that connects the serial COM ports of the CPU to J12 of the motherboard is properly seated. 06864D DCN7562 269 Troubleshooting and Service Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer 11.5.10.2. These are the general steps for troubleshooting problems with a modem connected to a Teledyne API analyzer. 1. Check cables for proper connection to the modem, terminal or computer. 2. Check to make sure the DTE-DCE is in the correct position as described in Section 3. Check to make sure the set up command is correct. See Section 8.3. 4. Verify that the Ready to Send (RTS) signal is at logic high. The T300/T300M sets pin 7 (RTS) to greater than 3 volts to enable modem transmission. 5. Make sure the BAUD rate, word length, and stop bit settings between modem and analyzer match. See Section 8.3. 6. Use the RS-232 test function to send “w” characters to the modem, terminal or 7. Get your terminal, modem or computer to transmit data to the analyzer (holding down the space bar is one way); the green LED should flicker as the instrument is receiving data. 8. Make sure that the communications software or terminal emulation software is functioning properly. Further help with serial communications is available in a separate manual “RS-232 Programming Notes” Teledyne API P/N 013500000. 11.5.11. 2 There are Two LEDs located on the CO 2 sensor PCA. Serial I/O (Not Used) LED V8 (Red) LED V9 (Green) To CO 2 Probe CPU Analog Output OVDC 5VDC Figure 11-13: Location of Diagnostic LEDs onCO 2 Sensor PCA • • Normal Operation: V8 is not lit – V9 is Blinking Error State: Both LEDs are blinking. Check to make sure that the cable to the CO 2 probe is properly connected. 270 06864D DCN7562 Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Troubleshooting and Service 11.6. This contains procedures that might need to be performed on rare occasions when a major component of the analyzer requires repair or replacement. 11.6.1. The critical flow orifice is housed in the flow control assembly (Teledyne API P/N 001760400) located on the top of the optical bench. A sintered filter protects the jewel orifice so it is unusual for the orifice to need replacing, but if it does, or the filter needs replacement please use the following procedure (see the Spare Parts list in Appendix B for part numbers and kits): 1. Turn off power to the analyzer. 2. Locate the assembly attached to the sample pump. See Figure 3-6. 3. Disconnect the pneumatic connection from the flow assembly and the assembly from the pump. 4. Remove the fitting and the components as shown in the exploded view below. 5. Replace the o-rings (P/N OR0000001) and the sintered filter (P/N FL0000001). 6. If replacing the critical flow orifice itself (P/N 000941000), make sure that the side with the colored window (usually red) is facing downstream to the gas flow. 7. Apply new Teflon ® tape to the male connector threads. 8. Re-assemble in reverse order. 9. After reconnecting the power and pneumatic lines, flow check the instrument as 06864D DCN7562 Figure 11-14: Critical Flow Restrictor Assembly/Disassembly 271 Troubleshooting and Service Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer 11.6.2. When removing or replacing the GFC Wheel it is important to perform the disassembly in the following order to avoid damaging the components: 1. Turn off the analyzer. 2. Remove the top cover. 3. Open the instrument’s hinged front panel. 4. Locate the GFC Wheel/motor assembly. See Figure 3-6. 5. Unplug the following electronic components: • • • The GFC Wheel housing temperature sensor GFC Wheel heater GFC Wheel motor power supply SOURCE ASSEMBLY SYNCHRONOUS MOTOR THERMISTOR HEATER SAFETY SHIELD Figure 11-15: Opening the GFC Wheel Housing 6. Remove the two (2) screws holding the opto-pickup printed circuit assembly to the GFC Wheel housing. 272 06864D DCN7562 Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Troubleshooting and Service 7. Carefully remove the opto-pickup printed circuit assembly. Opto-Pickup Figure 11-16: Removing the Opto-Pickup Assembly 8. Remove the three (3) screws holding the GFC Wheel motor/heat sink assembly to the GFC Wheel housing. 9. Carefully remove the GFC Wheel motor/heat sink assembly from the GFC Wheel housing. GFC WHEEL HOUSING 06864D DCN7562 Figure 11-17: Removing the GFC Wheel Housing 273 Troubleshooting and Service Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer 10. Remove the one (1) screw fastening the GFC Wheel/mask assembly to the GFC motor hub. Figure 11-18: Removing the GFC Wheel 11. Remove the GFC Wheel/mask assembly. 12. Follow the previous steps in reverse order to put the GFC Wheel/motor assembly back together. 11.6.3. 11.6.3.1. The T300/T300M Analyzers will operate accurately as long as the sync/demodulator circuit gain is properly adjusted. To determine if this gain factor is correct: 1. Make sure that the analyzer is turned on and warmed up. 2. Set the analyzer display to show the STABIL or CO STB test function. 3. Apply Zero Air to Sample Inlet of the analyzer. 4. Wait until the stability reading falls below 1.0 ppm. 5. Change the analyzer display to show the CO MEAS • The value of CO MEAS to operate correctly. must be > 2800 mV and < 4800 mV for the instrument • Optimal value for CO MEAS is 4500 mV ± 300 mV. If it is not, adjust the value. 274 06864D DCN7562 Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Troubleshooting and Service 11.6.3.2. To adjust the sync/demodulator circuit gain: 1. Make sure that the analyzer is turned on and warmed up. 2. Set the analyzer display to show the STABIL or CO STB test function. 3. Apply Zero Air to Sample Inlet of the analyzer. 4. Wait until the stability reading falls below 1.0 ppm. 5. Change the analyzer display to show the CO MEAS. 6. Remove the Sync/Demod Housing • Remove the two mounting screws. • Carefully lift the housing to reveal the sync/demod PCA. Figure 11-19: Location of Sync/Demod Housing Mounting Screws 7. Adjust potentiometer VR1 until CO MEAS reads 4500 mV ± 300 mV 06864D DCN7562 Figure 11-20: Location of Sync/Demod Gain Potentiometer 275 Troubleshooting and Service Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer 11.6.4. ATTENTION COULD DAMAGE INSTRUMENT AND VOID WARRANTY http://www.teledyne api.com Replacing the Disk-on-Module (DOM) will cause loss of all DAS data; it may also cause loss of some instrument configuration parameters unless the replacement DOM carries the exact same firmware version. Whenever changing the version of installed software, the memory must be reset. Failure to ensure that memory is reset can cause the analyzer to malfunction, and invalidate measurements. After the memory is reset, the A/D converter must be re-calibrated, and all information collected in Step 1 below must be re-entered before the instrument will function correctly. Also, zero and span calibration should be performed. 1. Document all analyzer parameters that may have been changed, such as range, auto-cal, analog output, serial port and other settings before replacing the DOM 2. Turn off power to the instrument, fold down the rear panel by loosening the mounting screws. 3. When looking at the electronic circuits from the back of the analyzer, locate the Disk-on-Module in the right-most socket of the CPU board. 4. The DOM should carry a label with firmware revision, date and initials of the programmer. 5. Remove the nylon standoff clip that mounts the DOM over the CPU board, and lift the DOM off the CPU. Do not bend the connector pins. 6. Install the new Disk-on-Module, making sure the notch at the end of the chip matches the notch in the socket. 7. It may be necessary to straighten the pins somewhat to fit them into the socket. Press the chip all the way in. 8. Close the rear panel and turn on power to the machine. 9. If the replacement DOM carries a firmware revision, re-enter all of the setup information. 276 06864D DCN7562 Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Troubleshooting and Service 11.7. The following is a list from the Teledyne API’s Technical Support Department of the most commonly asked questions relating to the T300/T300M CO Analyzer. QUESTION ANSWER Why does the ENTR button sometimes disappear on the Front Panel Display? During certain types of adjustments or configuration operations, the ENTR button will disappear if you select a setting that is out of the allowable range for that parameter (such as trying to set the 24-hour clock to 25:00:00, or selecting a DAS hold off period of more than 20 minutes). Once you adjust the setting in question to an allowable value, the ENTR button will re-appear. Why is the ZERO or SPAN button not displayed during calibration? The T300/T300M disables these buttons when the expected span or zero value entered by the users is too different from the gas concentration actually measured value at the time. This is to prevent the accidental recalibration of the analyzer to an out-of-range response curve. EXAMPLE: The span set point is 40 ppm but gas concentration being measured is only 5 ppm. For more information, see Sections 11.3.3 and 11.3.4. How do I enter or change the value of my Span Gas? Press the CONC button found under the CAL or CALS buttons of the main SAMPLE display menus to enter the expected CO span concentration. See Section 0 for more information. Why does the analyzer not respond to span gas? There could be something wrong with a span gas tank, or a span gas concentration was entered incorrectly, or there could be a pneumatic leak. Section 11.3.3 addresses these issues. Is there an optional midpoint calibration? There is an optional mid-point linearity adjustment; however, midpoint adjustment is applicable only to applications where CO measurements are expected above 100 ppm. Call Teledyne API’s Technical Support Department for more information on this topic. What do I do if the concentration on the instrument's front panel display does not match the value recorded or displayed on my data logger even if both instruments are properly calibrated? This most commonly occurs for one of the following reasons: • a difference in circuit ground between the analyzer and the data logger or a wiring problem • a scale problem with the input to the data logger (The analog outputs of the T300/T300M can be manually adjusted to compensate for either or both of these effects, see Section • the analog outputs are not calibrated, which can happen after a firmware upgrade (Both the electronic scale and offset of the analog outputs can be adjusted; see Section 5.9.3.2. Alternately, use the data logger itself as the metering device during calibration procedures. 06864D DCN7562 277 Troubleshooting and Service Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer QUESTION How do I perform a leak check? How do I measure the sample flow? Can I automate the calibration of my analyzer? Sample flow is measured by attaching a calibrated rotameter, wet test meter, or other flow-measuring device to the sample inlet port when the instrument is operating. The sample flow should be 800 cm 3 /min ± 10%. How long does the IR source last? Typical lifetime is about 2-3 years. Can I use the IZS option to calibrate the analyzer? Any analyzer with zero/span valve or IZS option can be automatically calibrated using the instrument’s AutoCal feature. The setup of this option is located in Section 9.4. Yes. However, whereas this may be acceptable for basic calibration checks, the IZS option is not permitted as a calibration source in applications following US EPA protocols. To achieve highest accuracy, it is recommended to use cylinders of calibrated span gases in combination with a zero air source. Q: What is the averaging time for an T300/T300M? ANSWER Section 10.3.3 provides leak check instructions. A: The default averaging time, optimized for ambient pollution monitoring, is 150 seconds for stable concentrations and 10 seconds for rapidly changing concentrations (see Section 12.5.1 for more information). However, it is adjustable over a range of 0.5 second to 200 seconds (please contact Technical Support for more information). 11.8. If this manual and its troubleshooting / repair sections do not solve your problems, technical assistance may be obtained from: Teledyne API Technical Support 9970 Carroll Canyon Road San Diego, California 92131-1106 USA Toll-free Phone: 800-324-5190 Phone: Fax: Email: Website: +1 858-657-9800 +1 858-657-9816 [email protected] http://www.teledyne-api.com/ Before contacting Teledyne API Tech Support, please fill out the problem report form, available online for electronic submission at http://www.teledyne-api.com. 278 06864D DCN7562 The T300/T300M Gas Filter Correlation Carbon monoxide Analyzer is a microprocessor-controlled analyzer that determines the concentration of carbon monoxide (CO) in a sample gas drawn through the instrument. It requires that the sample and calibration gases be supplied at ambient atmospheric pressure in order to establish a stable gas flow through the sample chamber where the gases ability to absorb infrared radiation is measured. Calibration of the instrument is performed in software and does not require physical adjustments to the instrument. During calibration, the microprocessor measures the current state of the IR Sensor output and various other physical parameters of the instrument and stores them in memory. The microprocessor uses these calibration values, the IR absorption measurements made on the sample gas along with data regarding the current temperature and pressure of the gas to calculate a final CO concentration. This concentration value and the original information from which it was calculated are stored in one of the unit’s internal data acquisition system (DAS - See Sections 7) as well as reported to the user via front panel display display or a variety of digital and analog signal outputs. 06864D DCN7562 279 Theory of Operation Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer 12.1. This section presents measurement principles and fundamentals for this instrument. 12.1.1. The basic principle by which the analyzer works is called the Beer-Lambert Law or Beer’s Law. It defines how light of a specific wavelength is absorbed by a particular gas molecule over a certain distance. The mathematical relationship between these three parameters is: I = I o e α L c Equation 12-1 Where: I is the intensity of the light if there was no absorption. I is the intensity with absorption. L is the absorption path, or the distance the light travels as it is being absorbed. C is the concentration of the absorbing gas; in the case of the T300/T300M, Carbon Monoxide (CO). α is the absorption coefficient that tells how well CO absorbs light at the specific wavelength of interest. 12.2. In the most basic terms, the T300/T300M uses a high-energy heated element to generate a beam of broad-band IR light with a known intensity (measured during instrument calibration). This beam is directed through multi-pass cell filled with sample gas. The sample cell uses mirrors at each end to reflect the IR beam back and forth through the sample gas a number of times (see Figure 12-1). The total length that the reflected light travels is directly related to the intended sensitivity of the instrument. The lower the concentrations the instrument is designed to detect, the longer the light path must be in order to create detectable levels of attenuation. Lengthening the absorption path is accomplished partly by making the physical dimension of the reaction cell longer, but primarily by adding extra passes back and forth along the length of the chamber. Table 12-1: Absorption Path Lengths for T300 and T300M MODEL T300 T300M TOTAL NUMBER OF REFLECTIVE PASSES 32 8 DISTANCE BETWEEN MIRRORS 437.5 mm 312.5 mm TOTAL ABSORPTION LIGHT PATH 14 Meters 2.5 Meters 06864D DCN7562 280 Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Sample Chamber Band-Pass Filter Theory of Operation IR Source Photo-Detector IR Beam Figure 12-1: Measurement Fundamentals Upon exiting the sample cell, the beam shines through a band-pass filter that allows only light at a wavelength of 4.7 µm to pass. Finally, the beam strikes a solid-state photo detector that converts the light signal into a modulated voltage signal representing the attenuated intensity of the beam. 12.2.1. Unfortunately, water vapor absorbs light at 4.7 µm too. To overcome the interfering effects of water vapor the T300/T300M adds another component to the IR light path called a Gas Filter Correlation (GFC) Wheel. Measurement Cell (Pure N 2 ) Reference Cell (N 2 with CO) Figure 12-2: GFC Wheel 12.2.1.1. A GFC Wheel is a metallic wheel into which two chambers are carved. The chambers are sealed on both sides with material transparent to 4.7 µm IR radiation creating two airtight cavities. Each cavity is mainly filled with composed gases. One cell is filled with pure N 2 (the measurement cell) . The other is filled with a combination of N 2 and a high concentration of CO (the reference cell). 06864D DCN7562 281 Theory of Operation IR unaffected by N 2 in Measurement Cell Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Δ H IR is affected by CO in Reference Cell IR Source M R Photo-Detector GFC Wheel Figure 12-3: Measurement Fundamentals with GFC Wheel As the GFC Wheel spins, the IR light alternately passes through the two cavities. When the beam is exposed to the reference cell, the CO in the gas filter wheel strips the beam of most of the IR at 4.7 μm. When the light beam is exposed to the measurement cell, the N 2 in the filter wheel does not absorb IR light. This causes a fluctuation in the intensity of the IR light striking the photo-detector which results in the output of the detector resembling a square wave. 12.2.1.2. The T300/T300M determines the amount of CO in the sample chamber by computing the ratio between the peak of the measurement pulse ( CO MEAS ) and the peak of the reference pulse ( CO REF ). If no gases exist in the sample chamber that absorb light at 4.7 μm, the high concentration of CO in the gas mixture of the reference cell will attenuate the intensity of the IR beam by 60% giving a M/R ratio of approximately 2.4:1. Adding CO to the sample chamber causes the peaks corresponding to both cells to be attenuated by a further percentage. Since the intensity of the light passing through the measurement cell is greater, the effect of this additional attenuation is greater. This causes CO MEAS to be more sensitive to the presence of CO in the sample chamber than CO REF and the ratio between them (M/R) to move closer to 1:1 as the concentration of CO in the sample chamber increases. 282 06864D DCN7562 Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer IR unaffected by N 2 in Measurement Cell of the GDC Wheel and no additional CO in the Sample Chamber Theory of Operation CO MEAS CO REF IR affected by CO in Reference Cell with no interfering gas in the Sample Chamber IR shining through Measurement Cell of the GDC Wheel is reduced by additional CO in the Sample Chamber M/R is reduced IR shining through Reference Cell is also reduced by additional CO in the Sample Chamber, but to a lesser extent Figure 12-4: Effect of CO in the Sample on CO MEAS & CO REF Once the T300/T300M has computed this ratio, a look-up table is used, with interpolation, to linearize the response of the instrument. This linearized concentration value is combined with calibration SLOPE and OFFSET values to produce the CO concentration which is then normalized for changes in sample pressure. 06864D DCN7562 283 Theory of Operation Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer NTERFERENCE AND IGNAL TO OISE EJECTION If an interfering gas, such as H 2 O vapor is introduced into the sample chamber, the spectrum of the IR beam is changed in a way that is identical for both the reference and the measurement cells, but without changing the ratio between the peak heights of CO MEAS and CO REF . In effect, the difference between the peak heights remains the same. M/R is Shifted IR shining through both cells is affected equally by interfering gas in the Sample Chamber Figure 12-5: Effects of Interfering Gas on CO MEAS & CO REF Thus, the difference in the peak heights and the resulting M/R ratio is only due to CO and not to interfering gases. In this case, GFC rejects the effects of interfering gases and so that the analyzer responds only to the presence of CO. To improve the signal-to-noise performance of the IR photo-detector, the GFC Wheel also incorporates an optical mask that chops the IR beam into alternating pulses of light and dark at six times the frequency of the measure/reference signal. This limits the detection bandwidth helping to reject interfering signals from outside this bandwidth improving the signal to noise ratio. The IR Signal as the Photo Detector sees it after being chopped by the GFC Wheel S CO REF CO MEAS Figure 12-6: Chopped IR Signal 284 06864D DCN7562 Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Theory of Operation 12.2.1.3. The basic design of the T300/T300M rejects most of this interference at a 300:1 ratio. The two primary methods used to accomplish this are: • The 4.7μm band pass filter just before the IR sensor which allows the instrument to only react to IR absorption in the wavelength affected by CO. • Comparison of the measure and reference signals and extraction of the ratio between them. • Pneumatic Operation CAUTION – G ENERAL S AFETY H AZARD It is important that the sample airflow system is both leak tight and not pressurized over ambient pressure. Regular leak checks should be performed on the analyzer as described in the maintenance schedule, Table 10-1. Procedures for correctly performing leak checks can be found in Section 10.3.3. An internal pump evacuates the sample chamber creating a small vacuum that draws sample gas into the analyzer. Normally the analyzer is operated with its inlet near ambient pressure either because the sample is directly drawn at the inlet or a small vent is installed at the inlet. There are several advantages to this “pull through” configuration. 06864D DCN7562 285 Theory of Operation SAMPLE GAS INLET EXHAUST GAS OUTLET Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer • • • • By placing the pump down stream from the sample chamber several problems are avoided. First the pumping process heats and compresses the sample air complicating the measurement process. Additionally, certain physical parts of the pump itself are made of materials that might chemically react with the sample gas. Finally, in certain applications where the concentration of the target gas might be high enough to be hazardous, maintaining a negative gas pressure relative to ambient means that should a minor leak occur, no sample gas will be pumped into the atmosphere surrounding analyzer. Particulate Filter INSTRUMENT CHASSIS GFC Motor Heat Sync GFC Wheel Housing SAMPLE CHAMBER PUMP Flow / Pressure Sensor PCA FLOW SENSOR SAMPLE PRESSURE SENSOR Sample Gas Flow Control Figure 12-7: Internal Pneumatic Flow – Basic Configuration 12.3. To maintain a constant flow rate of the sample gas through the instrument, the T300/T300M uses a special flow control assembly located in the exhaust gas line just before the pump. In instruments with the O 2 sensor installed, a second flow control assembly is located between the O 2 sensor assembly and the pump. These assemblies consist of: • • A critical flow orifice. Two o-rings: Located just before and after the critical flow orifice, the o-rings seal the gap between the walls of assembly housing and the critical flow orifice. • A spring: Applies mechanical force needed to form the seal between the o-rings, the critical flow orifice and the assembly housing. 286 06864D DCN7562 Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Theory of Operation 12.3.1.1. The most important component of this flow control assembly is the critical flow orifice. Critical flow orifices are a remarkably simple way to regulate stable gas flow rates. They operate without moving parts by taking advantage of the laws of fluid dynamics. By restricting the flow of gas though the orifice, a pressure differential is created. This pressure differential combined with the action of the analyzer’s pump draws the gas through the orifice. As the pressure on the downstream side of the orifice (the pump side) continues to drop, the speed that the gas flows through the orifice continues to rise. Once the ratio of upstream pressure to downstream pressure is greater than 2:1, the velocity of the gas through the orifice reaches the speed of sound. As long as that ratio stays at least 2:1, the gas flow rate is unaffected by any fluctuations, surges, or changes in downstream pressure because such variations only travel at the speed of sound themselves and are therefore cancelled out by the sonic shockwave at the downstream exit of the critical flow orifice. 06864D DCN7562 Figure 12-8: Flow Control Assembly & Critical Flow Orifice The actual flow rate of gas through the orifice (volume of gas per unit of time), depends on the size and shape of the aperture in the orifice. The larger the hole, the more the gas molecules move at the speed of sound and pass through the orifice. Because the flow rate of gas through the orifice is only related to the minimum 2:1 pressure differential and not absolute pressure, the flow rate of the gas is also unaffected by degradations in pump efficiency due to age. The critical flow orifice used in the T300/T300M is designed to provide a flow rate of 800 cc/min. 287 Theory of Operation Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer 12.3.2. The T300/T300M Analyzer comes equipped with a 47 mm diameter, Teflon, particulate filter with a 5 micron pore size. The filter is accessible through the front panel, which folds down to allow access, and should be changed according to the suggested maintenance schedule described in Table 10-1. 12.3.3. There are two pneumatic sensors: one each to measure sample pressure and flow. 12.3.3.1. An absolute value pressure transducer plumbed to the outlet of the sample chamber is used to measure sample pressure. The output of the sensor is used to compensate the concentration measurement for changes in air pressure. This sensor is mounted to a printed circuit board with the Sample Flow Sensor on the sample chamber (see Section 12.3.3.2. A thermal-mass flow sensor is used to measure the sample flow through the analyzer. The sensor is calibrated at the factory with ambient air or N 2 , but can be calibrated to operate with samples consisting of other gases such as CO. This sensor is mounted to a printed circuit board with the Sample Pressure Sensor on the sample chamber (see Section 12.3.3.1 and Figure 3-4). 12.4. Figure 12-9 shows a block diagram of the major electronic components of the analyzer. The core of the analyzer is a microcomputer/central processing unit (CPU) that controls various internal processes, interprets data, makes calculations, and reports results using specialized firmware developed by Teledyne API. It communicates with the user as well as receives data from and issues commands to a variety of peripheral devices via a separate printed circuit assembly called the motherboard. The motherboard is directly mounted to the inside rear panel and collects data, performs signal conditioning duties and routes incoming and outgoing signals between the CPU and the analyzer’s other major components. Data are generated by a gas-filter-correlation optical bench which outputs an analog signal corresponding to the concentration of CO in the sample gas. This analog signal is transformed into two, pre-amplified, DC voltages ( CO MEAS and CO REF ) by a synchronous demodulator printed circuit assembly. CO MEAS and CO REF are converted into digital data by a unipolar, analog-to-digital converter, located on the motherboard. A variety of sensors report the physical and operational status of the analyzer’s major components, again through the signal processing capabilities of the motherboard. These status reports are used as data for the CO concentration calculation and as trigger events for certain control commands issued by the CPU. This information is stored in memory by the CPU and in most cases can be viewed but the user via the front panel display. 288 06864D DCN7562 Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Theory of Operation The CPU issues commands via a series of relays and switches (also over the I 2 C bus) located on a separate printed circuit assembly to control the function of key electromechanical devices such as heaters, motors and valves. The CPU communicates with the user and the outside world in several ways: • • • • • Through the analyzer’s front panel LCD touch-screen interface RS-232 and RS-485 serial I/O channels Various analog voltage and current outputs Several digital I/O channels Ethernet 06864D DCN7562 289 Theory of Operation Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Box Temp Power- Up Circuit A1 A3 ANALOG IN RS232 Male Analog Outputs Optional 4- 20 mA Analog Outputs (D/A) 1 – 8 1 – 6 External Digital I/O) A/D Converter( V/F) (I 2 COM2 Female C Bus) USB COM port Ethernet MOTHER BOARD Touchscreen Display LVDS transmitter board PC 104 CPU Card Disk On Module Flash Chip SAMPLE TEMP BENCH TEMP WHEEL TEMP O 2 SENSOR TEMP (optional) Thermistor Interface Internal Digital I/O Sensor Inputs I 2 C Bus C O M E A S C O F R E SYNC DEMOD Schmidt Trigger O 2 Optional Sensor Sample Flow & Pressure Sensors Optional CO 2 Sensor TEC Control PHT Drive Photo detector Detector Output GFC Wheel Optical Bench Segment Sensor M / R Sensor Zero/Span Valve Options RELAY BOARD CPU Status LED IR Source GFC Motor PUMP Wheel Heater Bench Heater Figure 12-9: Electronic Block Diagram 290 06864D DCN7562 Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Theory of Operation 12.4.1. The unit’s CPU card is installed on the motherboard located inside the rear panel. It is a low power (5 VDC, 720mA max), high performance, Vortex 86SX-based microcomputer running Windows CE. Its operation and assembly conform to the PC/104 specification. Figure 12-10. CPU Board The CPU includes two types of non-volatile data storage: a Disk-On-Module (DOM) and an embedded flash chip. 12.4.1.1. The DOM is a 44-pin IDE flash drive with a storage capacity up to 128 MB. It is used to store the computer’s operating system, the Teledyne API firmware, and most of the operational data generated by the analyzer’s internal data acquisition system (DAS). 12.4.1.2. This non-volatile, embedded flash chip includes 2MB of storage for calibration data as well as a backup of the analyzer configuration. Storing these key data on a less heavily accessed chip significantly decreases the chance of data corruption. 06864D DCN7562 291 Theory of Operation Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer In the unlikely event that the flash chip should fail, the analyzer will continue to operate with just the DOM. However, all configuration information will be lost, requiring that the unit be recalibrated. 12.4.2. Electronically, in the case of the optical bench for the T300 Analyzer, GFC Wheel and associated components do more than simply measure the amount of CO present in the sample chamber. A variety of other critical functions are performed here as well. 12.4.2.1. Because the temperature of a gas affects its density resulting in the amount of light absorbed by that gas, it is important to reduce the effect of fluctuations in ambient temperature on the T300’s measurement of CO for the T300 Analyzer. To accomplish this both the temperature of the sample chamber and the GFC Wheel are maintained at constant temperatures above their normal operating ranges. ENCH EMPERATURE To minimize the effects of ambient temperature variations on the sample measurement, the sample chamber is heated to 48 ° C (8 degrees above the maximum suggested ambient operating temperature for the analyzer). A strip heater attached to the underside of the chamber housing is the heat source. The temperature of the sample chamber is sensed by a thermistor, also attached to the sample chamber housing. HEEL EMPERATURE To minimize the effects of temperature variations caused by the near proximity of the IR Source to the GFC Wheel on the gases contained in the wheel, it is also raised to a high temperature level. Because the IR Source itself is very hot, the set point for this heat circuit is 68 ° C. A cartridge heater implanted into the heat sync on the motor is the heat source. The temperature of the wheel/motor assembly is sensed by a thermistor also inserted into the heat sync. Both heaters operate off of the AC line voltage supplied to the instrument. 12.4.2.2. The light used to detect CO in the sample chamber is generated by an element heated to approximately 1100 o C producing infrared radiation across a broad band. This radiation is optically filtered after it has passed through the GFC Wheel and the sample chamber and just before it reaches the photo-detector to eliminate all black body radiation and other extraneous IR emitted by the various components of those components. 12.4.2.3. A synchronous AC motor turns the GFC Wheel motor. For analyzers operating on 60Hz line power this motor turns at 1800 rpm. For those operating on 50Hz line power the spin rate is 1500 rpm. The actual spin rate is unimportant within a large range since a phase lock loop circuit is used to generate timing pulses for signal processing. In order to accurately interpret the fluctuations of the IR beam after it has passed through the sample gas, the GFC Wheel several other timing signals are produced by 292 06864D DCN7562 Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Theory of Operation other photo emitters/detectors. These devices consist of a combination LED and detector mounted so that the light emitted by the LED shines through the same mask on the GFC Wheel that chops the IR beam. KEY: Detection Beam shining through MEASUREMENT side of GFC Wheel Detection Beam shining of GFC Wheel IR Detection Ring Segment Sensor Ring M/R Sensor Ring Figure 12-11: GFC Light Mask ENSOR This emitter/detector assembly produces a signal that shines through a portion of the mask that allows light to pass for half of a full revolution of the wheel. The resulting light signal tells the analyzer whether the IR beam is shining through the measurement or the reference side of the GFC Wheel. EGMENT ENSOR Light from this emitter/detector pair shines through a portion of the mask that is divided into the same number of segments as the IR detector ring. It is used by the synchronous/demodulation circuitry of the analyzer to latch onto the most stable part of each measurement and reference IR pulse. 06864D DCN7562 293 Theory of Operation Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Measurement Pulses Reference Pulses IR Beam Pulses Segment Sensor Pulses MR Sensor Pulses Figure 12-12: Segment Sensor and M/R Sensor Output CHMIDT RIGGERS To ensure that the waveforms produced by the Segment Sensor and the M/R Sensor are properly shaped and clean, these signals are passed through a set of Schmidt Triggers circuits. 12.4.2.4. The IR beam is converted into an electrical signal by a cooled solid-state photo-conductive detector. The detector is composed of a narrow-band optical filter, a piece of lead-salt crystal whose electrical resistance changes with temperature, and a two-stage thermo-electric cooler. When the analyzer is on, a constant electrical current is directed through the detector. The IR beam is focused onto the detector surface, raising its temperature and lowering its electrical resistance that results in a change in the voltage drop across the detector. During those times that the IR beam is bright, the temperature of the detector is high; the resistance of the detector is correspondingly low and its output voltage output is low. During those times when the IR beam intensity is low or completely blocked by the GFC Wheel mask, the temperature of the detector is lowered by the two-stage thermo electric cooler, increasing the detector’s resistance and raising the output voltage. 12.4.3. While the photo-detector converts fluctuations of the IR beam into electronic signals, the Sync/Demod Board amplifies these signals and converts them into usable information. Initially the output by the photo-detector is a complex and continuously changing waveform made up of Measure and Reference pulses. The sync/demod board demodulates this waveform and outputs two analog DC voltage signals, corresponding to the peak values of these pulses. CO MEAS and CO REF are converted into digital signals by circuitry on the motherboard then used by the CPU to calculate the CO concentration of the sample gas. Additionally the synch/demod board contains circuitry that controls the photo-detector’s thermoelectric cooler as well as circuitry for performing certain diagnostic tests on the analyzer. 294 06864D DCN7562 Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer 56V Bias Theory of Operation Photo detector Pre Amp TEC Control PHT DRIVE Dark Switch E-Test Generator Variable Gain Amp Sample & Hold Circuits (x4) Signal Conditioner CO MEAS Signal Amplifiers CO Reference M/R Sensor Segment Sensor E Test Control Dark Switch Control Thermo-Electric Cooler Control Circuit Compact Programmable Logic Device E Test A Gate E Test B Gate Dark Test Gate Measure Gate Measure Dark Gate Reference Gate Reference Dark Gate From GFC Wheel From CPU via Mother Board ÷ 10 Segment Clock X1 Reference X10 Clock Phase Lock x10 Phase Lock Loop Phase Lock Warning Figure 12-13: T300/T300M Sync/Demod Block Diagram M/R Status LED Segment Status LED 12.4.3.1. The signal emitted by the IR photo-detector goes through several stages of amplification before it can be accurately demodulated. The first is a pre-amplification stage that raises the signal to levels readable by the rest of the sync/demod board circuitry. The second is a variable amplification stage that is adjusted at the factory to compensate for performance variations of mirrors, detectors, and other components of the optical bench from instrument to instrument. The workhorses of the sync/demod board are the four sample-and-hold circuits that capture various voltage levels found in the amplified detector signal needed to determine the value of CO MEAS and CO REF . They are activated by logic signals under the control of a compact Programmable Logic Device (PLD), which in turn responds to the output of the Segment Sensor and M/R Sensor as shown in Figure 12-9. 06864D DCN7562 295 Theory of Operation Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer The four sample and hold circuits are designated as follows: Table 12-2: Sync DEMOD Sample and Hold Circuits Designation Measure Gate Measure Dark Gate Reference Gate Reference Dark Gate Active When: IR BEAM PASSING THROUGH MEASUREMENT cell of GFC Wheel MEASUREMENT Cell of GFC Wheel REFERENCE cell of GFC Wheel REFERENCE cell of GFC Wheel Segment Sensor Pulse is: HIGH LOW HIGH LOW Timing for activating the Sample and Hold Circuits is provided by a Phase Lock Loop (PLL) circuit. Using the segment sensor output as a reference signal the PLL generates clock signal at ten times that frequency. This faster clock signal is used by the PLD to make the Sample and Hold Circuits capture the signal during the center portions of the detected waveform, ignore the rising and falling edges of the detector signal. Sample & Hold Active Detector Output Sample & Hold Inactive Figure 12-14: Sample & Hold Timing 12.4.3.2. The following two status LEDs located on the sync/demod board provide additional diagnostic tools for checking the GFC Wheel rotation. Table 12-3: LED D1 D2 Sync/Demod Status LED Activity Function M/R Sensor Status Segment Sensor Status Status OK LED flashes approximately 2/second LED flashes approximately 6/second Fault Status LED is stuck ON or OFF LED is stuck ON or OFF See Section 11.1.4.2 for more information. 296 06864D DCN7562 Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Theory of Operation 12.4.3.3. The sync/demod board also contains circuitry that controls the IR photo-detector’s Thermal Electric Coolers (TEC). A drive voltage, PHT DRIVE , is supplied to the coolers by the sync/demod board which is adjusted by the sync/demod board based on a return signal called TEC control which alerts the sync/demod board of the detector’s temperature. The warmer the detector, the harder the coolers are driven. PHT DRIVE is one of the Test Functions viewable by the user via the form panel. Press or TST> until it appears on the display. 12.4.3.4. This switch initiates the Dark Calibration procedure. When initiated by the user (See Section 9.6.1 for more details), the dark calibration process opens this switch, interrupting the signal from the IR photo-detector. This allows the analyzer to measure any offset caused by the sync/demod board circuitry. 12.4.3.5. When active, this circuit generates a specific waveform intended to simulate the function of the IR photo-detector but with a known set of value which is substituted for the detector’s actual signal via the dark switch. It may also be initiated by the user (See Section 5.4 for more details). 12.4.4. By actuating various switches and relays located on this board, the CPU controls the status of other key components. The relay board receives instructions in the form of digital signals over the I 2 C bus, interprets these digital instructions and activates its various switches and relays appropriately. 12.4.4.1. The two heaters attached to the sample chamber housing and the GFC Wheel motor are controlled by solid state relays located on the relay board. The GFC Wheel heater is simply turned on or off, however control of the bench heater also includes circuitry that selects which one of its two separate heating elements is activated depending on whether the instrument is running on 100 VAC, 115 VAC or 230 VAC line power. 12.4.4.2. The GFC Wheel operates from a AC voltage supplied by a multi-input transformer located on the relay board. The step-down ratio of this transformer is controlled by factory-installed jumpers to adjust for 100 VAC, 115 VAC or 230 VAC line power. Other circuitry slightly alters the phase of the AC power supplied to the motor during start up based on whether line power is 50Hz or 60 Hz. Normally, the GFC Wheel Motor is always turning while the analyzer is on. A physical switch located on the relay board can be used to turn the motor off for certain diagnostic procedures. 06864D DCN7562 297 Theory of Operation Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer 12.4.4.3. Any zero/span/shutoff valve options installed in the analyzer are controlled by a set of electronic switches located on the relay board. These switches, under CPU control, supply the +12VDC needed to activate each valve’s solenoid. 12.4.4.4. The relay board supplies a constant 11.5VDC to the IR Source. Under normal operation the IR source is always on. 298 06864D DCN7562 Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Theory of Operation 12.4.4.5. Eight LEDs are located on the analyzer’s relay board to show the current status on the various control functions performed by the relay board. They are listed on Table 12-4. Table 12-4: Relay Board Status LEDs LED D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 COLOR RED FUNCTION Watch Dog Circuit YELLOW YELLOW YELLOW GREEN GREEN Wheel Heater Bench Heater Spare Sample/Cal Gas Valve Option Zero/Span Gas Valve Option STATUS WHEN LIT STATUS WHEN UNLIT Cycles On/Off every 3 seconds under direct control of the analyzer’s CPU. HEATING HEATING N/A NOT HEATING NOT HEATING N/A Valve Open to CAL GAS FLOW Valve Open to SPAN GAS FLOW Valve Open to SAMPLE Gas Flow GREEN GREEN Shutoff Valve Option IR SOURCE Valve Open to CAL GAS FLOW Source ON Valve Open to ZERO GAS FLOW Valve CLOSED to CAL GAS FLOW Source OFF Figure 12-15: Location of relay board Status LEDs 12.4.4.6. Special circuitry on the relay board monitors the activity on the I 2 C bus and drives LED D1. Should this LED ever stay ON or OFF for 30 seconds, the watch dog circuit will automatically shut off all valves as well as turn off the IR Source and all heaters. The GFC Wheel motor will still be running as will the Sample Pump, which is not controlled by the relay board. 06864D DCN7562 299 Theory of Operation Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer 12.4.5. This printed circuit assembly provides a multitude of functions including, A/D conversion, digital input/output, PC-104 to I 2 C translation, temperature sensor signal processing and is a pass through for the RS-232 and RS-485 signals. 12.4.5.1. Analog signals, such as the voltages received from the analyzer’s various sensors, are converted into digital signals that the CPU can understand and manipulate by the analog to digital converter (A/D). Under the control of the CPU, this functional block selects a particular signal input (e.g. BOX TEMP, CO MEAS , CO REF , etc.) and then coverts the selected voltage into a digital word. The A/D consists of a Voltage-to-Frequency (V-F) converter, a Programmable Logic Device (PLD), three multiplexers, several amplifiers and some other associated devices. The V-F converter produces a frequency proportional to its input voltage. The PLD counts the output of the V-F during a specified time period, and sends the result of that count, in the form of a binary number, to the CPU. The A/D can be configured for several different input modes and ranges but in the T300/T300M is used in uni-polar mode with a +5 V full scale. The converter includes a 1% over and under-range. This allows signals from –0.05 V to +5.05 V to be fully converted. For calibration purposes, two reference voltages are supplied to the A/D converter: Reference Ground and +4.096 VDC. During calibration, the device measures these two voltages, outputs their digital equivalent to the CPU. The CPU uses these values to compute the converter’s offset and slope and uses these factors for subsequent conversions. See Section 5.9.3.2 for instructions on performing this calibration. 12.4.5.2. The key analog sensor signals are coupled to the A/D through the master multiplexer from two connectors on the motherboard. 100K terminating resistors on each of the inputs prevent cross talk from appearing on the sensor signals. O EASURE ND EFERENCE These are the primary signals that are used in the computation of the CO concentration. They are the demodulated IR-sensor signals from the sync demodulator board. AMPLE RESSURE ND LOW These are analog signals from two sensors that measure the pressure and flow rate of the gas stream at the outlet of the sample chamber. This information is used in two ways. First, the sample pressure is used by the CPU to calculate CO concentration. Second, the pressure and flow rate are monitored as a test function to assist the user in predicting and troubleshooting failures. 300 06864D DCN7562 Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Theory of Operation 12.4.5.3. This circuit provides excitation, termination and signal selection for several negative coefficient, thermistor temperature sensors located inside the analyzer. They are as follows: AMPLE EMPERATURE ENSOR The source of this signal is a thermistor located inside the sample chamber of the Optical Bench. It measures the temperature of the sample gas in the chamber. This data is used to during the calculation of the CO concentration value. ENCH EMPERATURE ENSOR This thermistor is attached to the sample chamber housing. It reports the current temperature of the chamber housing to the CPU as part of the bench heater control loop. HEEL EMPERATURE ENSOR This thermistor is attached to the heatsink on the GFC Wheel motor assembly. It reports the current temperature of the wheel/motor assembly to the CPU as part of the Wheel Heater control loop. OX EMPERATURE ENSOR A thermistor is attached to the motherboard. It measures the analyzer’s internal temperature. This information is stored by the CPU and can be viewed by the user for troubleshooting purposes via the front panel display (see Section 11.1.2). 12.4.5.4. The analyzer comes equipped with four analog outputs: A1 , A2 , A3 and A4 . The type of data and electronic performance of these outputs are configurable by the user (see UTPUT OOP BACK All four analog outputs are connected back to the A/D converter through a loop-back circuit. This permits the voltage outputs to be calibrated by the CPU without need for any additional tools or fixtures. 12.4.5.5. This channel is used to communicate digital status and control signals about the operation of key components of the Optical Bench. The CPU sends signals to the sync/demod board that initiate the ELECTRICAL TEST and DARK CALIBRATION procedures. 12.4.5.6. This External Digital I/O performs two functions: status outputs and control inputs. TATUS UTPUTS Logic-Level voltages are output through an optically isolated 8-pin connector located on the rear panel of the analyzer. These outputs convey good/bad and on/off information 06864D DCN7562 301 Theory of Operation Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer about certain analyzer conditions. They can be used to interface with certain types of programmable devices (See Section 3.3.1.4). ONTROL NPUTS By applying +5VDC power supplied from an external source such as a PLC or Data logger (See Section 3.3.1.6), Zero and Span calibrations can be initiated by contact closures on the rear panel. OWER UP IRCUIT This circuit monitors the +5V power supply during start-up and sets the analog outputs, external digital I/O ports, and I 2 C circuitry to specific values until the CPU boots and the instrument software can establish control. 12.4.6. 2 I 2 C is a two-wire, clocked, bi-directional, digital serial I/O bus that is used widely in commercial and consumer electronic systems. A transceiver on the motherboard converts data and control signals from the PC-104 bus to I 2 C. The data is then fed to the relay board, optional analog input board and valve driver board circuitry. 12.4.7. The analyzer operates on 100 VAC, 115 VAC or 230 VAC power at either 50Hz or 60Hz. Individual units are set up at the factory to accept any combination of these five attributes. As illustrated in Figure 12-14, power enters the analyzer through a standard IEC 320 power receptacle located on the rear panel of the instrument. From there it is routed through the ON/OFF Switch located in the lower right corner of the Front Panel. A 6.75 Amp circuit breaker is built into the ON/OFF Switch. AC power is distributed directly to the sample gas pump. The bench and GFC Wheel heaters as well as the GFC Wheel receive AC power via the relay board. AC Line power is converted stepped down and converted to DC power by two DC power supplies. One supplies +12 VDC, for valves and the IR source, while a second supply provides +5 VDC and ±15 VDC for logic and analog circuitry. All DC voltages are distributed via the relay board. CAUTION G ENERAL S AFETY H AZARD Should the AC power circuit breaker trip, investigate and correct the condition causing this situation before turning the analyzer back on. 302 06864D DCN7562 Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Theory of Operation SENSOR SUITES ANALOG SENSORS (e.g. Temp Sensor Control & I/O Logic LOGIC DEVICES (e.g. CPU and its peripheral devices, I 2 C bus, MotherBoard, etc.) Optional O2 Sensor PS 1 +5 VDC ±15 VDC PUMP GFC Wheel Motor AC HEATERS KEY AC POWER DC POWER ON / OFF SWITCH PS 2 (+12 VDC) Solenoid Drivers MODEL SPECIFIC VALVES (e.g. M/R Valves, Auto-zero valves, etc.) OPTIONAL VALVES (e.g. Sample/Cal, Zero/ Spans, etc.) COOLING FAN(S) OPTIONAL CO2 SENSOR PCA Figure 12-16: Power Distribution Block Diagram AC POWER IN OPTIONAL CO2 PROBE 06864D DCN7562 303 Theory of Operation Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer 12.4.8. Users can input data and receive information directly through the front panel touchscreen display. The LCD display is controlled directly by the CPU board. The touchscreen is interfaced to the CPU by means of a touchscreen controller that connects to the CPU via the internal USB bus and emulates a computer mouse. Figure 12-17: Front Panel and Display Interface Block Diagram 12.4.8.1. The LVDS (low voltage differential signaling) transmitter board converts the parallel display bus to a serialized, low voltage, differential signal bus in order to transmit the video signal to the LCD interface PCA. 12.4.8.2. The front panel touchscreen/display interface PCA controls the various functions of the display and touchscreen. For driving the display it provides connection between the CPU video controller and the LCD display module. This PCA also contains: • • power supply circuitry for the LCD display module a USB hub that is used for communications with the touchscreen controller and the two front panel USB device ports • the circuitry for powering the display backlight 304 06864D DCN7562 Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Theory of Operation 12.5. The T300/T300M Gas Filter Correlation Carbon Monoxide Analyzer has a high performance, VortexX86-based microcomputer running Windows CE. Inside Windows CE, special software developed by Teledyne API interprets user commands via the various interfaces, performs procedures and tasks, stores data in the CPU’s various memory devices and calculates the concentration of the sample gas. Windows CE API FIRMWARE Memory Handling DAS Records Calibration Data System Status Data Analyzer Operations Calibration Procedures Configuration Procedures Autonomic Systems Diagnostic Routines PC/104 BUS ANALYZER HARDWARE Measurement Algorithm Interface Handling Sensor input Data RS232 & RS485 External Digital I/O Touchscreen/Display Analog Output Data PC/104 BUS Linearization Table Figure 12-18: Basic Software Operation 12.5.1. The T300/T300M software processes the CO MEAS and CO REF signals, after they are digitized by the motherboard, through an adaptive filter built into the software. Unlike other analyzers that average the output signal over a fixed time period, the T300/T300M averages over a set number of samples, where each sample is 0.2 seconds. This technique is known as boxcar averaging. During operation, the software automatically switches between two different length filters based on the conditions at hand. Once triggered, the short filter remains engaged for a fixed time period to prevent chattering. During conditions of constant or nearly constant concentration the software, by default, computes an average of the last 750 samples, or approximately 150 seconds. This provides the calculation portion of the software with smooth stable readings. If a rapid change in concentration is detected the filter includes, by default, the last 48 samples, approximately 10 seconds of data, to allow the analyzer to more quickly respond. If necessary, these boxcar lengths can be changed between 1 and 1000 samples but with corresponding tradeoffs in rise time and signal-to-noise ratio (contact Technical Support for more information). Two conditions must be simultaneously met to switch to the short filter. First the instantaneous concentration must exceed the average in the long filter by a fixed amount. Second the instantaneous concentration must exceed the average in the long filter by a portion, or percentage, of the average in the long filter. 06864D DCN7562 305 Theory of Operation Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer 12.5.2. Calibration of the analyzer is performed exclusively in software. During instrument calibration (see Section 9) the user enters expected values for zero and span via the front panel control buttonand commands the instrument to make readings of calibrated sample gases for both levels. The readings taken are adjusted, linearized, and compared to the expected values. With this information the software computes values for instrument slope and offset and stores these values in memory for use in calculating the CO concentration of the sample gas. The instrument slope and offset values recorded during the last calibration are available for viewing from the from the front panel (see Section 3.4.3). 12.5.3. Once the IR photo-detector signal is demodulated into CO MEAS and CO REF by the sync/demod board and converted to digital data by the motherboard, the T300/T300M analytical software calculates the ratio between CO MEAS and CO REF . This value is compared to a look-up table that is used, with interpolation, to linearize the response of the instrument. The linearized concentration value is combined with calibration slope and offset values, then normalized for changes in sample gas pressure to produce the final CO concentration. This is the value that is displayed on the instrument front panel display and is stored in memory by the analyzer’s DAS system. 12.5.4. Changes in pressure can have a noticeable, effect on the CO concentration calculation. To account for this, the T300/T300M software includes a feature which allows the instrument to compensate for the CO calculations based on changes in ambient pressure. The TPC feature multiplies the analyzer’s CO concentration by a factor which is based on the difference between the ambient pressure of the sample gas normalized to standard atmospheric pressure. As ambient pressure increases, the compensated CO concentration is decreased. 12.5.5. The DAS is designed to implement predictive diagnostics that stores trending data for users to anticipate when an instrument will require service. Large amounts of data can be stored in non-volatile memory and retrieved in plain text format for further processing with common data analysis programs. The DAS has a consistent user interface in all Teledyne API analyzers. New data parameters and triggering events can be added to the instrument as needed. Depending on the sampling frequency and the number of data parameters the DAS can store several months of data, which are retained even when the instrument is powered off or a new firmware is installed. The DAS permits users to access the data through the instrument’s front panel or the remote interface. The latter can automatically download stored data for further processing. For information on using the DAS, refer to Section 7 306 06864D DCN7562 Note: Some terms in this glossary may not occur elsewhere in this manual. Term 10Base-T 100Base-T APICOM ASSY CAS CD CE Corona Discharge , a frequently luminous discharge, at the surface of a conductor or between two conductors of the same transmission line, accompanied by ionization of the surrounding atmosphere and often by a power loss Converter Efficiency , the percentage of light energy that is actually converted into electricity Continuous Emission Monitoring CEM Chemical formulas that may be included in this document: CO 2 carbon dioxide C 3 H 8 CH 4 propane methane H 2 O HC HNO 3 H 2 S water vapor general abbreviation for hydrocarbon nitric acid hydrogen sulfide NO NO 2 NO X NO y NH O O 2 3 SO 3 2 nitric oxide nitrogen dioxide nitrogen oxides, here defined as the sum of NO and NO ammonia molecular oxygen ozone sulfur dioxide 2 nitrogen oxides, often called odd nitrogen: the sum of NO X plus other compounds such as HNO 3 (definitions vary widely and may include nitrate (NO 3 ), PAN, N 2 O and other compounds as well) cm 3 metric abbreviation for cubic centimeter (replaces the obsolete abbreviation “cc”) CPU DAC Description/Definition an Ethernet standard that uses twisted (“T”) pairs of copper wires to transmit at 10 megabits per second (Mbps) same as 10BaseT except ten times faster (100 Mbps) name of a remote control program offered by Teledyne-API to its customers Assembly Code-Activated Switch Central Processing Unit Digital-to-Analog Converter 06864D DCN7562 307 Glossary DAS DCE DFU DHCP DIAG DOM DOS DRAM DR-DOS DTE EEPROM ESD ETEST Ethernet FEP Flash FPI GFC I 2 C bus IC IP IZS LAN 308 Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Data Acquisition System Data Communication Equipment Dry Filter Unit Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol. A protocol used by LAN or Internet servers to automatically set up the interface protocols between themselves and any other addressable device connected to the network Diagnostics , the diagnostic settings of the analyzer. Disk On Module, a 44-pin IDE flash drive with up to 128MB storage capacity for instrument’s firmware, configuration settings and data Disk Operating System Dynamic Random Access Memory Digital Research DOS Data Terminal Equipment Electrically Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory also referred to as a FLASH chip or drive Electro-Static Discharge Electrical Test a standardized (IEEE 802.3) computer networking technology for local area networks (LANs), facilitating communication and sharing resources Fluorinated Ethylene Propylene polymer, one of the polymers that Du Pont markets as Teflon ® non-volatile, solid-state memory Fabry-Perot Interface : a special light filter typically made of a transparent plate with two reflecting surfaces or two parallel, highly reflective mirrors Gas Filter Correlation a clocked, bi-directional, serial bus for communication between individual analyzer components Integrated Circuit , a modern, semi-conductor circuit that can contain many basic components such as resistors, transistors, capacitors etc in a miniaturized package used in electronic assemblies Internet Protocol Internal Zero Span Local Area Network 06864D DCN7562 Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Glossary LCD LED LPM MFC M/R MOLAR MASS NDIR NIST-SRM PC PCA PC/AT PCB PFA PLC PLD PLL PMT P/N (or PN) PSD PTFE PVC Rdg RS-232 Liquid Crystal Display Light Emitting Diode Liters Per Minute Mass Flow Controller Measure/Reference the mass, expressed in grams, of 1 mole of a specific substance. Conversely, one mole is the amount of the substance needed for the molar mass to be the same number in grams as the atomic mass of that substance. EXAMPLE: The atomic weight of Carbon is 12 therefore the molar mass of Carbon is 12 grams. Conversely, one mole of carbon equals the amount of carbon atoms that weighs 12 grams. Atomic weights can be found on any Periodic Table of Elements. Non-Dispersive Infrared National Institute of Standards and Technology - Standard Reference Material Personal Computer P rinted Circuit Assembly , the PCB with electronic components, ready to use Personal Computer / Advanced Technology Printed Circuit Board , the bare board without electronic component Perfluoroalkoxy , an inert polymer; one of the polymers that Du Pont markets as Teflon ® Programmable Logic Controller , a device that is used to control instruments based on a logic level signal coming from the analyzer Programmable Logic Device Phase Lock Loop Photo Multiplier Tube , a vacuum tube of electrodes that multiply electrons collected and charged to create a detectable current signal Part Number Prevention of Significant Deterioration Polytetrafluoroethylene , a very inert polymer material used to handle gases that may react on other surfaces; one of the polymers that Du Pont markets as Teflon ® Poly Vinyl Chloride , a polymer used for downstream tubing Reading specification and standard describing a serial communication method between DTE (Data Terminal Equipment) and DCE (Data Circuit-terminating Equipment) devices, using a maximum cable-length of 50 feet 06864D DCN7562 309 Glossary RS-485 SAROAD SLAMS SLPM STP TCP/IP TEC TPC USB VARS V-F Z/S Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer specification and standard describing a binary serial communication method among multiple devices at a data rate faster than RS-232 with a much longer distance between the host and the furthest device Storage and Retrieval of Aerometric Data State and Local Air Monitoring Network Plan Standard Liters Per Minute of a gas at standard temperature and pressure Standard Temperature and Pressure Transfer Control Protocol / Internet Protocol , the standard communications protocol for Ethernet devices Thermal Electric Cooler Temperature/Pressure Compensation Universal Serial Bus : a standard connection method to establish communication between peripheral devices and a host controller, such as a mouse and/or keyboard and a personal computer or laptop Variables , the variable settings of the instrument Voltage-to-Frequency Zero / Span . 310 06864D DCN7562 Index A Absorption Path Lengths, 278 AIN, 125 , 86, 130 , 69, 83 Analog Inputs, 125 Analog Outputs, 39, 40, 41, 85, 86, 88, 89, 90, 106, – , 264, 265 Ain Calibration, 125 CONC1 , 71 CONC2 , 71 Configuration & Calibration, 86, 111, 113, 114, 116, 117, 119, 121, 123, 124, 125 Automatic, 31, 85, 117 Manual-Current Loop, 120, 122 Manual-Voltage, 118 Electrical Connections, 39 Electronic Range Selection, 92, 112 Output Loop Back, 299 Over-Range Feature, 123 Pin Assignments, 40 Recorder Offset, 124 Reporting Range, 72, 85 Test Channel, 128 BENCH TEMP, 128 CHASSIS TEMP, 128 CO MEASURE, 128 CO REFERFENCE, 128 NONE, 128 O 2 CELL TEMP, 128 PHT DRIVE, 128 SAMPLE FLOW, 128 SAMPLE PRESS, 128 SAMPLE TEMP, 128 WHEEL TEMP, 128 AOUT Calibration Feature, 114 APICOM, 17, 18, 134, 157, 160, 171, 176, 177, 189, 229 and DAS System, 159, 163, 168, 171, 173, 174, 177 Interface Example, 176 Software Download, 177 ATIMER, 159, 163, 165 AutoCal, 82, 85, 114, 202, 203, 204, 276 AZERO, 154 B Baud Rate, 147 Beer-Lambert law, 17 BENCH TEMP, 82, 239 , 69, 83, 154, 237 Bench Temperature Control, 290 BENCH_HEATER, 246 06864D DCN7562 , 69, 82, 154, 239, 255 , 69, 83, 154, 237 brass, 53, 188, 255 C CAL Button, 84, 275 CALDAT, 160 Calibration AIN, 125 Analog Ouputs, 31, 85, 117 Analog Outputs Current Loop, 120, 122 Voltage, 118 Initial Calibration Basic Configuration, 72 Calibration Checks, 190, 198 Calibration Gases Zero Air, 34 Calibration Gasses Span Gas, 56, 58, 60, 62, 65, 192, 199, 275 Dilution Feature, 98 Standard Reference Materials (SRM’s) CO Span Gas, 67 Zero Air, 56, 58, 60, 62, 65, 188 CALS Button, 84, 195, 275 CALZ Button, 84, 195 , 69, 83, 154, 237 , 69, 83, 154, 237 Carbon Monoxide, 17 CLOCK_ADJ, 101, 104 CO Concentration Alarms, 130, 131 CO MEAS, 82, 209, 228, 229, 239, 254, 257, 261, 272, 273, 280, 281, 282, 286, 292, 293, 298, 303, 304 CO REF, 82, 209, 239, 254, 257, 261, 280, 281, 282, 286, 292, 293, 298, 303, 304 CO 2 , 43, 66, 67, 72, 77, 79, 82, 95, 104, 110, 151, 154, 208, 217, 218, 219, 220, 268 , 70 , 70 CO 2 OFFSET, 82 CO 2 Sensor, 43, 66, 67, 77, 82, 154, 217, 219 Calibration Procedure, 220 Setup, 217 Span Gas Concentration, 218 Troubleshoting, 268 CO 2 Sensor Option Pneumatic Set Up for Calibration, 217 CO 2 SLOPE, 82 COMM Ports, 134, 147, 185 and DAS System, 173 COM1, 49 311 INDEX COM2, 49, 50, 134 Communication Modes, 134 DCE & DTE, 48 Machine ID, 52 Parity, 134, 147 COMM PORTS Default Settings, 49 CONC, 159, 163 CONC ALRM1 WARNING, 83, 154 CONC ALRM2 WARNING, 83, 154 , 104, 275 CONC VALID, 43, 266 CONC_PRECISION, 104 , 71 , 71 Concentration Field, 31 , 69, 83, 237 Continuous Emission Monitoring (CEM), 98 Control Buttons Definition Field, 31 Control Inputs, 43, 266, 300 Pin Assignments, 44 Control InputS Electrical Connections, 43 CPU, 49, 68, 69, 83, 87, 101, 110, 125, 209, 210, 234, 237, 239, 241, 243, 245, 267, 286, 287, 289, 292, 295, 296, 297, 298, 299, 300 Analog to Digital Converter, 69, 83, 110 Critical Flow Orifice, 159, 231, 232, 237, 247, 252, 269, 284, 285 Current Loop Outputs, 40, 41, 120, 122 Manual Calibration, 120 D Dark Calibration, 209, 295, 299 DAS Parameters editing, 166 DAS System, 31, 69, 71, 82, 83, 85, 97, 104, 178, 189, 203, 208, 229, 237, 247, 277, 304 and APICOM, 176, 178 and RS-232, 178 and Terminal Emulation Programs, 178 Channel Names, 164 Channels, 158, 161 CALDAT, 160 CONC, 159 PNUNTC, 159 Compact Data Report, 173 HOLD OFF, 104, 159, 175 Holdoff Period, 275 Number of Records, 159, 171 Parameters, 158, 159 CONC, 163 NXCNC1, 163 PMTDET, 159 Precision, 166 Report Period, 159, 169, 174 Sample Mode AVG, 166, 168, 170 312 Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer INST, 166, 168, 170 MAX, 166 MIN, 166, 168, 170 SDEV, 166, 168, 170 Sample Period, 169, 170 Starting Date, 174 Store Number of Samples, 166, 170 Triggering Events, 158, 159, 165 ATIMER, 159, 163, 165 EXITZR, 165 SLPCHG, 160, 165 WTEMPW, 165 DAS_HOLD_OFF, 104 data acquisition. See DAS System , 69, 83, 237 DB-25M, 20, 182 DB-9F, 20, 182 DC Power, 44 DCPS, 154 Default Settings COMM Ports, 49 DAS System, 159 Hessen Protocol, 150, 154 VARS, 104 , 106 , 106 , 106 , 106 , 106 , 106 , 106 Diagnostic Menu (DIAG), 86, 99, 264 Ain Calibrated, 110, 125 Analog I/O Aout Calibration Configuration, 110 AOUT Calibration Configuration, 116 AOUTCalibrated Configuration, 114 Conc_Out_1, 110 Conc_Out_2, 110 Conc_Out_3, 110 Analog I/O Configuration, 106, 111, 113, 114, 116, 117, 119, 121, 123, 124, 125 ANALOG OUTPUT (Step Test), 264 Analog Output Step Test, 106 Dark Calikbration, 106 Electrical Test, 106 Flow Calibration, 106 Pressure Calibration, 106 SIGNAL I/O, 106 Test Chan Ouptut, 106 Test Output, 110 Dilution Ratio, 98 Set Up, 74 Display Precision, 104 DUAL, 90, 93, 94 DYN_SPAN, 104 DYN_ZERO, 104 Dynamic Span, 104 Dynamic Zero, 104 06864D DCN7562 Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer E EEPROM Disk on Chip, 168 Electric Test, 261 Electric Test Switch, 295 Electrical Connections, – AC Power, 38 Analog Outputs, 39, 89 Current Loop, 120 Voltage Ranges, 118 Communications connections, 46 Control InputS, 43 Ethernet, 17 Modem, 182 Serial/COMM Ports, 49 Status Outputs, 42 Electrical Test, 106 Electro-Static Discharge, 27, 50 ENTR Button, 86, 171 Environmental Protection Agency(EPA), 67, 276 Calibration, 84 Ethernet, 17, 18, 138, 179 Exhaust Gas, 34, 284 , 34, 56, 59, 61, 63, 65 EXIT Button, 86 EXITZR, 165 External Pump, 19 F FEP, 53, 188 Final Test and Validation Data Sheet, 70, 71, 208, 257 Flash Chip, 289 Front Panel, 29 Concentration Field, 31 Display , 106, 128 Message Field, 31 Mode Field, 31 Status LEDs, 31 Touch screen Definition Field, 31 G Gas Filter Correlation, 17, 238, 271, 272, 277, 279, 280, 290, 291, 295, 300, 303 GFC Wheel, 67, 229, 238, 239, 240, 243, 244, 261, 262, 270, 271, 272, 279, 280, 290, 291, 294, 295 Heater, 295, 300 Light Mask, 282, 291, 292 Motor, 258, 262, 270, 271, 295, 297, 299 Temperature, 69, 82, 83, 128, 256 GFC Wheel Troubleshooting, 270 Schmidt Triggers, 292 Temperature Control, 290 Gas Inlets Sample, 34 06864D DCN7562 INDEX Span , 34 ZERO AIR , 34 Gas Outlets Exhaust, 34, 56, 59, 61, 63, 65 GFC Wheel, 18 H Hessen Flags Internal Span Gas Generator, 154 Hessen Protocol, 134, 147, 149, 150, 154 Activation, 148 and Reporting Ranges, 151 Default Settings, 150 Gas List, 152, 153 GAS LIST, 151 ID Code, 155 response Mode, 150 Setup Parameters, 147 Status Flag Default Settings, 154 Modes, 154 Unassigned Flags, 154 Unused Bits, 154 Warnings, 154 Status Flags, 154 types, 149 HIGH RANGE REMOTE, 44 Hold Off Period, 275 Hostname, 142 I I 2 C bus, 237, 238, 239, 243, 245, 255, 256, 259, 287, 295, 297 Power Up Circuit, 300 Infrared Radiation (IR), 17, 69, 72, 82, 83, 127, 128, 209, 229, 237, 238, 239, 240, 246, 254, 257, 260, 261, 262, 276, 277, 278, 279, 280, 282, 283, 290, 291, 292, 293, 294, 295, 296, 297, 298, 300, 304 Interferents, 72 Internal Pneumatics Basic, 248 Basic Configuration, 57 WITH OPTIONAL CO 2 SENSOR, 251 WITH OPTIONAL O 2 SENSOR, 250 Zero/Span Valves, 248 Zero/Span Valves, 59 Zero/Span Valves with Internal Scrubber, 66, 249 Zero/Span/Shutoff and Internal Scrubber Option, 250 Zero/Span/Shutoff Valves, 61, 249 ZeroScrubber/Pressurized Span, 63 Internal Pump, 53, 159, 231, 237, 251, 252, 253, 263, 269, 283, 284, 285, 300 AutoCal, 203 Warning Messages , 69, 70 313 INDEX Internal Zero Air (IZS), 34, 59, 61, 64, 66, 252, 260 Gas Flow Problems, 247 , 70 M Machine ID, 52 Maintenance Schedule, 160 Measure Reference Ratio, 280 Menu Buttons CAL, 84, 275 CALS, 84, 195, 275 CALZ, 84, 195 CONC, 104, 275 ENTR, 86, 171 EXIT, 86 MENUS AUTO, 90, 95 DUAL, 90, 93, 94 SNGL, 72, 90, 92 Message Field, 31 Mode Field, 31 Modem, 182 Troubleshooting, 268 Motherboard, 69, 110, 120 MR Ratio, 82, 228, 229, 239, 257 Multidrop, 49, 52, 134, 147 N National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) Standard Reference Materials (SRM), 67 CO, 67 NXCNC1, 163 O O 2 , 23, 40, 43, 67, 77, 79, 82, 83, 89, 104, 110, 128, 151, 154, 208, 213, 214, 215, 247, 284 , 70 , 70 O 2 CELL TEMP, 82 O 2 CELL TEMP WARNING, 83 O 2 OFFSET, 82 O 2 sensor, 40, 43, 67, 77, 82, 83, 89, 128, 154, 213, 215, 247, 284 O 2 Sensor, 215 Calibration Procedure, 216 Setup, 213, 217 Span Gas Concentration, 214 O 2 Sensor Option Pneumatic Set Up for Calibration, 213 O 2 SLOPE, 82 , 70 314 Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer OFFSET, 82, 120, 124, 228, 229, 240 Operating Modes, 106 Calibration Mode, 154 Diagnostic Mode (DIAG), 106 Sample Mode, 31, 104, 202 Secondaru Setup, 86 Optic Test, 106 Optical Bench, 232, 290, 299 Layout, 37 Optional Sensors CO 2 INTERNAL PNEUMATICS, 251 O 2 INTERNAL PNEUMATICS, 250 P Particulate Filter, 229, 230, 237, 286 , 69, 83, 237 Photometer Temperature Limits, 69 PHT DRIVE, 82, 228, 229, 239 PMT Preamp PCA, 106 PMTDET, 159 Pneumatic Set Up, 53 Ambient Zero/ Ambient Span Valves, 195 Ambient Zero/Pressurized Span, 196 Basic Bottled Gas, 55 Basic Model Bottled Gas, 190 Gas Dilution Calibrator, 57, 190 Calibration with CO 2 Sensor, 217 with O 2 Sensor, 213 Calibration Gasses, 66 Zero Scrubber/Pressurized Span Option, 62 Zero/Span Valves, 59 Zero/Span Valves with Internal Scrubber, 64 Zero/Span Valves with Internal Scrubber, 196 Zero/Span/Shutoff and Internal Scrubber Option, 197 Zero/Span/Shutoff Valves, 60 PNUMTC, 159 Predictive Diagnostics Using DAS System, 160 PRES, 82, 228, 229, 231, 239 PRESSURE SPAN inlet, 59 PTEF, 56, 59, 61, 63, 65 PTFE, 53, 188, 230 R RANGE, 82, 110, 151, 239 RANGE1, 82, 151 AUTO, 95 RANGE2, 82, 151 AUTO, 95 , 69, 83, 154, 237 Recorder Offset, 124 06864D DCN7562 Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Relay Board Status LEDs, 245 Troubleshooting, 260 , 69, 83, 237 relay PCA, 69 Reporting Range, 72, 84, 85, 88, 90, 92, 93, 95 Configuration, 85, 88 Dilution Feature, 98 Modes, 98 AUTO, 95 DUAL, 93 SNGL, 92 Upper Span Limit, 92, 94, 98 RJ45, 20 RS-232, 18, 48, 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, 80, 134, 137, 147, 158, 159, 173, 178, 179, 182, 267, 268, 298 Activity Indicators, 138 DCE & DTE, 48 RS-485, 18, 53, 134, 137, 298 S Safety Messages Electric Shock, 38, 255, 256 General, 27, 38, 53, 120, 233 Qualiified Personnel, 233 SAMPLE FL, 82, 239 Sample Flow Sensor, 286 , 69, 83, 154, 237 Sample Gas Line, 56, 58, 60, 62, 64 , 34 Sample Mode, 31, 79, 104, 202, 266 , 69, 83, 154, 237 Sample Pressure Sensor, 286 SAMPLE TEMP, 82, 83, 154, 239, 255 , 69, 83, 154 Schmidt Triggers, 292 Scubber Zero Air, 188 Sensor Inputs, 263, 298 Bench Temperature, 299 Box Temperature, 299 CO Measure And Reference, 298 Sample Pressure And Flow, 298 Sample Temperature, 299 Thermistor Interface, 299 Wheel Temperature, 299 SERIAL I/O BENCH_HEATER, 255 CO_MEASURE, 257 CO_REFERENCE, 257 PHT_DRIVE, 257 WHEEL_HEATER, 256 Serial I/O Ports Modem, 182 Multidrop, 49, 52, 134 RS-232, 50, 86, 158, 159, 173 RS-485, 134 06864D DCN7562 INDEX Shutoff Valve Span Gas, 60 SLOPE, 82, 228, 229, 240 SLPCHG, 160, 165 SNGL, 72, 90, 92 SO 2 , 70, 93 2 , 70 2 , 70 , 69, 83, 154 SPAN CAL, 43, 59, 61, 63, 66, 228, 266 Remote, 44 Span Gas, 34, 56, 57, 58, 59, 60, 62, 64, 65, 67, 71, 84, 98, 154, 188, 192, 195, 199, 203, 214, 218, 231, 237, 240, 252, 253, 254, 275 Dilution Feature, 98 Standard Reference Materials (SRM’s) ) CO Span Gas, 67 , 34 Specifications, 23 STABIL, 82, 228, 229, 239, 257, 272, 273 STABIL_GAS, 104 stainless steel, 53, 188 Status LEDs, 297 CO 2 Sensor, 268 CPU, 243 Relay Board, 245 Sync/Demod Board, 244, 258 Status Outputs, 95, 299 Electrical Connections, 42 Pin Assignments, 43 SYNC, 154 Sync/Demod Board, 127, 209, 237, 238, 239, 261, 292, 293, 294, 295, 299, 304 Photo-Detector Temperature Control, 295 Status LEDs, 244, 258 Troubleshooting, 261, 272, 273 System Default Settings, 159 SYSTEM OK, 43, 266 , 69, 83, 154 T Teledyne Contact Information Email Address , 276 Fax , 276 Phone , 276 Technical Assistance, 276 Website, 276 Software Downloads, 177 Terminal Mode, 180 Command Syntax, 180 Computer mode, 134 Test Channel, 106, 110, 128 BENCH TEMP, 128 CHASSIS TEMP, 128 CO MEASURE, 128 CO REFERENCE, 128 315 INDEX NONE, 128 O 2 CELL TEMP, 128 PHT DRIVE, 128 SAMPLE FLOW, 128 SAMPLE PRESS, 128 SAMPLE TEMP, 128 WHEEL TEMP, 128 Test Function RANGE, 110, 151 , 81, 110, 128, 264, 265 BENCH TEMP, 82, 239 BOX TEMP , 69, 82, 154, 239, 255 CO MEAS, 82, 228, 229, 272, 273 CO REF, 82 CO 2 OFFSET, 82 CO 2 SLOPE, 82 Defined, 82 MR Ratio, 82, 228, 229, 239, 257 O 2 CELL TEMP, 82 O 2 OFFSET, 82 O 2 SLOPE, 82 OFFSET, 82, 228, 229, 240 PHT DRIVE, 82, 228, 229, 239 PRES, 82, 228, 229, 231, 239 RANGE, 82, 151, 239 RANGE1, 82, 151 AUTO, 95 RANGE2, 82, 151 AUTO, 95 SAMPLE FL, 82, 239 SAMPLE TEMP, 82, 83, 154, 239, 255 SLOPE, 82, 228, 229, 240 STABIL, 82, 228, 229, 239, 257, 272, 273 TIME, 82, 239 WHEEL TEMP, 82, 239 , 82, 239 Touch screen Interface Electronics Troubleshooting, 260 U Units of Measurement, 72, 97, 98 V Valve Options, 34, 198, 296 Ambient Zero/ Ambient Span Valves Pneumatic Set Up, 195 Ambient Zero/Pressurized Span Pneumatic Set Up, 196 Calibration Using, 195, 199 Internal Span Gas Generator AutoCal, 203 Hessen Flags, 154 Warning Messages, 69, 70 Shutoff Valve Span Gas, 60 Zero Scrubber/Pressurized Span Pneumatic Set Up, 62 Zero/Span, 254 Zero/Span Valve w/ Internal Scrubber, 254 Zero/Span Valves Internal Pneumatics, 59, 248 316 Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Pneumatic Set Up, 59 Zero/Span Valves with Internal Scrubber Internal Pneumatics, 66, 249 Pneumatic Set Up, 64, 196 Zero/Span with Remote Contact Closure, 202 Zero/Span/Shutoff Valves Internal Pneumatics, 61, 249 Pneumatic Set Up, 60 Zero/Span/Shutoff Valves with Internal Scrubber Internal Pneumatics, 250 Pneumatic Set Up, 197 VARS Menu, 86, 99, 101, 104, 159, 175 Variable Default Values, 104 Variable Names CLOCK_ADJ, 104 CONC_PRECISION, 104 DAS_HOLD_OFF, 104 DYN_SPAN, 104 DYN_ZERO, 104 STABIL_GAS, 104 Ventilation Clearance, 28 Venting, 56, 58, 60, 62, 65 Exhaust Line, 56, 59, 61, 63, 65 Sample Gas, 56, 58, 60, 62, 65 Span Gas, 56, 58, 60, 65 Zero Air, 56, 58, 60, 65 W Warm-up Period, 68 Warnings, 68 ANALOG CAL WARNING , 69, 83 AZERO, 154 BENCH TEMP WARNING, 154 BENCH TEMP WARNING , 69, 83, 237 BOX TEMP WARNING , 69, 83, 154, 237 CANNOT DYN SPAN , 69, 83, 154, 237 CANNOT DYN ZERO , 69, 83, 154, 237 CO2 ALRM1 WARN , 70 CO2 ALRM2 WARN , 70 CONC ALRM1 WARNING, 83, 154 CONC ALRM2 WARNING, 83, 154 CONFIG INITIALIZED , 69, 83, 237 DATA INITIALIZED , 69, 83, 237 DCPS, 154 IZS TEMP WARNING , 70 O2 ALRM1 WARN , 70 O2 ALRM2 WARN , 70 O2 CELL TEMP WARN , 70 O 2 CELL TEMP WARNING, 83 PHOTO TEMP WARNING , 69, 83, 237 REAR BOARD NOT DET , 69, 83, 154, 237 RELAY BOARD WARN , 69, 83, 237 SAMPLE FLOW WARN , 69, 83, 154, 237 SAMPLE PRESS WARN , 69, 83, 154, 237 SAMPLE TEMP WARN , 69, 83, 154 SO 2 ALRM1 WARN , 70 SO 2 ALRM2 WARN , 70 SOURCE WARNING , 69, 83, 154 SYNC, 154 SYSTEM RESET , 69, 83, 154 Wheel temp WARNING , 69 WHEEL TEMP WARNING, 83, 154 06864D DCN7562 Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer Watch Dog Circuit, 297 WHEEL TEMP, 82, 239 , 69, 83, 154 WTEMPW, 165 Z Zero Air, 34, 56, 57, 58, 59, 60, 62, 63, 64, 65, 66, 67, 71, 84, 188, 195, 229, 239, 240, 252, 253, 254, 257, 261, 276 , 34 ZERO CAL, 43, 44, 59, 61, 63, 66, 228, 266 Remote, 44 Zero Scrubber/Pressurized Span Internal Pneumatics, 63 Zero/Span Valves, 202 Internal Pneumatics, 59, 248 Pneumatic Set Up, 59 Zero/Span Valves with Internal Scrubber Internal Pneumatics, 66, 249 Pneumatic Set Up, 64, 196 Zero/Span/Shutoff Valves Internal Pneumatics, 61, 249 Pneumatic Set Up, 60 Zero/Span/Shutoff Valves with Internal Scrubber Internal Pneumatics, 250 Pneumatic Set Up, 197 INDEX 06864D DCN7562 317 INDEX Teledyne API – Model T300/T300M CO Analyzer This page intentionally left blank. 318 06864D DCN7562 Teledyne API - T300/T300M and M300E/EM04906J DCN7122 APPENDIX A - Version Specific Software Documentation 06864D DCN7562 A-1 APPENDIX A - Version Specific Software Documentation Teledyne API - T300/T300M and M300E/EM04906J DCN7122 This page intentionally left blank. A-2 06864D DCN7562 Teledyne API - T300/T300M and M300E/EM 04906J DCN7122 APPENDIX A-1: Software Menu Trees, Revision L.8 APPENDIX A-1: Software Menu Trees, Revision L.8 TEST 1 4 4 MSG 1 CLR 1 A1: User Selectable Range 2 A2: User Selectable Range 2 A3: User Selectable Range 2 A4: User Selectable Range 2 STABIL CO MEAS CO REF MR RATIO PRES SAMPLE FL SAMP TEMP BENCH TEMP WHEEL TEMP BOX TEMP O2 CELL TEMP 2 PHT DRIVE CO SLOPE CO OFFSET CO SLOPE CO OFFSET C2O SLOPE 3 CO2 OFFSET 3 O2 SLOPE 3 O2 OFFSET 3 TIME 3 3 3 3 3 3 Press to cycle through the active warning messages. Press to clear an active warning messages. 4 1 Only appears when warning messages are active. 2 Range displays vary depending on user selections (see Section 6.13.5) 3 Only appears if analyzer is equipped with O 2 or CO 2 sensor option. 4 Only appears if analyzer is equipped with Zero/Span or IZS valve options. 5 Only appears on T300 and M300EM units with alarm option enabled. PRIMARY SETUP MENU SECONDARY SETUP MENU 5 Figure A-1: Basic Sample Display Menu 06864D DCN7562 A-3 APPENDIX A-1: Software Menu Trees, Revision L.8 Teledyne API - T300/T300M and M300E/EM 04906J DCN7122 ACAL 1 PREV NEXT MODE Go to Menu Tree SEQ 1) PART NUMBER SERIAL NUMBER SOFTWARE REVISION LIBRARY REVISION iCHIP SOFTWARE REVISION HESSEN PROTOCOL REVISION 2 CPU TYPE & OS REVISION DATE FACTORY CONFIGURATION SAVED SEQ 2) SEQ 3) PREV NEXT 3 DISABLED 1 ACAL menu and its submenus only appear if analyzer is equipped with Zero/Span or IZS valve options. 2 Only appears if Dilution option is active 3 Only appears if Hessen protocol is active. 4 CO 2 and O 2 modes only appear if analyzer is equipped with the related sensor option. 5 DOES NOT appear if one of the three CO 2 O 2 modes is selected ZERO ZERO-SPAN SPAN CO2 ZERO 4 CO2 ZR-SP 4 CO2 SPAN 4 O2 ZERO 4 O2 ZERO-SP 4 O2 SPAN 4 TIMER ENABLE DURATION CALIBRATE RANGE TO CAL 5 Figure A-2: Primary Setup Menu (Except DAS) 5 5 Go to Menu Tree STARTING DATE STARTING TIME DELTA DAYS DELTA TIME A-4 06864D DCN7562 Teledyne API - T300/T300M and M300E/EM 04906J DCN7122 APPENDIX A-1: Software Menu Trees, Revision L.8 SAMPLE SETUP CFG ACAL 1 DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE PREV NEXT VIEW CONC CALDAT PNUMTC STBZRO STBSPN TEMP PV10 PREV NEXT NX10 Selects the data point to be viewed Cycles through parameters assigned to this iDAS channel Cycles through list of available trigger events 3 Cycles through list of currently active parameters for this channel VIEW PREV CONC CALDAT PNUMTC STBZRO STBSPN TEMP NEXT ENTER PASSWORD: 818 Create/edit the name of the channel Sets the time lapse between each report YES 2 NO Sets the maximum number of records recorded by this channel 06864D DCN7562 Cycles through list of available & currently active parameters for this channel PARAMETER SAMPLE MODE PRECISION 1 ACAL menu only appear if analyzer is equipped with Zero/Span or IZS valve options. 2 Editing an existing DAS channel will erase any PREV NEXT INST AVG MIN MAX data stored on the channel options. 3 Changing the event for an existing DAS channel DOES NOT erase the data stored on the channel. Figure A-3: Primary Setup Menu DAS Submenu A-5 APPENDIX A-1: Software Menu Trees, Revision L.8 Teledyne API - T300/T300M and M300E/EM 04906J DCN7122 CFG ACAL DAS RNGE PASS CLK COMM SAMPLE SETUP MORE VARS ENTER PASSWORD: 818 DIAG ID INET 1 HESN 2 COM1 COM2 1 ENTER PASSWORD: 818 INSTRUMENT IP 3 GATEWAY IP 3 SUBNET MASK 3 TCP PORT 4 HOSTNAME 5 Go to COMM / Hessen Menu Tree COMM and VARS Submenus ENTER PASSWORD: 818 Go to DIAG Menu Tree 1 E-series: Only appears if optional Ethernet PCA is installed. NOTE: When Ethernet PCA is present COM2 submenu disappears. 2 Only appears if HESSEN PROTOCOL mode is ON (See COM1 & COM2 – MODE submenu above). 3 4 Although TCP PORT is editable regardless of the DHCP state, do not change the setting for this property. 5 INSTRUMENT IP , GATEWAY IP & SUBNET MASK are only editable when DHCP is OFF . HOST NAME is only editable when DHCP is ON . A-6 06864D DCN7562 Teledyne API - T300/T300M and M300E/EM 04906J DCN7122 APPENDIX A-1: Software Menu Trees, Revision L.8 CFG ACAL DAS RNGE PASS CLK ID INET 1 ENTER PASSWORD: 818 Go to COMM / VARS Menu Tree VARS DIAG 2 COM1 COM2 ENTER PASSWORD: 818 ENTER PASSWORD: 818 Go to COMM / VARS Menu Tree Go to DIAG Menu Tree CO, 310, REPORTED CO2, 311, REPORTED O2, 312 REPORTED 1 E-series: Only appears if Ethernet Option is installed. 2 Only appears if HESSEN PROTOCOL mode is ON. GAS TYPE GAS ID REPORTED Set/create unique gas ID number Figure A-5: Secondary Setup Menu Hessen Protocol Submenu 06864D DCN7562 A-7 APPENDIX A-1: Software Menu Trees, Revision L.8 Teledyne API - T300/T300M and M300E/EM 04906J DCN7122 A-8 CFG ACAL DAS RNGE PASS CLK COMM VARS SAMPLE SETUP MORE DIAG ENTER PASSWORD: 818 PREV NEXT SIGNAL I/ O PREV NEXT ANALOG OUTPUT Press ENTR to start test EXT ZERO CAL EXT SPAN CAL REMOTE RANGE HI SYNC OK MAINT MODE LANG2 SELECT SAMPLE LED CAL LED FAULT LED AUDIBLE BEEPER ELEC TEST DARK CAL ST SYSTEM OK ST CONC VALID ST HIGH RANGE ST ZERO CAL ST SPAN CAL ST DIAG MODE ST CONC ALARM 1 5 ST CONC ALARM 2 5 SET AUTO REF 5 SET CO2 CAL 4 SET O2 CAL WHEEL HTR SENCH HTR 4 ST SYSTEM OK2 RELAY WATCHDOG O2 CELL HEATER 4 CAL VALVE SPAN VALVE ZERO SCRUB VALVE IR SOURCE ON 30 INTERNAL ANALOG to VOLTAGE SIGNALS 55 (see Appendix A) 1 2 3 4 5 Correspond to analog Output A1 – A4 on back of analyzer Only appears if one of the voltage ranges is selected. Manual adjustment menu only appears if either the Auto Cal feature is OFF or the range is set for CURR ent. Only appears if the related sensor option is installed. Only appears in T300M and M300EM CONFIGURATION Press ENTR to start test AOUTS CALIBRATED DATA OUT 1 1 DATA OUT 2 1 DATA OUT 3 1 DATA OUT 4 1 AIN CALIBRATED U100 DARK CALIBRATION Press ENTR to start test UP10 UP PRESSURE CALIBRATION PREV Press ENTR to start test NEXT Cycles through list of already programmed display sequences CALIBRATION INS FLOW DEL YES PREV NO EDIT NEXT DISPLAY DATA DISPLAY SEQUENCE CONFIGURATION PRNT CO CO2 4 O2 4 RANGE OVER RANGE RANGE OFFSET 2 AUTO 2 CAL CALIBRATED OUTPUT ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF Sets the degree of offset CAL 2 Auto Cal Manual Cal 3 0.1V 1V 5V 10V CURR DATA SCALE Sets the scale width of the reporting range. UPDATE ENTR DISPLAY DURATION Cycles through the list of iDAS data types. Sets time lapse between data updates on selected output DOWN DN10 D100 Figure A-6: DIAG Menu 06864D DCN7562 Teledyne API - T300/T300M and M300E/EM 04906J DCN7122 APPENDIX A-2: Setup Variables For Serial I/O APPENDIX A-2: Setup Variables For Serial I/O Table A-1: T300/T300M and M300E/EM Setup Variables, Revision L.8 Setup Variable DAS_HOLD_OFF CONC_PRECISION REM_CAL_DURATION 1 STABIL_GAS DYN_ZERO DYN_SPAN CLOCK_ADJ Numeric Units Minutes — Minutes — — — Sec./Day 15 Default Value 3 20 CO 0 OFF OFF 0 Value Range 0.5–20 AUTO, 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 1–120 CO, CO2 2 O2 3 ON, OFF ON, OFF -60–60 SERVICE_CLEAR TIME_SINCE_SVC SVC_INTERVAL Hours Hours OFF 0 0 OFF ON 0-500000 0-10000 0 1 2 3 Enclose value in double quotes (") when setting from the RS-232 interface TAI protocol CO 2 option O 2 option Description Duration of DAS hold off period. Number of digits to display to the right of the decimal point for concentrations on the display. Duration of automatic calibration initiated from TAI protocol. Selects gas for stability measurement. ON enables remote dynamic zero calibration; OFF disables it. ON enables remote dynamic span calibration; OFF disables it. Time-of-day clock speed adjustment. ON resets the service interval timer. Time since last service. Sets the interval between service reminders. 06864D DCN7562 A-9 APPENDIX A-3: Warnings and Test Functions Teledyne API - T300/T300M and M300E/EM 04906J DCN7122 APPENDIX A-3: Warnings and Test Functions Table A-2: T300/T300M and M300E/EM Warning Messages, Revision L.8 Name WSYSRES WDATAINIT WCONFIGINIT WCONCALARM1 WCONCALARM2 WSOURCE 1 WAUTOZERO WSAMPTEMP WBOXTEMP WBOXTEMP2 2 WDYNZERO 2, 3 WBENCHTEMP WWHEELTEMP WO2CELLTEMP 8 WSAMPFLOW 4 WSAMPPRESS WPURGEPRESS 7 WOVENTEMP 9 WPHOTOTEMP Message Text SYSTEM RESET DATA INITIALIZED CONFIG INITIALIZED CONC ALARM 1 WARN CONC ALARM 2 WARN SOURCE WARNING AZERO WARN 1.001 BENCH TEMP WARNING WHEEL TEMP WARNING O2 CELL TEMP WARN SAMPLE FLOW WARN SAMPLE PRESS WARN SAMPLE TEMP WARN PURGE PRESS WARN BOX TEMP WARNING BOX TEMP2 WARNING OVEN TEMP WARNING PHOTO TEMP WARNING CANNOT DYN ZERO Description Warnings Instrument was power-cycled or the CPU was reset. Data storage was erased. Configuration storage was reset to factory configuration or erased. Concentration limit 1 exceeded. Concentration limit 2 exceeded. Reference reading minus dark offset outside of warning limits . Auto-reference ratio below limit. Bench temperature outside of warning limits. Wheel temperature outside of warning limits. O 2 sensor cell temperature outside of warning limits. Sample flow outside of warning limits. Sample pressure outside of warning limits. Sample temperature outside of warning limits. Purge pressure outside of warning limits. Internal box temperature outside of warning limits. Internal box temperature #2 outside of warning limits. Oven temperature outside of warning limits. Photometer temperature outside of warning limits. Contact closure zero calibration failed while DYN_ZERO was set to ON . WDYNSPAN WREARBOARD WRELAYBOARD WFRONTPANEL 10 CANNOT DYN SPAN REAR BOARD NOT DET RELAY BOARD WARN FRONT PANEL WARN Contact closure span calibration failed while DYN_SPAN was set to ON . Rear board was not detected during power up. Firmware is unable to communicate with the relay board. Firmware is unable to communicate with the front panel. WANALOGCAL 1 ANALOG CAL WARNING The A/D or at least one D/A channel has not been calibrated. The name is used to request a message via the RS-232 interface, as in “T BOXTEMP” 2 3 T300U, M300EU T300H, M300EH 4 5 6 7 Except T360U, M360EU (APR version) T360, M360E Sample pressure or differential pressure flow measurement option GFC7000E 8 9 O 2 option T300U2, T320U2, M300EU2, M320EU2 10 Applies to E-Series only A-10 06864D DCN7562 Teledyne API - T300/T300M and M300E/EM 04906J DCN7122 APPENDIX A-3: Warnings and Test Functions TEST FUNCTION NAME RANGE RANGE1 RANGE2 CO2RANGE O2RANGE STABILITY RESPONSE 2 Table A-3: T300/T300M and M300E/EM Test Functions, Revision L.8 MESSAGE TEXT RANGE=50.0 PPM 3 CO RANGE=50.0 PPM 3, 7 RANGE1=50.0 PPM 3 CO RANGE1=50.0 PPM 3, 7 RANGE2=50.0 PPM 3 CO RANGE2=50.0 PPM 3, 7 CO2 RANGE=20 % 7 O2 RANGE=100 % 10 STABIL=0.0 PPM 3 CO STB=0.0 PPM 3, 7, 10 CO2 STB=0.0 % 7 O2 STB=0.0 % 10 RSP=0.20(0.00) SEC DESCRIPTION D/A range in single or auto-range modes. D/A #1 range in dual range mode. D/A #2 range in dual range mode. CO 2 range. O 2 range. Concentration stability). COMEAS COREF MRRATIO AUTOZERO 4, 5 SAMPPRESS PURGEPRESS 9 VACUUM 8 SAMPFLOW 6 SAMPTEMP BENCHTEMP WHEELTEMP O2CELLTEMP 10 BOXTEMP BOXTEMP2 4 OVENTEMP 11 PHOTOTEMP COSLOPE COSLOPE1 COSLOPE2 COOFFSET COOFFSET1 CO MEAS=4125.0 MV CO REF=3750.0 MV MR RATIO=1.100 AZERO RATIO=1.234 PRES=29.9 IN-HG-A PURGE=7.5 PSIG VAC=6.8 IN-HG-A SAMP FL=751 CC/M SAMPLE TEMP=26.8 C BENCH TEMP=48.1 C WHEEL TEMP=68.1 C O2 CELL TEMP=50.2 C BOX TEMP=26.8 C BOX TEMP2=29.6 C OVEN TEMP=30.1 C PHT DRIVE=2500.0 MV SLOPE=1.000 CO SLOPE=1.000 7 SLOPE1=1.000 CO SLOPE1=1.000 7 SLOPE2=1.000 CO SLOPE2=1.000 7 OFFSET=0.000 CO OFFSET=0.000 7 OFFSET1=0.000 CO OFFSET1=0.000 7 Instrument response. Length of each signal processing loop. Time in parenthesis is standard deviation. Detector measure reading. Detector reference reading. Measure/reference ratio. Measure/reference ratio during auto reference. Sample pressure. Purge pressure Vacuum pressure. Sample flow rate. Sample temperature. Bench temperature. Wheel temperature. O 2 sensor cell temperature. Internal box temperature. Internal box temperature #2. Oven temperature Photometer temperature. CO slope for current range, computed during zero/span calibration. CO slope for range #1 in dual range mode, computed during zero/span calibration. CO slope for range #2 in dual range mode, computed during zero/span calibration. CO offset for current range, computed during zero/span calibration. CO offset for range #1 in dual range mode, computed during zero/span calibration. 06864D DCN7562 A-11 APPENDIX A-3: Warnings and Test Functions TEST FUNCTION NAME COOFFSET2 CO2SLOPE CO2OFFSET 7 O2SLOPE 10 O2OFFSET 10 CO CO2 7 O2 10 TESTCHAN CLOCKTIME RANGE(s) CO2RANGE O2RANGE STABILITY COMEAS COREF MRRATIO SAMPPRESS SAMPFLOW SAMPTEMP BENCHTEMP WHEELTEMP O2CELLTEMP 2 BOXTEMP PHOTOTEMP COSLOPE COSLOPE1 COSLOPE2 COOFFSET 7 COOFFSET1 COOFFSET2 CO2SLOPE 1 CO2OFFSET 1 MESSAGE TEXT OFFSET2=0.000 CO OFFSET2=0.000 7 CO2 SLOPE=1.000 CO2 OFFSET=0.000 O2 SLOPE=0.980 O2 OFFSET=1.79 % CO=17.7 PPM 3 CO2=15.0 % O2=0.00 % TEST=1751.4 MV TIME=09:52:20 User Configurable CO2 RANGE=20 % 1 O2 RANGE=100 % 2 STABIL=0.0 PPM CO STB=0.0 PPM 1, 2 CO2 STB=0.0 % 1 O2 STB=0.0 % 2 CO MEAS=4125.0 MV CO REF=3750.0 MV MR RATIO=1.100 PRES=29.9 IN-HG-A SAMP FL=751 CC/M SAMPLE TEMP=26.8 C BENCH TEMP=48.1 C WHEEL TEMP=68.1 C O2 CELL TEMP=50.2 C BOX TEMP=26.8 C PHT DRIVE=2500.0 MV SLOPE=1.000 CO SLOPE=1.000 1 SLOPE1=1.000 CO SLOPE1=1.000 1 SLOPE2=1.000 CO SLOPE2=1.000 1 OFFSET=0.000 CO OFFSET=0.000 1 OFFSET1=0.000 CO OFFSET1=0.000 1 OFFSET2=0.000 CO OFFSET2=0.000 1 CO2 SLOPE=1.000 CO2 OFFSET=0.000 Teledyne API - T300/T300M and M300E/EM 04906J DCN7122 DESCRIPTION CO offset for range #2 in dual range mode, computed during zero/span calibration. CO 2 slope, computed during zero/span calibration. CO 2 offset, computed during zero/span calibration. O 2 slope, computed during zero/span calibration. O 2 offset, computed during zero/span calibration. CO concentration for current range. CO 2 concentration. O 2 concentration. Value output to TEST_OUTPUT analog output, selected with TEST_CHAN_ID variable. Current instrument time of day clock. CO 2 range. O 2 range. Concentration stability (standard deviation based on setting of STABIL_FREQ and STABIL_SAMPLES ). Detector measure reading. Detector reference reading. Measure/reference ratio. Sample pressure. Sample flow rate. Sample temperature. Bench temperature. Wheel temperature. O 2 sensor cell temperature. Internal chassis temperature. Photometer temperature. CO slope for current range, computed during zero/span calibration. CO slope for range #1 in dual range mode, computed during zero/span calibration. CO slope for range #2 in dual range mode, computed during zero/span calibration. CO offset for current range, computed during zero/span calibration. CO offset for range #1 in dual range mode, computed during zero/span calibration. CO offset for range #2 in dual range mode, computed during zero/span calibration. CO 2 slope, computed during zero/span calibration. CO 2 offset, computed during zero/span calibration. A-12 06864D DCN7562 Teledyne API - T300/T300M and M300E/EM 04906J DCN7122 APPENDIX A-3: Warnings and Test Functions 2 3 4 5 TEST FUNCTION NAME MESSAGE TEXT DESCRIPTION O2SLOPE 2 O2OFFSET 2 O2 SLOPE=0.980 O2 OFFSET=1.79 % O 2 slope, computed during zero/span calibration. O 2 offset, computed during zero/span calibration. CO CO2 1 O2 2 TESTCHAN CO=17.7 PPM CO2=15.0 % O2=0.00 WT% TEST=1751.4 MV CO concentration for current range. CO 2 concentration. O 2 concentration. Value output to TEST_OUTPUT analog output, selected with TEST_CHAN_ID variable. CLOCKTIME 1 TIME=09:52:20 Current instrument time of day clock. The name is used to request a message via the RS-232 interface, as in “T BOXTEMP” Engineering software Current instrument units T300U, M300EU T300H, M300EH 6 7 Except T360U, M360EU (APR version) T360, M360E 8 9 Sample pressure or differential pressure flow measurement option GFC7000E 10 O 2 option 11 T300U2, T320U2, M300EU2, M320EU2 06864D DCN7562 A-13 APPENDIX A-4: Signal I/O Definitions Teledyne API - T300/T300M and M300E/EM 04906J DCN7122 APPENDIX A-4: Signal I/O Definitions Table A-4: Signal I/O Definitions for T300/T300M and M300E/EM Series Analyzers, Revision L.8 Signal Name Bit or Channel Number Description Internal inputs, U7, J108, pins 9–16 = bits 0–7, default I/O address 322 hex SYNC_OK ELEC_TEST DARK_CAL I2C_RESET I2C_DRV_RST EXT_ZERO_CAL 0 1–7 Spare Internal outputs, U8, J108, pins 1 – 8 = bits 0 – 7, default I/O address 322 hex 0 1 = sync. OK 0 = sync. error 1 = electrical test on 0 = off 1 0 1 = dark calibration on 0 = off 2–5 6 7 Spare 1 = reset I2C peripherals 0 = normal 0 = hardware reset 8584 chip 1 = normal Control inputs, U11, J1004, pins 1–6 = bits 0–5, default I/O address 321 hex 0 = go into zero calibration 1 = exit zero calibration EXT_SPAN_CAL REMOTE_RANGE_HI 1 2 3–5 0 = go into span calibration 1 = exit span calibration 0 = select high range during contact closure calibration 1 = select low range Spare 6–7 Always 1 Control inputs, U14, J1006, pins 1 – 6 = bits 0 – 5, default I/O address 325 hex 0–5 6–7 Spare Always 1 Control outputs, U17, J1008, pins 1 – 8 = bits 0 – 7, default I/O address 321 hex 0–7 Spare Control outputs, U21, J1008, pins 9 – 12 = bits 0 – 3, default I/O address 325 hex 0–3 Spare A-14 06864D DCN7562 Teledyne API - T300/T300M and M300E/EM 04906J DCN7122 APPENDIX A-4: Signal I/O Definitions Signal Name Bit or Channel Number Description Alarm outputs, U21, J1009, pins 1 – 12 = bits 4 – 7, default I/O address 325 hex ST_SYSTEM_OK2 4 1 = system OK 0 = any alarm condition or in diagnostics mode ST_CONC_ALARM_1 8 5 1 = conc. limit 1 exceeded 0 = conc. OK ST_HIGH_RANGE 10 + 13 5 1 = high auto-range in use 0 = low auto-range ST_CONC_ALARM_2 8 6 1 = conc. limit 2 exceeded 0 = conc. OK ST_ZERO_CAL 10 + 13 6 1 = in zero calibration 0 = not in zero ST_HIGH_RANGE2 16 7 1 = high auto-range in use (mirrors ST_HIGH_RANGE status output) 0 = low auto-range A status outputs, U24, J1017, pins 1 – 8 = bits 0 – 7, default I/O address 323 hex ST_SYSTEM_OK 0 0 = system OK 1 = any alarm condition ST_CONC_VALID 1 ST_HIGH_RANGE ST_ZERO_CAL ST_SPAN_CAL 2 3 4 0 = conc. valid 1 = hold off or other conditions 0 = high auto-range in use 1 = low auto-range 0 = in zero calibration 1 = not in zero 0 = in span calibration 1 = not in span ST_DIAG_MODE ST_AUTO_REF 3 ST_AUTO_REF ST_CO2_CAL 7 ST_O2_CAL 5 2 5 6 7 0 = in diagnostic mode 1 = not in diagnostic mode 0 = in auto-reference mode 1 = not in auto-reference mode Spare B status outputs, U27, J1018, pins 1 – 8 = bits 0 – 7, default I/O address 324 hex 0 1–5 6 7 0 = in auto-reference mode 1 = not in auto-reference mode Spare 0 = in CO 2 calibration 1 = not in CO 2 calibration 0 = in O 2 calibration 1 = not in O 2 calibration 06864D DCN7562 A-15 APPENDIX A-4: Signal I/O Definitions Teledyne API - T300/T300M and M300E/EM 04906J DCN7122 Signal Name Bit or Channel Number Description Front panel I 2 C keyboard, default I 2 C address 4E hex MAINT_MODE LANG2_SELECT SAMPLE_LED CAL_LED 5 (input) 6 (input) 8 (output) 9 (output) 0 = maintenance mode 1 = normal mode 0 = select second language 1 = select first language (English) 0 = sample LED on 1 = off 0 = cal. LED on 1 = off FAULT_LED AUDIBLE_BEEPER RELAY_WATCHDOG WHEEL_HTR BENCH_HTR O2_CELL_HEATER BOX2_HEATER CAL_VALVE SPAN_VALVE 3 OVEN_HEATER IR_SOURCE_ON , 15 SHUTOFF_VALVE 5 ZERO_SCRUB_VALVE 2,3 10 (output) 0 = fault LED on 1 = off 14 (output) 0 = beeper on (for diagnostic testing only) 1 = off Relay board digital output (PCF8574), default I 2 C address 44 hex 0 Alternate between 0 and 1 at least every 5 seconds to keep relay board active 1 2 3 3 4 5 6 6 7 7 3,15 n/a 3,15 0 = wheel heater on 1 = off 0 = optical bench heater on 1 = off 0 = O 2 sensor cell heater on 1 = off 0 = internal box temperature #2/oven heater on 1 = off 0 = let cal. gas in 1 = let sample gas in 0 = let span gas in 1 = let zero gas in 0 = open zero scrubber valve 1 = close 0 = energize shutoff valve 1 = de-energize 0 = IR source on 1 = off A-16 06864D DCN7562 Teledyne API - T300/T300M and M300E/EM 04906J DCN7122 Signal Name SAMPLE_PRESSURE VACUUM_PRESSURE 6 PURGE_PRESSURE 9, 10 CO_MEASURE CO_REFERENCE SAMPLE_FLOW PHOTO_TEMP TEST_INPUT_7 TEST_INPUT_8 REF_4096_MV O2_SENSOR 5 CO2_SENSOR 7 REF_GND BOX_TEMP SAMPLE_TEMP BENCH_TEMP WHEEL_TEMP TEMP_INPUT_4 TEMP_INPUT_5 O2_CELL_TEMP 5 BOX2_TEMP 3 OVEN_TEMP 19,23 DAC_CHAN_1 DAC_CHAN_2 DAC_CHAN_3 DAC_CHAN_4 Bit or Channel Number Rear board primary MUX analog inputs Description 0 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Sample pressure Vacuum pressure Purge pressure Detector measure reading Detector reference reading Temperature MUX Sample flow Photometer detector temperature Diagnostic test input Diagnostic test input 4.096V reference from MAX6241 O 2 concentration sensor Spare 1 2 3 4 5 6 6 12 13 14 CO 2 concentration sensor Spare DAC loopback MUX 15 Ground reference Rear board temperature MUX analog inputs 0 Internal box temperature Sample temperature Optical bench temperature Wheel temperature Diagnostic temperature input Diagnostic temperature input O 2 sensor cell temperature Internal box temperature #2 / oven temperature 7 0 1 2 3 Spare Rear board DAC MUX analog inputs DAC channel 0 loopback DAC channel 1 loopback DAC channel 2 loopback DAC channel 3 loopback APPENDIX A-4: Signal I/O Definitions 06864D DCN7562 A-17 APPENDIX A-4: Signal I/O Definitions Teledyne API - T300/T300M and M300E/EM 04906J DCN7122 Signal Name Bit or Channel Number Rear board analog outputs Description CONC_OUT_1, DATA_OUT_1 CONC_OUT_2, DATA_OUT_2 CONC_OUT_3, 7, 5 DATA_OUT_3 0 1 2 Concentration output #1 (CO, range #1), Data output #1 Concentration output #2 (CO, range #2), Data output #2 Concentration output #3 (CO 2 or O 2 ), Data output #3 TEST_OUTPUT, 3 Test measurement output, DATA_OUT_4 Data output #4 1 2 3 4 Hessen protocol T300H, M300EH T300U, M300EU T320, M320E 5 6 7 8 O 2 option Sample pressure or differential pressure flow measurement option CO 2 option Concentration alarms option 9 T360, M360E 10 GFC7000E 11 T300M, M300EM 13 Air Products special #1 14 Air Products special #2 15 T300U2, M300EU2 16 High auto range relay option A-18 06864D DCN7562 Teledyne API - T300/T300M and M300E/EM 04906J DCN7122 APPENDIX A-5: DAS Triggers and Parameters APPENDIX A-5: DAS Triggers and Parameters Table A-5: T300/T300M and M300E/EM DAS Trigger Events, Revision L.8 SYNCW BNTMPW WTEMPW O2TMPW 7 STEMPW SFLOWW 6 SPRESW PPRESW 4 BTEMPW BTMP2W 2 , OVTMPW 8 Name ATIMER EXITZR EXITSP EXITMP EXITC2 5 SLPCHG CO2SLC 5 O2SLPC 7 EXITDG SOURCW AZEROW 1, 2 CONCW1 1, 3, 4 CONCW2 1, 3, 4 Description Automatic timer expired Exit zero calibration mode Exit span calibration mode Exit multi-point calibration mode Exit CO 2 calibration mode Slope and offset recalculated CO 2 slope and offset recalculated O 2 slope and offset recalculated Exit diagnostic mode Source warning Auto-zero warning Concentration limit 1 exceeded Concentration limit 2 exceeded Sync warning Bench temperature warning Wheel temperature warning O 2 sensor cell temperature warning Sample temperature warning Sample flow warning Sample pressure warning Purge pressure warning Internal box temperature warning Internal box temperature #2/oven warning PTEMPW 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 T300H, M300EH T300U, M300EU T320, M320E GFC7000E T360, M360E Except M360EU (APR version) O 2 option Photometer detector temperature warning T300U2, T320U2, M300EU2, M320EU2 06864D DCN7562 A-19 APPENDIX A-5: DAS Triggers and Parameters Teledyne API - T300/T300M and M300E/EM 04906J DCN7122 Name DETMES DETREF RATIO SLOPE1 SLOPE2 OFSET1 OFSET2 CO2SLP 5 CO2OFS 5 O2SLPE 8 O2OFST 8 AZERO 1,2 ZSCNC1 ZSCNC2 CO2ZSC 5 O2ZSCN 8 CONC1 CONC2 CO2CNC 5 O2CONC 8 STABIL BNTEMP BNCDTY WTEMP WHLDTY O2TEMP 8 SMPTMP SMPFLW 6 SMPPRS VACUUM 1, 3, 6 PRGPRS 4 BOXTMP BX2TMP 2 , OVNTMP 9 Table A-6: T300/T300M and M300E/EM DAS Parameters, Revision L.8 Detector measure reading Description Detector reference reading M/R ratio. Slope for range #1 Slope for range #2 Offset for range #1 Offset for range #2 CO 2 slope CO 2 offset O 2 slope O 2 offset Auto-zero reading Concentration for range #1 during zero/span calibration, just before computing new slope and offset Concentration for range #2 during zero/span calibration, just before computing new slope and offset CO 2 concentration during zero/span calibration, just before computing new slope and offset O 2 concentration during zero/span calibration, just before computing new slope and offset Concentration for range #1 Concentration for range #2 CO 2 concentration O 2 concentration Concentration stability Bench temperature Bench temperature control duty cycle Wheel temperature Wheel temperature control duty cycle O 2 sensor cell temperature Sample temperature Sample flow Sample pressure Vacuum pressure Purge pressure Internal box temperature Internal box temperature #2/oven mV mV none none none none none none % none % M/R PPM PPM % % Units PPM PPM % % PPM ° C Fraction (0.0 = off, 1.0 = on full) ° C Fraction (0.0 = off, 1.0 = on full) ° C ° C cc/m "Hg "Hg PSIG ° C ° C A-20 06864D DCN7562 Teledyne API - T300/T300M and M300E/EM 04906J DCN7122 APPENDIX A-5: DAS Triggers and Parameters Name BX2DTY 2 , OVNDTY 9 Description Internal box temperature #2/oven control duty cycle Fraction Units (0.0 = off, 1.0 = on full) mV PHTDRV TEST7 Photometer detector temperature drive Diagnostic test input (TEST_INPUT_7) mV TEST8 TEMP4 TEMP5 Diagnostic test input (TEST_INPUT_8) Diagnostic temperature input (TEMP_INPUT_4) Diagnostic temperature input (TEMP_INPUT_5) mV ° C ° C mV REFGND Ground reference (REF_GND) RF4096 XIN1 4 XIN1SLPE 4 XIN1OFST 4 XIN2 4 XIN2SLPE 4 XIN2OFST 4 XIN3 4 XIN3SLPE 4 XIN3OFST 4 XIN4 4 XIN4SLPE 4 4096 mV reference (REF_4096_MV) Channel 1 Analog In Channel 1 Analog In Slope Channel 1 Analog In Offset Channel 2 Analog In Channel 2 Analog In Slope Channel 2 Analog In Offset Channel 3 Analog In Channel 3 Analog In Slope Channel 3 Analog In Offset Channel 4 Analog In mV Channel 4 Analog In Slope XIN4OFST 4 XIN5 4 XIN5SLPE 4 XIN5OFST 4 XIN6 4 XIN6SLPE 4 XIN6OFST 4 XIN7 4 Channel 4 Analog In Offset Channel 5 Analog In Channel 5 Analog In Slope Channel 5 Analog In Offset Channel 6 Analog In Channel 6 Analog In Slope Channel 6 Analog In Offset Channel 7 Analog In XIN7SLPE 4 XIN7OFST 4 XIN8 4 XIN8SLPE 4 Channel 7 Analog In Slope Channel 7 Analog In Offset Channel 8 Analog In Channel 8 Analog In Slope XIN8OFST 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 T300H, M300EH T300U, M300EU T320, M320E GFC7000E T360, M360E Channel 8 Analog In Offset Except T360U, M360EU (APR version) The units, including the concentration units, are always fixed, regardless of the current instrument units O 2 option T300U2, T320U2, M300EU2, M320EU2 06864D DCN7562 A-21 APPENDIX A-6: Terminal Command Designators Teledyne API - T300/T300M and M300E/EM 04906J DCN7122 APPENDIX A-6: Terminal Command Designators Table A-7: Terminal Command Designators COMMAND ? [ID] LOGON [ID] LOGOFF [ID] T [ID] W [ID] C [ID] D [ID] V [ID] ADDITIONAL COMMAND SYNTAX password SET ALL|name|hexmask LIST [ALL|name|hexmask] [NAMES|HEX] name CLEAR ALL|name|hexmask SET ALL|name|hexmask LIST [ALL|name|hexmask] [NAMES|HEX] name CLEAR ALL|name|hexmask ZERO|LOWSPAN|SPAN [1|2] ASEQ number COMPUTE ZERO|SPAN EXIT ABORT LIST name[=value] LIST NAMES ENTER name EXIT RESET [DATA] [CONFIG] [exitcode] PRINT ["name"] [SCRIPT] RECORDS ["name"] REPORT ["name"] [RECORDS=number] [FROM= DESCRIPTION Display help screen and commands list Establish connection to instrument Terminate connection to instrument Display test(s) Print test(s) to screen Print single test Disable test(s) Display warning(s) Print warning(s) Clear single warning Clear warning(s) Enter calibration mode Execute automatic sequence Compute new slope/offset Exit calibration mode Abort calibration sequence Print all I/O signals Examine or set I/O signal Print names of all diagnostic tests Execute diagnostic test Exit diagnostic test Reset instrument Print DAS configuration Print number of DAS records Print DAS records Halt printing DAS records Print setup variables Modify variable Modify enumerated variable Print instrument configuration Enter/exit maintenance mode Print current instrument mode Upload DAS configuration Upload single DAS channel Delete DAS channels The command syntax follows the command type, separated by a space character. Strings in [brackets] are optional designators. The following key assignments also apply. A-22 06864D DCN7562 Teledyne API - T300/T300M and M300E/EM 04906J DCN7122 APPENDIX A-7: MODBUS Register Map Table A-8: Terminal Key Assignments TERMINAL KEY ASSIGNMENTS ESC CR (ENTER) Abort line Execute command Ctrl-C Switch to computer mode COMPUTER MODE KEY ASSIGNMENTS LF (line feed) Execute command Ctrl-T Switch to terminal mode APPENDIX A-7: MODBUS Register Map Table A-9: MODBUS Register Map 4 6 8 10 12 14 MODBUS Register Address (dec., 0-based) Description Units MODBUS Floating Point Input Registers (32-bit IEEE 754 format; read in high-word, low-word order; read-only) 0 Detector measure reading mV 2 Detector reference reading mV 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 M/R ratio. Slope for range #1 Slope for range #2 Offset for range #1 Offset for range #2 Concentration for range #1 during zero/span calibration, just before computing new slope and offset Concentration for range #2 during zero/span calibration, just before computing new slope and offset Concentration for range #1 Concentration for range #2 Concentration stability Bench temperature Bench temperature control duty cycle Wheel temperature Wheel temperature control duty cycle Sample temperature Sample pressure Internal box temperature Photometer detector temperature drive none none none none none PPM PPM PPM PPM PPM ° C Fraction (0.0 = off, 1.0 = on full) ° C Fraction (0.0 = off, 1.0 = on full) ° C “Hg ° C mV 06864D DCN7562 A-23 APPENDIX A-7: MODBUS Register Map Teledyne API - T300/T300M and M300E/EM 04906J DCN7122 48 50 52 1 54 1 56 1 58 1 60 1 MODBUS Register Address (dec., 0-based) 40 42 44 46 62 1 100 2 102 2 104 2 106 2 108 2 200 3 202 3 204 3 206 3 0 2 100 2 200 3 Description Units Diagnostic test input (TEST_INPUT_7) Diagnostic test input (TEST_INPUT_8) Diagnostic temperature input (TEMP_INPUT_4) Diagnostic temperature input (TEMP_INPUT_5) Ground reference (REF_GND) 4096 mV reference (REF_4096_MV) Purge pressure Sample flow Vacuum pressure Internal box temperature #2/oven Internal box temperature #2/oven control duty cycle mV mV ° C ° C mV mV PSIG cc/m "Hg ° C Fraction (0.0 = off, 1.0 = on full) M/R % % Auto-zero reading O 2 concentration O 2 concentration during zero/span calibration, just before computing new slope and offset O 2 slope O 2 offset O 2 sensor cell temperature CO 2 concentration CO 2 concentration during zero/span calibration, just before computing new slope and offset — % ° C % % CO 2 slope Maps to CO_SPAN2 variable; target conc. for range #2 — CO 2 offset % MODBUS Floating Point Holding Registers (32-bit IEEE 754 format; read/write in high-word, low-word order; read/write) Maps to CO_SPAN1 variable; target conc. for range #1 Conc. units Conc. units Maps to O2_TARG_SPAN_CONC variable Maps to CO2_TARG_SPAN_CONC variable % % A-24 06864D DCN7562 Teledyne API - T300/T300M and M300E/EM 04906J DCN7122 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1 20 1 21 1 22 1 23 1 24 1 25 1 26 1 100 2 101 2 102 1,2 103 1,2 200 3 201 1,3 202 1,3 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 MODBUS Register Address (dec., 0-based) Description MODBUS Discrete Input Registers (single-bit; read-only) Source warning Box temperature warning Bench temperature warning Wheel temperature warning Sample temperature warning Sample pressure warning Photometer detector temperature warning System reset warning Rear board communication warning Relay board communication warning Front panel communication warning Analog calibration warning Dynamic zero warning Dynamic span warning Invalid concentration In zero calibration mode In span calibration mode In multi-point calibration mode System is OK (same meaning as SYSTEM_OK I/O signal) Purge pressure warning Sample flow warning Internal box temperature #2/oven warning Concentration limit 1 exceeded Concentration limit 2 exceeded Auto-zero warning Sync warning In Hessen manual mode In O 2 calibration mode O 2 cell temperature warning O 2 concentration limit 1 exceeded O 2 concentration limit 2 exceeded In CO 2 calibration mode CO 2 concentration limit 1 exceeded CO 2 concentration limit 2 exceeded APPENDIX A-7: MODBUS Register Map Units 06864D DCN7562 A-25 APPENDIX A-7: MODBUS Register Map Teledyne API - T300/T300M and M300E/EM 04906J DCN7122 MODBUS Register Address (dec., 0-based) Description Units 0 1 2 MODBUS Coil Registers (single-bit; read/write) Maps to relay output signal 36 ( MB_RELAY_36 in signal I/O list) Maps to relay output signal 37 ( MB_RELAY_37 in signal I/O list) Maps to relay output signal 38 ( MB_RELAY_38 in signal I/O list) 3 20 4 Maps to relay output signal 39 ( MB_RELAY_39 in signal I/O list) Triggers zero calibration of range #1 (on enters cal.; off exits cal.) 21 4 22 4 Triggers span calibration of range #1 (on enters cal.; off exits cal.) Triggers zero calibration of range #2 (on enters cal.; off exits cal.) 23 4 1 Optional 2 3 4 O 2 CO option Set 2 option DYN_ZERO is performed. or Triggers span calibration of range #2 (on enters cal.; off exits cal.) DYN_SPAN variables to ON to enable calculating new slope or offset. Otherwise a calibration check A-26 06864D DCN7562 06864D DCN7562ANALOG INPUTS (XIN1…XIN8) OPTION CONFIGURATION
ELECTRICAL TEST
DARK CALIBRATION
PRESSURE CALIBRATION
FLOW CALIBRATION
TEST CHAN OUTPUT
SELECTING A TEST CHANNEL FUNCTION FOR OUTPUT A4
EXIT
ENTR
SETUP
MORE
ALRM (OPTION): USING THE GAS CONCENTRATION ALARMS
ALARM STATUS LIMIT SET POINT
Note To prevent the concentration alarms from activating during span calibration operations ensure that the CAL or CALS button is pressed prior to introducing span gas into the analyzer.
SETTING THE T300 CONCENTRATION ALARM LIMITS
6. COMMUNICATIONS SETUP AND OPERATION
DATA TERMINAL/COMMUNICATION EQUIPMENT (DTE DCE)
COMMUNICATION MODES, BAUD RATE AND PORT TESTING
COMMUNICATION MODES
1 2 16 8192 2048 1024
4 32 64 128 256
8
512
4096
COM PORT BAUD RATE
COM PORT TESTING
RS-232
RS-485 (OPTION)
ETHERNET
CONFIGURING ETHERNET COMMUNICATION MANUALLY (STATIC IP ADDRESS)
CONFIGURING ETHERNET COMMUNICATION USING DYNAMIC HOST CONFIGURATION PROTOCOL (DHCP)
CHANGING THE ANALYZER’S HOSTNAME
USB PORT (OPTION) FOR REMOTE ACCESS
Note
USB configuration requires that the baud rates of the instrument and the PC match; check the PC baud rate and change if needed. Using the USB port disallows use of the rear panel COM2 port except for multidrop communication.
COMMUNICATIONS PROTOCOLS
MODBUS
Minimum Requirements
MODBUS Setup:
Note
HESSEN
The following sections describe the basics for setting up your instrument to operate over a Hessen Protocol network. For more detailed information as well as a list of host computer commands and examples of command and response message syntax, download the Manual Addendum for Hessen Protocol from the Teledyne API web site: http://www.teledyne-api.com/manuals/.
HESSEN COMM PORT CONFIGURATION
I
R
D
Ensure that the communication parameters of the host computer are also properly set. Note The instrument software has a 200 ms latency before it responds to commands issued by the host computer. This latency should present no problems, but you should be aware of it and not issue commands to the instrument too quickly.
ACTIVATING HESSEN PROTOCOL
SELECTING A HESSEN PROTOCOL TYPE
Note
While Hessen Protocol Mode can be activated independently for RS-232 and COM2, the TYPE selection affects both Ports.
SETTING THE HESSEN PROTOCOL RESPONSE MODE
HESSEN PROTOCOL GAS LIST ENTRIES
HESSEN PROTOCOL GAS ID
EDITING OR ADDING HESSEN GAS LIST ENTRIES
DELETING HESSEN GAS LIST ENTRIES
SETTING HESSEN PROTOCOL STATUS FLAGS
INSTRUMENT ID
7. DATA ACQUISITION SYSTEM (DAS) AND APICOM
Note Note DAS operation is suspended whenever its configuration is edited using the analyzer’s front panel and therefore data may be lost. To prevent such data loss, it is recommended to use the APICOM graphical user interface for DAS changes (Sections . Please be aware that all stored data will be erased if the analyzer’s disk on-module or CPU board is replaced or if the configuration data stored there is reset. The DAS can be disabled only by disabling or deleting its individual data channels.
DAS STRUCTURE
DAS DATA CHANNELS
DEFAULT DAS CHANNELS
I
R
D
Sending a DAS configuration to the analyzer through its COM ports will replace the existing configuration and will delete all stored data. Back up any existing data and the DAS configuration before uploading new settings.
VIEWING DAS CHANNELS AND INDIVIDUAL RECORDS
EDITING DAS CHANNELS
DAS EDIT – Control Button Functions Button
FUNCTION
EDITING DAS DATA CHANNEL NAMES
EXIT
discards the new setting.
ENTR
accepts the new setting.
Press each button repeatedly to cycle through the available character set:
0-9, A-Z, space ’ ~ ! # $ % ^ & * ( ) - _ = +[ ] { } < >\ | ; : , . / ?
EDITING DAS TRIGGERING EVENTS
SET>
EXIT
ENTR
EDITING DAS PARAMETERS
Note DAS does not keep track of the unit (e.g., PPM, PPB, etc.) of each concentration value and DAS data files may contain concentrations in more than one type of unit if the unit was changed during data acquisition.
Note
When the STORE NUM SAMPLES feature is turned on, the instrument will store how many measurements were used to compute the AVG, SDEV, MIN or MAX value but not the actual measurements themselves.
SAMPLE PERIOD AND REPORT PERIOD
Note
In AVG, SDEV, MIN or MAX sample modes (see Section 6.1.5.3), the settings for the Sample Period and the Report Period determine the number of data points used each time the parameter is calculated, stored and reported to the COMM ports. The actual sample readings are not stored past the end of the chosen report period. When the STORE NUM SAMPLES feature is turned on, the instrument will store the number of measurements used to compute the AVG, SDEV, MIN or MAX Value, but not the actual measurements themselves. R
P
P
W
I
I
P
O
NUMBER OF RECORDS
RS-232 REPORT FUNCTION
THE COMPACT REPORT FEATURE
THE STARTING DATE FEATURE
DISABLING/ENABLING DATA CHANNELS
HOLDOFF FEATURE
REMOTE DAS CONFIGURATION
DAS CONFIGURATION VIA APICOM
DAS CONFIGURATION USING TERMINAL EMULATION PROGRAMS
I
R
D
Whereas the editing, adding and deleting of DAS channels and parameters of one channel through the front-panel control buttons can be done without affecting the other channels, uploading a DAS configuration script to the analyzer through its communication ports will erase all data, parameters and channels by replacing them with the new DAS configuration. Backup of data and the original DAS configuration is advised before attempting any DAS changes.
8. REMOTE OPERATION
COMPUTER MODE
REMOTE CONTROL VIA APICOM
INTERACTIVE MODE
REMOTE CONTROL VIA A TERMINAL EMULATION PROGRAM
HELP COMMANDS IN INTERACTIVE MODE
COMMAND SYNTAX
DATA TYPES
STATUS REPORTING
GENERAL MESSAGE FORMAT
REMOTE ACCESS BY MODEM
PASSWORD SECURITY FOR SERIAL REMOTE COMMUNICATIONS
9. CALIBRATION PROCEDURES
I
R
D
If you are using the T300/T300M for US-EPA controlled monitoring, refer to Section
. Note Throughout this section are various diagrams showing pneumatic connections between the T300/T300M and various other pieces of equipment such as calibrators and zero air sources. These diagrams are only intended to be schematic representations of these connections and do not reflect actual physical locations of equipment and fitting location or orientation. Contact your regional EPA or other appropriate governing agency for more detailed recommendations.
CALIBRATION PREPARATIONS
REQUIRED EQUIPMENT, SUPPLIES, AND EXPENDABLES
ZERO AIR
SPAN GAS
CALIBRATION GAS STANDARDS AND TRACEABILITY
Note
DATA RECORDING DEVICES
MANUAL CALIBRATION
SETUP FOR BASIC CALIBRATION CHECKS AND CALIBRATION
PERFORMING A BASIC MANUAL CALIBRATION CHECK
PERFORMING A BASIC MANUAL CALIBRATION
I
R
D
If the ZERO or SPAN buttons are not displayed during zero or span calibration, the measured concentration value during this time is out of
the range allowed for a reliable calibration. Refer to Section 10 for
troubleshooting tips.
SETTING THE EXPECTED SPAN GAS CONCENTRATION Note When setting expected concentration values, consider impurities in your span gas.
I
R
D
For this Initial Calibration it is important to independently verify the PRECISE CO Concentration Value of the SPAN gas. If the source of the Span Gas is from a Calibrated Bottle, use the exact concentration value printed on the bottle.
ZERO/SPAN POINT CALIBRATION PROCEDURE
MANUAL CALIBRATION WITH ZERO/SPAN VALVES
SETUP FOR CALIBRATION USING VALVE OPTIONS
MANUAL CALIBRATION CHECKS WITH VALVE OPTIONS INSTALLED
MANUAL CALIBRATION USING VALVE OPTIONS
I
R
D
Each of these two ranges MUST be calibrated separately.
SETTING THE EXPECTED SPAN GAS CONCENTRATION Note When setting expected concentration values, consider impurities in your span gas.
I
R
D
For this Initial Calibration it is important to independently verify the PRECISE CO Concentration Value of the SPAN gas. If the source of the Span Gas is from a Calibrated Bottle, use the exact concentration value printed on the bottle.
ZERO/SPAN POINT CALIBRATION PROCEDURE
USE OF ZERO/SPAN VALVE WITH REMOTE CONTACT CLOSURE
AUTOMATIC ZERO/SPAN CAL/CHECK (AUTOCAL)
Note The CALIBRATE attribute (formerly called “dynamic calibration”) must always be set to OFF for analyzers used in US EPA controlled applications that have internal span gas generators option installed. Calibration of instruments used in US EPA related applications should only be performed using external sources of zero air and span gas with an accuracy traceable to EPA or NIST standards and supplied through the analyzer’s sample port..
I
R
D
The programmed STARTING_TIME must be a minimum of 5 minutes later than the real time clock for setting real time clock (See Section 5.6.4). Avoid setting two or more sequences at the same time of the day. Any new sequence that is initiated whether from a timer, the COM ports or the contact closure inputs will override any sequence that is in progress. I
R
D
With CALIBRATE turned ON, the state of the internal setup variables DYN_SPAN and DYN_ZERO is set to ON and the instrument will reset the slope and offset values for the CO response each time the AutoCal program runs. This continuous readjustment of calibration parameters can often mask subtle fault conditions in the analyzer. It is recommended that, if CALIBRATE is enabled, the analyzer’s test functions, slope and offset values be checked frequently to assure high quality and accurate data from the instrument.
Note
SETUP
ACAL: PROGRAMMING AND AUTO CAL SEQUENCE
If at any time an illegal entry is selected, (for example: Delta Days > 366) the ENTR label will disappear from the control button.
AUTOCAL WITH AUTO OR DUAL REPORTING RANGES MODES SELECTED
Note
In order to automatically calibrate both the HIGH and LOW ranges, you must set up a separate sequence for each.
CO CALIBRATION QUALITY
CALIBRATION OF THE T300/T300M’S ELECTRONIC SUBSYSTEMS
DARK CALIBRATION TEST
PRESSURE CALIBRATION
I
R
D
This calibration must be performed when the pressure of the sample gas is equal to ambient atmospheric pressure. Before performing the following pressure calibration procedure, disconnect the sample gas pump and sample gas-line vent from the rear panel sample gas inlet.
FLOW CALIBRATION
CALIBRATION OF OPTIONAL SENSORS
O
SENSOR CALIBRATION
O2 PNEUMATICS CONNECTIONS
SET O2 SPAN GAS CONCENTRATION
ACTIVATE O2 SENSOR STABILITY FUNCTION
Note
EXIT
SAMPLE
Use the same procedure to reset the STB test function to CO when the O2 calibration procedure is complete.
O2 ZERO/SPAN CALIBRATION
CO
SENSOR CALIBRATION PROCEDURE
CO2 PNEUMATICS CONNECTIONS
SET CO2 SPAN GAS CONCENTRATION:
ACTIVATE CO2 SENSOR STABILITY FUNCTION
Note
Use the same procedure to reset the STB test function to CO when the CO
calibration procedure is complete.
CO2 ZERO/SPAN CALIBRATION
EPA PROTOCOL CALIBRATION
10. MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE & PROCEDURES
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
Note A Span and Zero Calibration Check (see CAL CHECK REQ’D Column of Table 10 1) must be performed following certain of the maintenance procedure listed below. See Sections 8.3 and 8.4 for instructions on performing checks.
ITEM ACTION FREQ CAL CHECK REQ’D MANUAL
DATE PERFORMED
PREDICTING FAILURES USING THE TEST FUNCTIONS
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
REPLACING THE SAMPLE PARTICULATE FILTER
REBUILDING THE SAMPLE PUMP
PERFORMING LEAK CHECKS
VACUUM LEAK CHECK AND PUMP CHECK
PRESSURE LEAK CHECK
PERFORMING A SAMPLE FLOW CHECK
CLEANING THE OPTICAL BENCH
CLEANING EXTERIOR SURFACES OF THE T300/T300M
11. TROUBLESHOOTING AND SERVICE
GENERAL TROUBLESHOOTING
FAULT DIAGNOSIS WITH WARNING MESSAGES
FAULT DIAGNOSIS WITH TEST FUNCTIONS
INDICATED FAILURE(S)
INDICATED FAILURE(S)
THE DIAGNOSTIC SIGNAL I/O FUNCTION
Note
Any I/O signals changed while in the signal I/O menu will remain in effect ONLY until signal I/O menu is exited. The Analyzer regains control of these signals upon exit. See Appendix A-4 for a complete list of the parameters available for review under this menu.
STATUS LEDS
MOTHERBOARD STATUS INDICATOR (WATCHDOG)
Motherboard
SYNC DEMODULATOR STATUS LEDS
RELAY BOARD STATUS LEDS
GAS FLOW PROBLEMS
T300/T300M INTERNAL GAS FLOW DIAGRAMS
TYPICAL SAMPLE GAS FLOW PROBLEMS
FLOW IS ZERO
LOW FLOW
HIGH FLOW
DISPLAYED FLOW = “WARNINGS”
ACTUAL FLOW DOES NOT MATCH DISPLAYED FLOW
SAMPLE PUMP
CALIBRATION PROBLEMS
MISCALIBRATED
NON-REPEATABLE ZERO AND SPAN
INABILITY TO SPAN – NO SPAN BUTTON (CALS)
INABILITY TO ZERO – NO ZERO BUTTON (CALZ)
OTHER PERFORMANCE PROBLEMS
TEMPERATURE PROBLEMS
BOX OR SAMPLE TEMPERATURE B
T
S
T
BENCH TEMPERATURE
GFC WHEEL TEMPERATURE
IR PHOTO-DETECTOR TEC TEMPERATURE
EXCESSIVE NOISE
SUBSYSTEM CHECKOUT
Note
AC MAINS CONFIGURATION
• If the unit is set for 230 VAC and is plugged into 115VAC, or 100VAC the sample pump will not start, and the heaters will not come up to temperature. • If the unit is set for 115 or 100 VAC and is plugged into a 230 VAC circuit, the circuit breaker built into the ON/OFF Switch on the Front Panel will trip to the OFF position immediately after power is switched on.
DC POWER SUPPLY
I
C BUS
TOUCHSCREEN INTERFACE
LCD DISPLAY MODULE
RELAY BOARD
SENSOR ASSEMBLY
SYNC/DEMODULATOR ASSEMBLY
ELECTRICAL TEST
OPTO PICKUP ASSEMBLY
GFC WHEEL DRIVE
IR SOURCE
PRESSURE/FLOW SENSOR ASSEMBLY
MOTHERBOARD
A/D FUNCTIONS
TEST CHANNEL / ANALOG OUTPUTS VOLTAGE
ANALOG OUTPUTS: CURRENT LOOP
STATUS OUTPUTS
CONTROL INPUTS – REMOTE ZERO, SPAN
CPU
RS-232 COMMUNICATIONS
GENERAL RS-232 TROUBLESHOOTING
TROUBLESHOOTING ANALYZER/MODEM OR TERMINAL OPERATION
THE OPTIONAL CO
SENSOR
REPAIR PROCEDURES
REPAIRING SAMPLE FLOW CONTROL ASSEMBLY
REMOVING/REPLACING THE GFC WHEEL
CHECKING AND ADJUSTING THE SYNC/DEMODULATOR, CIRCUIT GAIN (CO MEAS)
CHECKING THE SYNC/DEMODULATOR CIRCUIT GAIN
ADJUSTING THE SYNC/DEMODULATOR, CIRCUIT GAIN
VR1 Adjustment Made Here
DISK-ON-MODULE REPLACEMENT
Servicing of circuit components requires electrostatic discharge protection, i.e. ESD grounding straps, mats and containers. Failure to use ESD protection when working with electronic assemblies will void the instrument warranty. Refer to the manual, Fundamentals of ESD, PN 04786, which can be downloaded from our website at
under Help Center > Product Manuals in the Special Manuals section.
FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
TECHNICAL ASSISTANCE
12. THEORY OF OPERATION
MEASUREMENT METHOD
BEER’S LAW
o
MEASUREMENT FUNDAMENTALS
GAS FILTER CORRELATION
THE GFC WHEEL
THE MEASURE REFERENCE RATIO
I
S
N
R
SUMMARY INTERFERENCE REJECTION
FLOW RATE CONTROL
CRITICAL FLOW ORIFICE
PARTICULATE FILTER
PNEUMATIC SENSORS
SAMPLE PRESSURE SENSOR
SAMPLE FLOW SENSOR
ELECTRONIC OPERATION
PC 104 Bus
CPU
DISK-ON-MODULE (DOM)
FLASH CHIP
OPTICAL BENCH & GFC WHEEL
TEMPERATURE CONTROL
B
T
W
T
IR SOURCE
GFC WHEEL
M/R S
S
S
S
T
IR PHOTO-DETECTOR
SYNCHRONOUS DEMODULATOR (SYNC/DEMOD) ASSEMBLY
SIGNAL SYNCHRONIZATION AND DEMODULATION
SYNC/DEMOD STATUS LEDS
PHOTO-DETECTOR TEMPERATURE CONTROL
DARK CALIBRATION SWITCH
ELECTRIC TEST SWITCH
RELAY BOARD
HEATER CONTROL
GFC WHEEL MOTOR CONTROL
ZERO/SPAN VALVE OPTIONS
IR SOURCE
STATUS LEDS
I2C WATCH DOG CIRCUITRY
MOTHERBOARD
A TO D CONVERSION
SENSOR INPUTS
C
M
A
R
S
P
A
F
THERMISTOR INTERFACE
S
T
S
B
T
S
W
T
S
B
T
S
ANALOG OUTPUTS
O
L
-
INTERNAL DIGITAL I/O
EXTERNAL DIGITAL I/O
S
O
C
I
P
C
I
C DATA BUS
POWER SUPPLY/ CIRCUIT BREAKER
RELAY PCA
FRONT PANEL TOUCHSCREEN/DISPLAY INTERFACE
LVDS TRANSMITTER BOARD
FRONT PANEL TOUCHSCREEN/DISPLAY INTERFACE PCA
SOFTWARE OPERATION
ADAPTIVE FILTER
CALIBRATION - SLOPE AND OFFSET
MEASUREMENT ALGORITHM
TEMPERATURE AND PRESSURE COMPENSATION
INTERNAL DATA ACQUISITION SYSTEM (DAS)
GLOSSARY
ALRM
ANALOG CAL WARNING
107
25
BENCH TEMP WARNING
BOX TEMP
BOX TEMP WARNING
CANNOT DYN SPAN
CANNOT DYN ZERO
CO2 ALARM1 WARN
CO2 ALARM2 WARN
CONC Button
CONC1
CONC2
CONFIG INITIALIZED
DATA INITIALIZED
DIAG AIO
DIAG AOUT
DIAG ELEC
DIAG FCAL
DIAG I/O
DIAG OPTIC
DIAG TEST CHAN
38
53
Exhaust Gas Outlet
Internal Span Gas Generator
IZS TEMP WARNING
O2 ALARM1 WARN
O2 ALARM2 WARN
OC CELL TEMP WARN
PHOTO TEMP WARNING
REAR BOARD NOT DET
RELAY BOARD WARN
SAMPLE FLOW WARN
Sample Inlet
SAMPLE PRESS WARN
SAMPLE TEMP WARN
SO
ALARM1 WARN
SO
ALARM2 WARN
SOURCE WARNING
Span Inlet
SYSTEM RESET
Test Functions
TIME
WHEEL TEMP WARNING
ZERO AIR Inlet
APPENDIX A - Version Specific Software Documentation
SAMPLE
CAL CALZ
CALS
SETUP
TST> CO LOW HIGH ZERO SPAN O2
CO2
CONC CO O2
LOW HIGH CO2
LOW CO SPAN HIGH O2
CONC CO2
CO CFG CO2 ACAL
O2 DAS RANGE
COMM PASS VARS
CLK
DIAG MORE ALAR
SAMPLE SETUP
CFG
DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE
iDAS
ON
UNIT DIL
PPM MGM
LOW
OFF ON OFF HIGH
TIME DATE
SECONDARY SETUP
COMM
SAMPLE
HESN
SET> EDIT
VARIATION RESPONSE MODE TYPE1 TYPE2 BCC TEXT CMD GAS LIST STATUS FLAGS
PREV
NEXT INS DEL EDIT PRNT YES NO
ON OFF
Appendix B - Schematic
advertisement
Key Features
- Measures CO concentrations in various applications
- Accurate and reliable measurements
- Advanced technology
- User-friendly design
- Compact size and portability
- Suitable for stationary and field use
Related manuals
Frequently Answers and Questions
What is the warranty period for the T300?
Can the T300 be used to sample combustible gases?
What is the central safety grounding point for the T300?
advertisement